alcatel 9400 ux manual

3CC14295AGAA TQBJA 01

ALCATEL9400 UXLUX50

User Manual

2/374 3CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01Issue 01 -- December 2005

Status Released

Change Note

Short Title Alcatel 9400UX LUX50 2.1

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of thisdocument, use and communication of its contentsnot permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3/3743CC14295AGAA TQ BJA 01 Issue 01 -- December 2005

with supervision946LUX50

13, 15, 18, 23, 25 or 38 GHzSmall and Medium CapacityDigital Microwave Link


PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


Customer Service Support:

a Team tuned to your needs for your entire satisfaction

Congratulations on having bought your equipment from Alcatel.

We hope that it will give you full satisfaction.

For any additional information, about your AlcatelWelcomeCenter (for Technical Support or for repair process),please contact your Alcatel Contract Manager.


Table of contents

1 -- Foreword 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1 -- Structure of the manual 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2 -- Using the manual 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3 -- Safety instructions 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.1 -- General rules 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.2 -- Symbols 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.3 -- Symbols used in the document 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.4 -- Certificates of compliance with European safety standards 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.5 -- Eco--Declaration 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.6 -- Public exposition to electromagnetic fields 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 -- Description of the equipment 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 -- Alcatel 9400 Family 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1.1 -- Simplified description 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1.2 -- Configuration 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1.3 -- ALCATEL 9400 UX features 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1.4 -- Capacity configurations 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1.5 -- Typical hardware configurations 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 -- Operation 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.1 -- 1+0 configuration 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.2 -- Basic 1+1 configuration 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.3 -- 1+1 configuration with multiplexer/demultiplexer protection 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3 -- Engineering service channels 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3.1 -- ESC number 1 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3.2 -- ESC number 2 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3.3 -- ESC numbers 3 and 4 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3.4 -- ESC number 5 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4 -- Alarms, telesignalling and remote controls (TS/TC) 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5 -- Loopback options 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6 -- Equipment management 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7 -- IDU controls, indications and connectors 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7.1 -- Classic main IDU 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7.2 -- Light IDU 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7.3 -- Extension IDU 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7.4 -- Access IDU 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.8 -- Technical characteristics 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.9 -- Frequency agility bands 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 -- Installation 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 -- Delivery 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1.1 -- Checking the configuration 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 -- Labels on the equipment 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.1 -- Typical installation dimensions (1+0 configuration with integrated 1 ft) 68. . . . . . . . .

3.3 -- Installing the equipment 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


3.3.1 -- Information required for installation 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3.2 -- Precautions concerning electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and safety 70. . . . . . .3.3.3 -- Tools required 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3.4 -- Torques for the screws and connectors 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4 -- Installing 19” IDUs 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4.1 -- Installation on feet or on a wall mounting 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4.2 -- Laborack or 9U subrack installation 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5 -- Outdoor part installation 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5.1 -- General information 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5.2 -- Choosing antenna polarization 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5.3 -- Installing the configuration with pole mounting 1 + 0 (9400UXI102) 77. . . . . . . . . . . .3.5.4 -- Installing a configuration 1+0 with pole mounting 1 + 1 (9400UXI101) and integratedantenna 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5.5 -- Installing the (1+1) HSB configuration with integrated antenna 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5.6 -- Installation with non-integrated antenna 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6 -- Wiring 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6.1 -- Wiring the power supply to the 19” indoor units 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6.2 -- Equipment grounding 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6.3 -- IDU/ODU wiring 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6.4 -- Wiring the 34 Mbit/s tributary and auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6.5 -- Wiring n x 2 Mbit/s tributaries 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6.6 -- Engineering service channel wiring 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6.7 -- Alarm and remote control wiring (TS/TC) 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6.8 -- Engineering service channel ESC2 telephone handset 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7 -- Wiring between a terminal’s units 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.7.1 -- Main IDU - extension IDU wiring 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.7.2 -- Wiring the access IDU to a main and extension IDU 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8 -- Wiring between terminals of a station 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8.1 -- Tributary wiring 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8.2 -- ESC wiring 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 -- Configuration and operation software 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 -- Installing the software 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1.1 -- Warning note 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 -- Summary of SW installation steps 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2.1 -- Software loading in PC WINDOWS--NT/XP/2000 environment 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2.2 -- Installation of CT + NE software from CD--ROM 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2.3 -- End of SW installation from SWP CD--ROM 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 -- CT initial configuration 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.1 -- Preliminary Procedures 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.2 -- Craft Terminal configuration 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.3 -- NE Login 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.4 -- NE software downloading preparation 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4 -- Software download toward NE 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.4.1 -- Requirements 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.4.2 -- Summary of the SW installation phases 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.4.3 -- SW download to the NE 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5 -- NE Configuration 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6 -- General Introduction to views and menus 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.6.1 -- 946LUX50 view organization 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7 -- Introduction to the menu options 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


4.8 -- CONFIGURATION 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8.1 -- NE Time 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8.2 -- Network Configuration 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8.3 -- Alarm Severities 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8.4 -- System Settings 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8.5 -- Quick Configuration Procedure 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8.6 -- Profiles Management 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9 -- EQUIPMENT 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10 -- LINE INTERFACE 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10.1 -- Tributaries 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10.2 -- NMS Interfaces 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.11 -- RADIO 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.11.1 -- Alarm 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.11.2 -- Configuration 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.11.3 -- Frequency 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.11.4 -- RTPC & ATPC 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.11.5 -- Power Measurement 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.11.6 -- BER Measures 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12 -- EXTERNAL POINTS 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.12.1 -- Input External Points 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.12.2 -- Output External Point 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13 -- SUPERVISION 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.13.1 -- Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access) 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.13.2 -- Restart NE 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.13.3 -- Software Feature key 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.14 -- PROTECTION SCHEMES 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.14.1 -- Mux/Demux Protection Management 222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.14.2 -- Radio Protection Management 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.14.3 -- HSB Transmission Protection Management 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.15 -- LOOPBACKS 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.15.1 -- Available Loopbacks 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.15.2 -- How to activate a loopback 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.15.3 -- How to remove a loopback 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.16 -- DIAGNOSIS 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.16.1 -- Alarms 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.16.2 -- Log Browsing 240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.16.3 -- Remote Inventory 241. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.16.4 -- Abnormal Condition List 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.16.5 -- Summary Block Diagram View 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.16.6 -- Current Configuration View 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.17 -- PERFORMANCE MONITORING 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.17.1 -- General information on the performance monitoring process 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.17.2 -- Performance menu 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.17.3 -- CD (Current Data) 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.17.4 -- HD (History Data) 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.17.5 -- Threshold Data 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.18 -- Software Download 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.18.1 -- Server Access Configuration 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.18.2 -- Init SW Download 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.18.3 -- SW Status 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


5 -- Commissioning 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1 -- Order of commissioning for a link 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2 -- Installing and commissioning station A (phase 1) 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.1 -- Preliminary operations 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.2 -- Powering up the IDU 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.3 -- Configuring the IDU 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.4 -- Checking out operation 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 -- Installing and commissioning station B 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.1 -- Preliminary operations 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.2 -- Pointing the antenna with pole mounting 1+1 (9400UXI101) 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.3 -- Pointing the antenna with pole mounting 1+0 (9400UXI102) 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.4 -- Checking out operation 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4 -- Commissioning the link from station A (phase 2) 267. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.1 -- Pointing the antenna 267. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.2 -- Checking the radio transmission parameters 267. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.3 -- Remote tributary loop 267. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.4 -- Checking the transmit/receive switching function 268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.5 -- Checking quality 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.6 -- End of commissioning 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 -- Operation, servicing and maintenance 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1 -- Preventive maintenance 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2 -- Corrective maintenance 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.1 -- Methodology 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.2 -- Analyzing IDU alarm indicators 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.3 -- Corrective Servicing 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3 -- Changing IDU 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3.1 -- Replacing like for like a Light or classic IDU (1+0 or basic 1+1) 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3.2 -- Replacing a Light IDU with a classic IDU (1+0 only) and vice versa 273. . . . . . . . . . .6.3.3 -- Replacing like for like a main IDU with MUX protection 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3.4 -- Replacing like for like an extension IDU 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3.5 -- Note on IDU compatibility 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4 -- Changing ODU 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 -- Changing configurations 277. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1 -- Changing frequency 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.1 -- Changing frequency within the same sub-band 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2 -- Changing frequency within another sub-band or a different band 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2 -- Changing tributaries 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.1 -- Enabling inactive tributaries 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.2 -- Changing the tributary impedance (classic IDU) 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.3 -- Changing the tributary impedance (Light IDU versions only) 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.4 -- Changing bit rate by software 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.5 -- Changing bit rate by changing an LAU and LIU tributary boards 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3 -- Changing software feature key 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.4 -- Changing a NE’s IP Address and/or OSPF Area 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.4.1 -- From the station configured as a network element 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5 -- Upgrading software (from 946LUXn to 946LUXn+1) 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.5.1 -- Installing 946LUX50 1320CT 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


7.5.2 -- Upgrading from 946LUX12 to 946LUX50 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.5.3 -- Upgrading from 946LUX40 to 946LUX50 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.5.4 -- Upgrading from 946LUX50 to 946LUX50 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.6 -- Opening an IDU 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.6.1 -- “Indoor” unit configuration 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.7 -- Telephone service channel 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7.1 -- Deleting, inserting or changing telephone numbers 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7.2 -- Configuring the ESC 2 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.8 -- Hardware configuration of service channels 3, 4 and 5 (classic and extension IDU) 301. . . . .7.8.1 -- Configuring ESC 3, 4 and 5 in the main IDU without ESC extension 301. . . . . . . . . . .7.8.2 -- Configuring ESC 3, 4 and 5 in the ESC extension unit 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.8.3 -- Adding an ESC extension IDU 312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.9 -- Configuring ESC3 and the NMS ports (Light IDU versions) 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.9.1 -- Switch positions 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.9.2 -- Methodology 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.10 -- Configuring remote indication loops 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.10.1 -- Classic (main) IDU remote indication 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.10.2 -- Light IDU versions remote indication 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.11 -- Changing redundancy configurations 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.11.1 -- Changing from 1+0 to 1+1 without ESC extension or MUX protection 318. . . . . . . . .7.11.2 -- Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 without multiplexer protection 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.11.3 -- Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 with multiplexer protection and access IDU 319. . . . . . .7.11.4 -- Adding MUX protection with access IDU to a 1+1 configuration 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.11.5 -- Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 with multiplexer protection without access IDU 321. . . .7.11.6 -- Adding MUX protection without access IDU to a 1+1 configuration 322. . . . . . . . . . .

7.12 -- Changing power level 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.12.1 -- All frequency bands except 9418UXR201 and A9418UXR202 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.12.2 -- Frequency bands without RTPC 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.13 -- Changing 1+1 HSB coupler polarization 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.13.1 -- Polarization changing for former 1+1 coupler 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.13.2 -- Polarization changing for new 1+1 coupler 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.14 -- Changing SIMM memory boards 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.15 -- Replacing consumable items 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.15.1 -- MCU board battery 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.15.2 -- Changing fans 331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.15.3 -- Changing a fuse of an IDU 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 1 -- Human exposure to electromagnetic fields 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.1.1 -- Introduction 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.1.2 -- Standards and regulations 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.1.2.1 -- ICNIRP guidelines 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.1.2.2 -- European regulation 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.1.3 -- Evaluation of safety perimeters 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.1.4 -- Safety perimeters 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.1.5 -- Implementation of protection rules 339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.1.6 -- Conclusion 339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 2 -- Installation information 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 3 -- Set of consumables 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Appendix 4 -- Service kit 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.4.1 -- Service kit 9400UXT102 for ODU 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.4.2 -- Short service kit 3EJ04113AAAA for A9400UX flat ODU 345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 5 -- Assembling “N” type coaxial connectors 346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.5.1 -- Type 1 fitting on cable 1AC001100022 346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.5.2 -- Type 2 mounting on cable 1AC001100022 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 6 -- Pin out of user ports 348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.6.1 -- Tributaries 349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.6.1.1 -- 2 Mbit/s tributaries 349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.6.1.2 -- 34 Mbit/s tributaries 349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.6.2 -- Engineering service channels 351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.6.2.1 -- Supervision bus interface 351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.6.2.2 -- Telephone ESC with selective calling 351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.6.2.3 -- Engineering service channels ESC 3, ESC 4 and ESC 5 351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.6.3 -- Alarms and TS/TC 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.6.3.1 -- “ESC3 / ALARM I/O” connector on the Light IDU versions 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.6.3.2 -- “ALARMS I/O” connector on the main IDU 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.6.4 -- IDU “F” connector 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.6.4.1 -- 9--Pin sub--D connector wiring 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.6.4.2 -- F Interface adapter cable wiring 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 7 -- Alarm synthesis indicator 357. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 8 -- Alarm Details 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 9 -- List of models and commercial items 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.9.1 -- Hardware 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.9.2 -- Indoor equipment and software 364. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.9.3 -- Commercial items 365. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 10 -- Software and documentation list 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.10.1 -- Software 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.10.2 -- Documentation 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 11 -- List of abbreviations 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INDEX 371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


1 -- Foreword

1.1 -- Structure of the manual

This manual is for users with a solid knowledge of how to operate and install microwave links and how to usea PC-based craft terminal running the Windowst operating system. With this manual, you should quickly beable to operate the equipment. This manual is not intended to replace the training services that we can providefor your particular needs.

The manual is divided into seven chapters followed by appendixes and an Index.

-- Foreword

-- Description of the equipment

-- Installation

-- Configuration and operation software

-- Commissioning

-- Operation, servicing and maintenance

-- Changing configurations

-- Appendixes

-- Index

1.2 -- Using the manual

With this manual, you should be able to commission and operate the described equipment at a basic level.

You should always read this manual in conjunction with the attached “Update” document (if provided) so thatyou are aware of the latest equipment upgrades.

Manual updates

This edition of the manual describes hardware and software releases of the revision indexes (and above),detailed in Appendix 9.

In cases where an equipment upgrade affects the content of the manual, the relevant modification should beinserted in the “Update” document, with the same reference number, but with code type VE (instead of TQ).

When the number or extent of the changes justifies it, they should be incorporated in the body of the manualand the manual’s revision index should be incremented.

Previous versions of this documentation release

Previous versions of this documentation are available on request

Note: MS-DOS, MICROSOFT and WINDOWS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.


1.3 -- Safety instructions1.3.1 -- General rules

The followinggeneral safetyprecautionsmust beobservedby the installer and theoperator. ALCATELassumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

Ground the equipment: For Safety Class 1 equipment, always connect the power cable ground to anappropriate grounding device.

DO NOT operate the product in an explosive atmosphere or in presence of flammable gases or fumes.

For protection against fire: only replace the line fuse(s) with fuse(s) of the same voltage, current rating andtype.

Dangerous voltages:Users must not remove equipment covers or shields. The installation andmaintenanceprocedures described in this manual are for use by service-trained personnel only.

DO NOT operate equipment which may be damaged: Whenever it is possible that the safety protectionfeatures built into this equipment have been impaired, ISOLATE FROM THE POWERSUPPLY and do not usethe equipment until safe operation can be verified by service--trained personnel. If necessary, return theequipment to Alcatel After Sales for service and repair.

DONOT substitute parts ormodify equipment:Return the product to Alcatel Customer Service for servicingand repair.

Each main IDU contains a lithium battery to back up data. This battery should be changed every 7 to 10 years,when inventory memory becomes empty following a power outage (see § 7.15.1).

CAUTIONThere is a risk of explosion if the incorrect battery is used.

Only replace with a battery of the same type:M4T28--BR12SH1, Supplier: STMicroélectronics

Observe all applicable national standards regarding the disposal of used batteries.Do not burn and do not recharge.

1.3.2 -- Symbols

1.3.2.1 -- Danger symbols

When subsystems and modules have warning labels, it is extremely important to follow their instructions.

These labels are designed to indicate dangerous situations; they may contain any standard symbol or any textconsidered necessary to protect users and employees.

The most frequent danger situations and symbols are:

Danger or general warning

! Prompts the user to refer to the manual.

Dangerous electrical voltages

Close to dangerous voltages (>42.4 V AC peak, 60 V DC; power level >240 VA) you will findthis warning label

Presence of heat-radiating mechanical parts


1.3.2.2 -- Grounding symbols

Terminal for connecting the protective ground in power supply wiring

Other ground terminal

1.3.2.3 -- Other symbols

Indicates compliance with European standards

Emissions frequency: check that this complies with the standards in use in the country.

Radiation alert

1.3.3 -- Symbols used in the document

These symbols alert the reader the possible risks. They indicate:-- the cause and type of danger,

-- the possible consequences,

-- the preventive action.

1.3.3.1 -- Warning

-- protection of personnel,

-- warning of a possibly dangerous situation,

-- danger of fatal or serious injury.!

1.3.3.2 -- Precautions

-- protection of equipment,

-- warning of a procedure, practice or condition that could be dangerous toequipment or its environment,

-- danger of damage to the equipment or its environment; permanent loss of datapossible.

-- This symbol, introducing the description of a procedure, indicates that it willcause the link to be temporarily disconnected.

-- This symbol, introducing the description of a procedure, indicates that it cannotbe continued without a full knowledge of the data contained in the proceduresheet concerning the stations concerned.

STOP


1.3.4 -- Certificates of compliance with European safety standards


1.3.5 -- Eco--Declaration


1.3.6 -- Public exposition to electromagnetic fields

The public protection from electromagnetic fields emitted by the antenna of the 9400UX is one of the mainrequirements of the R&TTE Directive. An evaluation of the security measures to be implemented is presentedin Appendix 1.


2 -- Description of the equipment

2.1 -- ALCATEL 9400 FamilyThe Alcatel 9400 is a family of digital point--to--point microwave radio systems, designed to satisfy the variousdigital transmission needs of public and private networks for a large range of applications.

TheAlcatel 9400 UX family covers the frequency range from 11 to 38GHz necessary to satisfy the largest rangeof propagation conditions as well as network configurations that also provide a high spectrum efficiency from11 up to 38 GHz band with a 16QAM version.

It provides the following capacities:-- 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s with the 4QAM modulation and 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s with

16QAM modulation.

The Alcatel 9400 UX family is used worldwide in:-- cellular networks,

-- fixed access networks for Public Telecom or CLECs (Competitive Local Exchange Carrier), including:

S infrastructure of Wireless IP networks,

S direct complementary point--to--point access in LMDS (Local Multipoint Distribution Services)networks,

-- private networks,

-- and Utility networks, Security/Defense networks, etc.

Typically, the distances achieved are:-- from 5 to 30 km for the microwave frequencies (13 to 18 GHz),

-- from a few hundred meters up to 10 km for the millimeter wave frequencies (23 to 38 GHz).

2.1.1 -- Simplified description

The A9400 UX is fully compliant with the international requirements in the 13, 15, 18, 23, 25 and 38 GHz bandswith the main Tx/Rx separations available depending on the national regulations.

Alcatel 9400 UX -- 2x2 to 16x2 Mbit/s or 34 Mbit/s + 2Mbit/s

Designation Band(GHz)

Frequency(GHz) ETSI Standard Frequency plans Duplex difference

(MHz) *

9413 UX4QAM

13 12.75--13.25 EN 301 128 ERC 12--02ITU--R Rec F497--7

266

9413 UX16QAM

13 12.75--13.25 EN 301 128 ERC 12--02ITU--R Rec F497--7

266

9415 UX4QAM

15 14.4--15.35 EN 301 128 ERC 12--07ITU--R Rec F636--3

728, 315, 420, 490

9415 UX16QAM

15 14,4--15,35 EN 301 128 ERC 12--07ITU--R Rec F636--3

728, 315, 420, 490

9418 UX4QAM

18 17.7--19.7 EN 301 128 ERC 12--03ITU--R Rec F595--8

1010, 1008, 340,1560

9418 UX16QAM

18 17,7--19,7 EN 301 128 ERC 12--03ITU--R Rec F595--8

1010, 1008, 340,1560, 1092.5

9423 UX4QAM

23 21.2--23.6 EN 300 198 ERC 13--0 2 annexA ITU--R RecF637--3

1008, 1197, 1200,1232


Designation Duplex difference(MHz) *Frequency plansETSI StandardFrequency

(GHz)Band(GHz)

9423 UX16QAM

23 21.2--23.6 EN 300 198 ERC 13--0 2 annexA ITU--R RecF637--3

1008, 1197, 1200,1232

9425 UX4QAM

25 24.5--26.52 EN 300 431Class 1

ERC 13--02 annex BITU--R Rec F748--4

1008

9425 UX16QAM

25 24.5--26.52 EN 300 431Class 4

ERC 13--02 annex BITU--R Rec F748--4

1008

9438 UX4QAM

38 37--39.5 EN 300 197 ERC 12--01ITU--R Rec F749--2

1260

9438 UX16QAM

38 37--39.5 EN 300 197 ERC 12--01ITU--R Rec F749--2

1260

(*) Please consult factory if other Tx/Rx separations are requested.

The Alcatel 9400 UX system features high spectrum efficiency (minimum use of RF bandwidth for a givencapacity). The spectrum efficiency is optimizedwith the use of a 4 QAM or 16 QAMmodulation (4 or 16 statesQuadrature Amplitude Modulation) with digital filtering, providing compliance with the relevant ETSI spectrummasks and spurious emissions requirements (ERC Rec 74--01).

Capacity (Mbit/s) 2x2 4x2 8x2 16x234+2

RF channeling(4QAM modulation)

(MHz) 3.5 7 14 28

RF channeling(16QAM modulation)

(MHz) -- -- 7 14

2.1.2 -- Configuration

2.1.2.1 -- Unprotected configuration

An Alcatel 9400 UX unprotected (1+0) radio terminal is made up of the following elements:-- anOutdoorUnit (ODU): incorporating the completeRF transceiver (modem,RF units, branching filter)

and an integrated or separated antenna.The ODU is capacity independent,

-- an Indoor Unit (IDU): incorporating the baseband processing and offering tributary interfaces as wellas service channels and supervision.

The IDU is frequency independent (same unit from 13 up to 38 GHz).

Different IDU configurations are available depending on system configuration:-- a light version available in 1+0 configuration and up to 4x2 Mbit/s,

-- a classic version allowing all possible configurations (1+0, 1+1, capacity up to 16x2 or 34 +2 Mbit/s).


These two IDU versions are compatible with a same ODU and can be mixed in the same network.-- a single coaxial cable of a length which can be up to 300 m.

Figure 1 - Alcatel 9400 UX 1+0 configuration

Main IDU and Equipment Craft Terminal 1+0 9400 UX Outdoor Unit on its pole mounting, with 30cm integrated antenna

New generation unit 9400UX flat ODU

2.1.2.2 -- Protected configuration

Two types of problem can impact the availability of a radio link: equipment failures and propagation problems.

1+1 protected configurations are used to increase the availability of the link compared to 1+0 unprotectedconfiguration, by adding redundant functions to the equipment on the Outdoor and Indoor parts:

-- to secure the link in case of temporary (transient alarm) or definitive (equipment failure) malfunction,

-- to improve the performances of the equipment towards propagation problem (in some outdoor unitconfigurations only).

The (1+1) configurations include automatic errorless Rx switching.

If the link is protected, wayside traffic and auxiliary channels are automatically protected.

Various protected configurations are available with the following applications:

ODU CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONS

9400 UX

1+0 1x ODU1x antenna singlepolarization

Non--protected

1+1 HSB 2x ODU at samefrequency1x coupler1x antenna singlepolarization

Protection against failures

1+1 HSB SD 2x ODU at samefrequency2x antenna singlepolarization

Protection against failures Improvement ofperformance versusmultipath propagation

1+1 FD 2x ODU at differentfrequencies2x antenna singlepolarization (or 1 antennadual polarization)

Protection against failures Improvement ofperformance versusmultipath propagation

SD : Space Diversity, FD: frequency diversity


The above mentioned outdoor unit configurations must be associated with one of the following indoor unitconfigurations:

IDU CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONS

1+0 classic IDULight IDU

Non--protected

1+0 EXT classic IDULight IDU

Non--protected Possible to insertdedicated service channelextension cards.

1+1 BASICPROTECTION

MAIN IDU (classic)EXTENSION IDU (withoutMUX option)

Automatic switching:selection of the bestreceive path andoperational transmitter (incase of HSB)

1+1 WITH MUXPROTECTION

MAIN IDUEXTENSION IDU (withMUX option)ACCESS IDU (34 Mbit/sonly

Automatic switching:selection of the bestreceive path andoperational transmitter (incase of HSB)

Protection of the tributaryaccess includingredundant mux--demux

2.1.3 -- ALCATEL 9400 UX features

2.1.3.1 -- Equipment flexibility

Software controlled frequency:

The in--field agility of the 9400 UX is provided on a quarter frequency plan (synthesizer step 250 kHz). Only fourdifferent ODUs maximum are needed to cover the full frequency band.

Figure 2 -Sub-band breakdown

The synthesized, software controlled, RF local oscillator allows easy frequency setting.

Software controlled capacity:

The Alcatel 9400 UX system provides unique capacity agility features, controlled by software up to a maximumbit rate. This maximum can be adjusted from 2x2Mbit/s to 16x2 Mbit/s using the appropriate software featureskey.

The system capacity can be configured by software to between 2x2 Mbit/s and the maximum authorized by thesoftware features key.

Moreover, capacity upgrade can be made easily by changing only the software features key.

Transmission power control:

In certain cases, the output power of the equipment has to be decreased, to reduce interference between otherlinks in case of very short hops. This feature improves the flexibility of the network design and also increasesfrequency reutilisation

Different implementations of transmission power control are available depending on the frequency bands:


-- At 13 GHz (3CC09297Axxx),15 GHz (3CC08880Axxx and 3CC08978Axxx) and 18 GHz, insertion offixed attenuators (of 3, 6 or 10 dB) on transmission side in the ODU.

-- for the 13 GHz 4QAM (3CC11737Axxx) and the 16QAM (3CC 11736Axxx), a software transmissionpower control of 20 dB in 1 dB step can be provided (as a software features key optionwith classic IDU,embedded within the Light IDU)

-- for the 15 GHz 4QAM (3CC12979Axxx), a software transmission power control of 30 dB in 1 dB stepcan be provided (as a software features key option with classic IDU, embedded within the Light IDU)

-- in the millimetric frequency bands (23 to 38 GHz), a software transmission power control of 30 dB in1 dB step for the 4QAM and of 20 dB in a 1 dB step for the 16 QAM, can be provided (as a softwarefeatures key option with classic IDU; embedded within the Light IDU).

-- for all new generationODU (ref. A9400UX flat ODU) frequency bands for the4 or 16QAM, the softwarepower transmission control of 30 dB in 1db step can be provided with the software features key.

software features key parameters:

Figure 3 - Software features key

The software features key, used with the classic IDU, provides flexibility for the configuration parameters of theequipment, as well as its options:

-- maximum configuration definition: 1+0 or 1+1,

-- maximum capacity definition: 2x2 Mbit/s up to 16x2 Mbit/s or 34 Mbits/s,

-- authorisation for 16QAM modulation,

-- set--upof transmission frequency range (7 to 40GHzby default but configurableupon customerspecificrequest),

-- authorization for Transmit Power Control option (all bands except 18 GHz),

-- authorization for Embedded Mediation option (master terminal or slave terminal),

The Light IDU features a fixed embedded configuration (no removable software features key):-- maximum configuration: 1+0,

-- capacity: 2x2 Mbit/s up to 4x2 Mbit/s,

-- Transmit Power Control option enabled (all bands except 18 GHz),

Link Identity Coding:

The amount of microwave links, especially in urban areas puts the problem of possible interference duringinstallation and turn--on phase.

The digital frame incorporates Link Identity coding capabilities to prevent the capture of an unwanted signal.

2.1.3.2 -- Ease of installation

The Alcatel 9400 UX systems have been designed to allow quick installation and turn--on.

Compact Outdoor Unit:

The Outdoor unit (ODU) is housed in a very compact and robust weatherproof (IP 55) container; it is deliveredwith a solar shield which provides protection to the outdoor electronics in hot and very sunny climatic zones.


The Outdoor Unit (1 or 2 depending on the configuration 1+0 or 1+1) can be rapidly installed on suitable poleswith their own fastening system.

The specific pole mounting is equippedwith an accurate alignment system -- presetting and fine “elevation” and“bearing” tuning -- to permit easy pointing with the integrated antenna. A very compact polemounting has beenoptimized for 1+0 configuration, it is common to 9400UX – from 13 to 38 GHz.

The 9400 UX outdoor unit can be used with an integrated antenna 300 or 600 mm diameter or separateantennas if a larger diameter is needed.

The ODU is fixed by means of quick latches. This system allows you to change the ODU without altering theantenna alignment.

Two ODU generations are available. The new generation ODU, A9400 UX flat ODU, is lighter than the previousrange from 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203*. It is 4 and 16QAM compatible and software configurable only.

* xx is for the band frequency of the Outdoor unit. For example, a unit referenced 9413UXR204 depends on the13GHz frequency band

Figure 4 - Installation of the ODU

ODU 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202or 94xxUXR203

ODU A9400 UX flat ODU

The alignment of the antenna can be easily performed with the use of a dedicated service kit. This kit , whenconnected to the ODU, is able to show the reception signal level and provide the connection to the other endof the link through a telephone service channel (when applicable).

Different IDU mechanical versions:

The small size of the 19” IDU (classic or light) -- 1U high for all capacities, depth 235mm – allows for easyinstallation in standard 19” racks and saves a lot of space where space is limited like in shelters or base stationsin cellular or LMDS networks.

The 19” IDU can also be installed as a desktop unit.

Figure 5 -Light 19” IDU

Single coaxial cable:

A single coaxial cable of up to 300 m connects the ODU and the IDU, so that a high flexibility is left for locatingthe radio and antenna.


Simple commissioning:

All the standard Site Acceptance Tests can be done with a single PC to commission the link, making extensiveuse of built--in supervision features:

-- continuous performance check and alarm status overview,

-- numerous baseband loopback facilities,

-- built--in PRBS generator and error counters.

The transmission side incorporates a built--in PRBS (Pseudo Random Bit Sequence) generator able to inserta standard test signal for the link Bit Error Rate measurements, in order to facilitate initial turn--on. The PRBScan be switched on remotely.

2.1.3.3 -- Equipment software features

The Alcatel 9400 UX terminal provides a F interface to a Craft Terminal (PC), which enables alarm monitoring,quality measurement, and configuration of the equipment.

The Alcatel 9400 UX Network Element (NE) supports a basic group of applications, listed hereafter, whichprovide simplified testing, operation and maintenance of the equipment:

-- Installation and Operation parameters:

S Configuration of: capacity, Link Identity Code, Tx & Rx frequencies, output power (if availablethrough software),

-- Alarm, Status and Control:

S Possibility to activate or inhibit alarm indications,

S Possibility to configure alarms with different severity levels,

S The software displays a synthesis of themonitored alarms (which are also available via dry loops).

S Possibility to set threshold values at which the alarms are triggered.

-- Performance Monitoring G784:

S Link quality monitoring : Background Block Errors, Errored Seconds, Severely Errored Seconds,Unavailable Seconds.

-- Remote inventory:

S The remote inventory is used to read the information allowing a complete identification of theselected Network Element (Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit): serial number, date of manufacture,reference and revision index of the hardware and software releases.

-- Maintenance Memory:

S The maintenance memory application allows the display of the last dated alarms stored in theequipment when the Craft Terminal is not connected.

-- Power measurements:

S This application is used to take measurements on various measurement points and displays themon the screen: min Rx power, current Rx power, etc..

2.1.3.4 -- Network Management

The network management solutions proposed are based on an advanced concept offering the followingadvantages :

Network Element Synthesis view:

The management system offers a Network Element Synthesis view, displaying in real time the synthesis of thealarms of each supervised network element. This feature allows very quick and efficient troubleshooting.

Network Element view:

Each superevised NE can be managed in a dedicated Network Element view allowing easy configuration andsupervision of the NE.


2.1.4 -- Capacity configurations

2.1.4.1 -- Classic IDU version

The capacity configurations depend:

-- on the type of line interface units (LAU and LIU) installed in the IDU(s),

-- the software features key used.

The table below summarizes the capabilities according to the bit rates supported by the IDU of the equipmentand the type of software features key used.

IDU TYPEBIT RATES SUPPORTED BY SOFTWARE FEATURES KEY

IDU TYPE2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2

4 x 2 2x2 Mbit/s 2x2 Mbit/s4x2 Mbit/s

2x2 Mbit/s4x2 Mbit/s

2x2 Mbit/s4x2 Mbit/s

8 x 22x2 Mbit/s 2x2 Mbit/s

4x2 Mbit/s2x2 Mbit/s4x2 Mbit/s8x2 Mbit/s

2x2 Mbit/s4x2 Mbit/s8x2 Mbit/s

16 x 2

2x2 Mbit/s 2x2 Mbit/s4x2 Mbit/s

2x2 Mbit/s4x2 Mbit/s8x2 Mbit/s

2x2 Mbit/s4x2 Mbit/s8x2 Mbit/s16x2 Mbit/s

34 -- -- -- 34 Mbit/s + 2Mbit/s auxiliary

2.1.4.2 -- Light IDU versions

The Light IDU versions cover the following bit rates (software configured):

-- 2x2 Mbit/s,

-- 4x2 Mbit/s.

2.1.5 -- Typical hardware configurations

1+0 configurationintegrated antenna

1+0 configuration with sepa-rate antenna

1+1 HSB or frequency diver-sity configuration with two an-tennas


1+1 HSB configurationusing an HSB coupler and in-tegrated antenna

1+1 HSB configurations withmultiplexer protection or

The block diagrams representing the main configurations appear in Figures 6 to 10 on the following pages.


2.2 -- Operation

2.2.1 -- 1+0 configuration

A block diagram of this configuration is given:

-- in figure 6 for the classic IDU version,

-- in figure 7 for the Light IDU versions.

Figure 6 - Block diagram of a 1+ 0 station (classic IDU version)

Power supply

Tributary ports(LAU)

Multiplexing and controlunit(MCU)

Tributary interface(LIU)

DC

Tributaries1 to 16

One 2 Mbit/s aux.bit stream

(only at 34 Mbit/s)

MAIN INDOOR UNIT

Modem

Cableinterface

Cable

IFblock

RFequip.

F Tel.

NMS(Supervision

bus)

Back toback

TS/TCalarms

Antenna

ESC3/4/5

EXT

Power supplyunit

OUTDOOR UNIT

Equipment not included inthe standard configuration

but sold as options

Servicekit

Local loop Attenuator

Featurekey

(SNMP)

Alcatel orCustomer

OS

Figure 7 - Block diagram of a 1+ 0 station (Light IDU versions)

Power supply

Tributary ports

Multiplexing and controlunit

(MCU Light)

Tributary interface

DC

Tributaries1 to 4

INDOOR UNIT

F NMS(Supervision

bus)

TS/TCalarms

ESC3

Modem &Monitoring

CableinterfaceCable

IFblock

RFequip.

Antenna

Power supplyunit

OUTDOOR UNIT

Equipment not included inthe standard configuration

but sold as options

LightService kit

Alcatel orCustomer

OS

Local loop Attenuator

(SNMP)

Functions set up in theMCU Light board


2.2.1.1 -- Operation of the main IDU (InDoor Unit) (classic IDU version)

The Line Access Units (LAU) offer all the passive functions required to provide transmission and receptionG.703 interfaces for the tributaries and 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream (when there is one). This mainly entailsimpedance matching. Two types of board can be used:

-- LAU 3CC06059Axxx: eight ports for 2 Mbit/s tributaries (two boards of this type are used for the16 x 2 Mbit/s configuration),

-- LAU 3CC06061Axxx: one port for 34 Mbit/s + one 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream port.

The LIU (Line Interface Unit) boards provide all the active functions required for transmission and receptionmode G.703 interfacing of tributaries and the 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream (mainly HDB3 HCMOS codeconversion). The LIU boards are daughter boards that plug into the MCU board. Three types of board can beused:

-- LIU 3CC05818Axxx: four ports for 2 Mbit/s tributaries,

-- LIU 3CC06026Axxx: eight ports for 2 Mbit/s tributaries,

-- LIU 3CC06119Axxx: eight port extension unit, used in conjunction with the eight port LIU board,3CC06026Axxx, for the 16 x 2 Mbit/s configuration,

-- LIU 3CC06118AAxx: one port for 34 Mbit/s + one 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream port.

The Multiplexing and Control Unit (MCU) handles:-- multiplexing/demultiplexing functions, to assemble the aggregate for transmission and restore the

tributaries from the received aggregate,

-- dropping/insertion of engineering service channels (up to 5) and the 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream (whenthere is one):

S ESC N_1: reserved for the supervision channel,

S ESC N_2: telephone channel with selective calling,

S ESC N_3: V.11 or V.28 64 kbit/s interface,

S ESC N_4 and N_5: V.11 64 kbit/s interfaces (not available for the 2 x 2 Mbit/s rate),

-- connection of local supervision system, for connecting a supervision PC.

-- processing of external commands: telesignalling and remote controls (TS/TC),

-- control of the outdoor unit,

-- interfacing with the outdoor unit, for:

S power feed to the ODU,

S transmitting and receiving the aggregate,

S transmitting and receiving ODU supervision function transmission and reception,

S telephone ESC transmission and reception between the IDU and the ODU,

-- storage of events in battery--assured maintenance memory.

ThePowerSupplyUnit (PSU) is available in two versions, 24 Vor 48VDC floating, for primary power supplies.It provides DC/DC conversion to generate the necessary voltages required to operate the indoor unit and theprimary power supply voltage of the outdoor unit.


2.2.1.2 -- Operation of the Light IDU versions

The Light MCU (Light Multiplexing and Control Unit) handles:-- all passive functions (mainly impedancematching) and active functions (mainly HDB3 CMOS code

conversion) needed for transmission and reception mode G.703 interfacing of the four tributaries,

-- multiplexing/demultiplexing functions, to create the aggregate to be transmitted and recreate thetributaries from the received aggregate,

-- engineering service channel drop and insert functions:

S ESC N_1: reserved for the supervision channel,

S ESC N_3: V.11 or V.28 64 kbit/s interface,

-- connection of local supervision system, for connecting a supervision PC. To operate the LUX50software, additional SIMM memory must be added (option sold by reference 9400UXB267).

-- processing of external controls: telesignalling and remote controls (TS/TC),

-- control of the Outdoor unit,

-- interfacing with the Outdoor unit for:

S transmission and reception of the aggregate,

S transmission and reception of ODU supervision channels,

S ODU power feed.

For the Light IDU, the types of power supply available are:S 19” Light IDU:¦ 24V DCor¦ 48V DC floating (This version is a low power consumption version,

allowing the operation of the Light IDU without fans).

2.2.1.3 -- IDU/ODU cable

A coaxial cable, only available in 50 ohm impedance version, with a maximum length of 300 meters (when ofstandard type), connects the IDU to the ODU. This carries:

-- the digital data streams between the IDU and the ODU, comprising:

S the aggregate obtained from tributary multiplexing,

S the ODU control signals,

S in the case of a classic IDU, the IDU/ODU telephone channel (connected to ESC N_2).

-- the ODU’s primary DC power supply voltage.


2.2.1.4 -- OutDoor Unit (ODU) operation

The reference of the outdoor unit depends on the frequency band.

The cable interface handles:-- reception and transmission of the data streams,

-- separation of the signals and the power supply voltage to feed the unit’s subsystems,

-- the interface for the aggregate for transmission or reception with the modem.

TheModem (modulator/demodulator) function receives the aggregate from the cable interface and processesthe baseband signal for microwave transmission by 4QAM or 16QAM modulation, as follows:

-- in transmission:

S digital filtering and error correction coding (FEC),

S digital/analogue conversion of bit streams I and Q from the encoding function;

-- in reception:

S a part of the automatic gain control (AGC) function,

S analogue/digital conversion of the I and Q bit streams from the demodulation function.

It interfaces with the IF unit for the transmission and reception of the I and Q bit streams.

The IF block handles modulation and demodulation of the aggregate, using the following functions:-- in transmission:

S analogue filtering of the I andQ bit streams (two filters that can be switched according to capacity),

S 4QAM or 16QAMmodulation of an IF carrier, according to the frequency plan adopted, generatedby a local internal oscillator,

S level amplification and tuning (AGC), based on measurement of the rms power output from theblock;

-- in reception:

S amplification, with AGC, of the received signal, transposed via the reception system according tothe frequency plan adopted,

S demodulation of the signal, so that the I and Q bit streams can be recovered,

S amplification and analogue filtering of the bit streams (two filters that can be switched accordingto capacity),

S amplification, with AGC, before transmission of the I and Q bit streams to the Modem board.

The transmission mixer transposes the intermediate frequency to a microwave frequency. Frequency agilityis obtained by a synthesized local oscillator (LO).

The transmission RF signal is then transmitted to the power amplifier, monitored by an output power slavingdevice and a circuit for cutting off carrier transmission if a fault is detected in the transmission circuits.


For the 13 GHz and the 23 to 38 GHz frequency bands, the transmitted power can be adjusted in 1 dB stepsby software configuration (software key option needed), within a range of:

-- --20 dB from nominal output power for 13 GHz (94xxUXR202 and 94xxUXR203),

-- --30 dB from nominal output power for 15, 23, 25, 38 GHz (4QAM RTPC),

-- --20 dB from nominal output power for 23, 25, 38 GHz (94xxUXR203 16QAM).

-- --30 dB from nominal output power for all frequency bands of the ODU 9400UX flat ODU.

For the 11, 13, 15 and 18 GHz frequency bands (without RTPC option), attenuators can be inserted on thetransmission output (optional).

The reception RF signal from the branching filter is applied to theRF reception circuit, comprising a cascadedRF low noise amplifier (except at 38 GHz), a mixer and an IF amplifier. The mixer, which receives the amplifiedRF frequency, transposes the RF signal to a reception IF signal using the same LO as the transmission mixer.

When amplified, the signal is sent to the IF block’s reception circuits for demodulation.

The branching filter comprises a duplexed filter for separating the transmission and reception RF signalspresent at the antenna port. It can accommodate the RF loopback (94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202 and94xxUXR203, and included intoA9400UX flat ODU), whichuses a conversion stage for converting transmissionand reception frequencies for test purposes.

The PSU receives the primary voltage from the IDU via the link cable and, from it, generates the voltagesrequired to operate the subsystems of the Outdoor unit.

2.2.1.5 -- ESC extension configuration

This extension, available only in the classic IDU version, can be used to customize ESC N_3 and N_4 and5 as detailed in § 2.3. It requires the presence of an extension IDUwith a dedicated SCU (Service Channel Unit)board.

2.2.2 -- Basic 1+1 configuration

This configuration is available only in the classic IDU version.

It comprises (Figure 8) a main IDU (identical to the one in the 1+0 configuration), an extension IDU and twoODUs.

The extension unit contains a Service Channel Unit (SCU) which handles the following functions:-- user interfaces for ESCs 3 to 5,

-- control of the second ODU,

-- interface with the second ODU’s link cable.

The MCU of the main unit sends the aggregate to be transmitted to the SCU and receives the receptionaggregate from it. The MCU is responsible, in reception, for switching between the normal and standbychannels.

There are three configurations:-- Hot Standby (HSB), one antenna port

-- Hot Standby, two antenna ports

-- Frequency diversity.


Figure 8 - Block diagram of 1+1 station

EXTENSION INDOOR UNIT

DC

Tributaries1 to 16

MAIN INDOOR UNIT Cable

NMS(Supervision

bus)

Backtoback

TS/TCalarms

Tocoupleror

Antenna

ESC3/4/5

OUTDOORUNIT

Cable

Tel.

Tocoupleror

Antenna

EXT

DCOUTDOORUNIT

Equipment not included in the standard configuration but sold as options

EOW3 EOW4 EOW5

Servicekit

Servicekit

F

Alcatel orCustomer

OS(SNMP)

Featurekey

One 2 Mbit/s aux. bitstream (only at 34

Mbit/s)

2.2.2.1 -- HSB configuration with one antenna port

The two ODUs are connected by anHSB couplerwhich provides a 10 dB attenuation on the standby channel.In addition, by design, the standby amplifier’s power is:

-- reduced by 15 dB for the ODU which does not permit an output power control,

-- cut off for the ODU which permits the output power control.

The HSB switching of a transmitter is based on detection of a fault which can originate from a failure:-- of the cable interface,

-- of the ODU power supply,

-- of the transmission IF synthesizer,

-- of the RF synthesizer,

-- of the amplifier.

The system switches back to the normal channel automatically as soon as it is disconnected and reconnectedagain without alarm (because of imbalance in the system), in transmission and in reception.

Switching can also be remotely controlled, by manually switching to the standby channel. The remote controlfor cutting off transmission power does not cause a switchover.

2.2.2.2 -- HSB configuration with two antenna ports

This configuration uses either a double polarization antenna or two antennas (in this case, it also adds spacediversity). One system sends (the standby transmitter is cut off). Operation is the same as in the previousconfiguration, apart from the switching, in which reversibility is not required because the link budgets areidentical for both channels.

2.2.2.3 -- Frequency diversity configuration

The two ODUs send the aggregate simultaneously at two different frequencies. The MCU chooses the best ofthe two signals on reception. This configuration also uses two antenna ports.


2.2.3 -- 1+1 configuration with multiplexer/demultiplexer protection

This configuration is available only in the classic IDU version.

It can be used (see Figure 10) to protect the link from failures of the MCU board in the main IDU. It comprises:-- a main IDU, as in the 1+0 configuration but whose tributaries are configured in high impedance.

-- an extension IDU.

-- an access IDU (delivered with all configurations).

-- two ODUs.

Featurekey

Figure 9 - Block diagram of a 1+1 station with multiplexer protection without access unit

Tributaries 1 to 16



DC


NMS(Supervision

bus)

Back toback

TS/TCalarms

Tocoupleror

Antenna

VDS3/4/5

OUTDOORUNIT

Cable

F Tel. EXT

OUTDOORUNIT

DC

Tributaries1 à 16

Tributaries1 to 16

Servicekit

Servicekit

EOW3 EOW4 EOW5

(SNMP)

Alcatel orCustomer

OS

Tocoupleror

Antenna

2 Mbit/s aux.(only at 34Mbit/s)

2 Mbit/s aux.(only at 34Mbit/s)


Tributaries1 to 16

Figure 10 - Block diagram of a 1+1 station with multiplexer protection

Tributaries1 to 16

ACCESSINDOORUNIT



DC


NMS(Supervision

bus)

Back toback

TS/TCalarms

Tocoupleror

Antenna

ESC3/4/5

OUTDOORUNIT

Cable

Tel.

Tocoupleror

Antenna

EXT

OUTDOORUNIT

DC

Tributaries1 to 16

Servicekit

Servicekit

EOW3 EOW4 EOW5

F

Alcatel orCustomer

OS(SNMP)

Featurekey

2 Mbit/sauxiliary (only at34 Mbit/s)

2 Mbit/sauxiliary bitstream

(only at 34Mbit/s)

2 Mbit/s auxiliary(only at 34 Mbit/s

The extension IDU contains the same LAU and LIU boards as the main IDU, configured in high impedance,plus an SCU board to handle the following functions:

-- hitless switching on reception,

-- user interfaces for ESCs 3 to 5,

-- customization of ESCs 3 and 4 by the addition of daughter boards (see § 2.3),

-- control of the second ODU,

-- interfacing for the second ODU’s link cable.

The MCU boards of the main IDU and the SCU board of the extension IDU exchange the aggregates sent andreceived.

The access IDU contains a dedicated LAU combination board which handles:-- in transmission, distribution of the tributary signals to the main and extension IDUs,

-- in reception, transmission of the tributary signals from the active IDU.

All the basic 1+1 configurations are also available in 1+1 configurations with multiplexer protection (refer to§ 2.2.2.1 to 2.2.2.3).


2.3 -- Engineering service channelsThe equipment comprises:

-- in the classic IDU configuration: five engineering service channels (ESC N_1 to ESC N_5), exceptin the 2 x 2 Mbit/s configuration (only three ESC).

-- in the Light IDU configuration: two engineering service channels (ESC N_1 and ESC N_3).

In the main classic IDU and in the Light IDU, the characteristics of these engineering service channels arepredefined.

The extension IDU (classic IDU version) can be used to customize ESCN_3, N_4 andN_5. This unit has aSCUboard installed with daughter boards to customize ESC N_3 and N_4.

The table below summarizes the ESC options available according to whether the configuration includes a mainIDU (classic, Light) or a classic main IDU with an extension IDU.

ESC 1+0 CONFIGURATIONWITH Light IDU

1+0 BASIC CONFIGU-RATION

WITH classic IDU

OTHER CLASSIC IDUCONFIGURATIONS

ESC N_1 Supervision Supervision Supervision (1)

ESC N_2 Telephone with selectivecalling Telephone with selective calling (1)

ESC N_3 V11 or V28 64 kbit/s V11 or V28 64 kbit/s (2)

Depending on daughter board used: (3)

S 64 kbit/s point-to-point, codirectional G.703interface, ref.: 3CC05710AAxx

S Four-wire analogue, 600 ohms,ref.: 3CC05711AAxx

S 64 kbit/s point-to-point, V11 or V28ref.: 3CC05712AAxx

S Digital asynchronous (1 x 9600 bit/s or2 x 4800 bit/s), V11 point-to-point or point-to-multipoint (three-way coupler),ref.: 3CC05713AAxx

S Digital asynchronous (1 x 9600 bit/s max.or 2 x 4800 bit/s max.), V28 point-to-pointor point-to-multipoint (three-way coupler),ref.: 3CC06482AAxx

ESC N_4(Bit rate

> 2x2 Mbit/s)64 kbit/s V11 (2) As ESC N_ 3 (3)

ESC N_5(Bit rate

> 2x2 Mbit/s)64 kbit/s V11 (2) 64 kbit/s V11 or V28 (3)

(1) Access on main IDU.

(2) Access on main IDU if there is no extension IDU.

(3) Access on extension IDU.


2.3.1 -- ESC number 1

ESCN_1supports thebus reserved for supervision. Thebus is implementedbetween the stationsby a radiolink (channel 1 and channel X in a 1+1 configuration) and is available in the stations, at connectors NMS1 andNMS2, for setting up point-to-multipoint links (Figure 11).

Figure 11 - Supervision links

TERMINAL A1 TERMINAL B1

NMS1 NMS2 NMS1 NMS2

TERMINAL B2 TERMINAL C1

NMS1 NMS2 NMS1 NMS2

TERMINAL B3 TERMINAL D1

NMS1 NMS2 NMS1 NMS2

cable3CC07711AAxx9400UXC332

STATION A STATION B STATION C

STATION D

cable

3CC07711AAxx

9400UXC332

With the 946LUX50 software, 254 up to 65534 addresses are available when the sub--network is chosen inclass B. Two terminals in the same network should not have the same IP address.

Since many configurations are possible, it is recommended that you contact Alcatel for the networkconfiguration.

Each port is enabled or disabled in the system software (“IP Configuration”(see § 4.8.2.3): MSU1 radioinputs/outputs, NMS1 and NMS2 cables.

Figure 12 - Supervision bus continuity

SupervisionRadio

MSU1

Routing

NMS1

NMS2

NMS1 NMS2

With946LUX50software


Engineering service channel N_2 is a telephone channel with selective calling available only in the classic

IDU version. The handset is connected to the connector on the main IDU. Each terminal isassigned a call number between 011 and 999 (not including X00) on installation. The number 00 is for generalcalling. Two terminals in the network should not have the same telephone number. ESC N_2 is available(Figure 13):

-- in digital form, at the “BACK TO BACK” connector of the main IDU, for digital transfers in stations withtwo terminals back-to-back.

-- in analogue form, at the “AUDIO 1” and “AUDIO 2” connectors of the main IDU, for setting up apoint-to-multipoint link,


Figure 13 - Telephone ESC

TERMINAL A1 TERMINAL A2

TERMINAL B3 TERMINAL C1

AUDIO 1

BACK TO BACK BACK TO BACK

Digital linkcable 3CC08729AAxx

9400UXC333

TERMINAL B1 TERMINAL B2

BACK TO BACK BACK TO BACK

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2

Analoguelink

cable3CC07711AAxx

9400UXC332

STATION A STATION B

STATION CDigital linkcable 3CC08729AAxx

9400UXC333

2.3.3 -- ESC numbers 3 and 4

2.3.3.1 -- Without extension IDU

If there is no extension IDU:-- ESC N_3 is a V11 or V28 point-to-point 64 kbit/s channel,

-- ESC N_4 is a V11 point-to-point 64 kbit/s channel (not applicable to the Light IDU versions).

The V11 or V28 equipment connects to the “ESC. EXT.” connector of the main IDU.

2.3.3.2 -- With extension IDU (not applicable to the Light IDU versions)

With an extension IDU, the ESCs can be digital (G.703 or V11/V28 64 kbit/s, V11 or V28 9.6 or 4.8 kbit/s) oranalogue (four-wire telephone channel + TTL interface of RON/TRON type), point-to-point orpoint-to-multipoint. The ESCs are customized by daughter boards described in § 7.9.

POINT-TO-POINT ESC

Connection for the ESC equipment:-- ESC N_3: to the “ESC 3-1” connector of the extension IDU.

-- ESC N_4: to the “ESC 4-1” connector of the extension IDU.

Connectionof two terminals back-to-back: each of the terminalsmust havean extension IDUwith an ESCboardof the same type. The link is set up by a cable linking ports “ESC 3-1” (ESC N_3) and “ESC4-1” (ESC N_4) onthe extension IDUs of the two terminals.


POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT ESC

This type of ESC can be used only for asynchronous digital links.

Connection for the ESC equipment:-- ESC N_3: to connectors “ESC 3-1” and “ESC3-2” of the extension IDU,

-- ESC N_4: to connectors “ESC 4-1” and “ESC4-2” of the extension IDU.

The connection of the terminals for ESCN_3 is illustrated in Figure 14. The connection principles are the samefor ESC N_4, replacing “ESC 3-1” with “ESC 4-1” and “ESC 3-2” with “ESC 4-2”.

Figure 14 - Point-to-multipoint engineering service channel ESC3

MAINIDU

ESC. EXT.

ESC EXT.

ESC. MAIN

ESC 3-1

ASYNC.V.28 EQUIP.

STATION ATERMINAL A1

MAINIDU

ESC. EXT.

ESC EXT.

ESC. MAIN

STATION B

ESC 3-1 ESC 3-2

MAINIDU

ESC. EXT.

ESC EXT.

ESC. MAIN

ESC 3-2ESC 3-1

MAINIDU

ESC. EXT.

ESC EXT.

ESC. MAIN

ESC 3-2ESC 3-1

MAINIDU

ESC. EXT.

ESC EXT.

ESC. MAIN

ASYNC.V.28 EQUIP.

STATION CTERMINAL C1

ESC 3-1

MAINIDU

ESC. EXT.

ESC EXT.

ESC. MAIN

ASYNC.V.28 EQUIP.

STATION DTERMINAL D1

ESC 3-1

3CC07157AAxx9400UCX130

Basebandlink

Cable3CC07711AAxx

9400UXC332






Baseband linkcable 3CC07711AAxx

9400UXC332

TERMINAL B1 TERMINAL B2

TERMINAL B3


Channel not available in the Light IDU versions.

2.3.4.1 -- Without extension IDU

As ESC N_4.

2.3.4.2 -- With extension IDU

ESC N_5 can only be a V11 or V28 point-to-point link.

Connection of the ESC equipment: to connector ESC 5 of the extension IDU.

Connection of two terminals back-to-back to form a repeater station: each of the terminals must have anextension IDU with an ESC board of the same type. The link is implemented by a cable connecting the “ESC 5”ports of the extension IDUs of the two terminals.


2.4 -- Alarms, telesignalling and remote controls (TS/TC)The equipment has:

-- Two loops preassigned for “Service affecting alarm” (SA), and “Non-service affecting alarm” (NSA)states. Each alarm generated by the equipment can be classified as Critical, Major, Minor, Warning,Indeterminate, or Cleared by the supervisory software.

-- A remote control loop, available to the user.The three contacts of this loop (common, N/C and N/O) are accessible:S on the “ALARM. I/O” connector of the main classic IDU,

S on the “ESC 3/ALARM I/O” connector of the Light IDU,

The loop formed by the common and normally closed contacts is normally closed (in theabsence of an alarm condition or remote control).

-- eight housekeeping alarms (remote indications via dry loops), available to the user. The remoteindication loops are configured as normally open and can be configured as normally closed, dependingon the setting of the swaps on the MCU board, as described in § 7.10.1. A name can be assigned toeach loop, in the software, on installation. These loops are available:

S on the “ALARM. I/O” connector of the main classic IDU,

S on the “ESC 3/ALARM I/O” connector of the Light IDU unit,

Figure 15 - Remote control, alarms and remote indications

EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT

Normally openCommonNormally closed

Housekeeping loop,normally open (in the

absence of an alarm condition)

REMOTE CONTROLAND ALARMS

REMOTE INDICATIONS

Housekeeping loopnormally closed (in theabsence of an alarm)

CHOICE

0.5 A / 100 Vdry loops

Relay position in theabsence of an alarmcondition or remote

control

2.5 -- Loopback optionsThe loopback options are provided on the active channel to facilitate commissioning and maintenanceoperations. Figure 16 shows the positioning of the loops according to the configuration.

Each local loop loops the aggregate:

-- at the output of the main IDU , and the extension IDU ,

-- at the input of the main ODU and the extension ODU , to check the cable link between the IDUand the ODU (this command cuts off output power),

-- at the output of the main ODU and the extension ODU if the RF loopback option has beenselected (the RF loop cuts transmission).

!CAUTION:S A local loop disconnects the link and isolates it from the network.S The RF loopback configuration requires the remote transmitter to be cut off.


Figure 16 - Locations of local loops

1

2 3

1+0 CONFIGURATION (classic IDU, Light IDU)

IDU PRINCIPALODU

1

2 3

IDU PRINCIPALODU 1

4 5

EXTENSION IDU

ODU X

1+1 HSB CONFIGURATION (classic IDU)

2 3

ODU 1

4 5

ODU X

6

BASIC HSB 1+1 CONFIGURATION WITH MULTIPLEXER PROTECTION (classic IDU) without access unit

MUXTributaries

Aggregate

MUXTributaries

Aggregate

Aggregate

MUX

Tributaries

Aggregate

Aggregate

To antenna

To antenna

To antenna

To antenna

To antennaActive MUX

Inactive MUX

1

MAIN IDU

MUX

EXTENSION IDU

2 3

ODU 1

4 5

ODU X

6

BASIC 1+1 HSB CONFIGURATION WITH MULTIPLEXER PROTECTION (classic IDU)

ACCESS IDU

MUX

Tributaries

Aggregate

Aggregate

To antenna

To antennaActive MUX

Inactive MUX

1

MAIN IDU

MUX

EXTENSION IDU


Figure 17 - Checking a hop using the remote loop option

Local station

MAIN IDUODU

Remoteloopback

MAIN IDUODU

BER analyzer

Remote station

! The remote loop remote control function must be executed on the remote station.

Remote loopback can be used in a station’s IDU to loop the receive output of a tributary to its transmit input.This way, you can use a BER analyzer connected to the local station to check out a hop (Figure 17).

! S Before setting up a loop, you must assign identical link identity codes for bothtransmit and receive directions to avoid generating an alarm condition.

2.6 -- Equipment managementAfter installing and commissioning theequipment, the configuration parameters (bit rate, frequency, power, etc.)are saved in the equipment.

The configuration is saved in two memories, one located in the IDU, the other in the ODU.

On power up, the microprocessor responsible for administering the equipment compares the content of the twomemories:

-- if the contents are identical, it loads their content into the various modules of the IDU and the ODU, andswitches the equipment to operational mode,

-- if the contents are different:

On the IDU, the three “URG”, “NURG” and “ATT” LEDs (see § 2.7) on the front panel of the mainIDU flash simultaneously. The equipment waits for the “IDU-ACO ODU” button on themain IDU tobe pressed to select a configuration to download.

Note : A configuration is valid if one of the two IDU or ODU leds is lighted.

The default configuration is obtained by attempting to load the configuration of equipment that is not included(for example, disconnect the ODU, power up the IDU and choose to download the ODU configuration when theLEDs are flashing at the same time). You must then reload the entire equipment configuration from the CT.

Note : When the IDU and ODU leds are off, then the equipment starts automatically in defaultconfiguration.


2.7 -- IDU controls, indications and connectors

The indoor units have a “Connector” panel and an “Operation” panel (Figure 18). The operation panel carriescontrols and indicators which duplicate those on the “Connector” side. The tables in the sections that followdescribe these components.

In some configurations, some of the items described below may be omitted.

2.7.1 -- Classic main IDU

Connector panel of the main IDU

Figure 18 - Controls, indicators and connectors on the main IDU

Ground terminal

Front panel of the main IDU

The connector panel of the main IDU is fitted with:

-- indicators showing the operational status of the equipment at a glance,

-- connectors.

The components are listed in the table below.

ITEM TYPE FUNCTION

Items shown on a shaded background appear on both panels.

Red LED URG: Service Affecting alarm present.

Red LED NURG: Non- service affecting alarm present.

Yellow LED ATT: Alarm attended, not used with LUX50.

Yellow LED BZ: Busy (telephone ESC busy).

Green LED IDU: No IDU alarm or IDU configuration is valid.

Green LED ODU: No ODU alarm or ODU configuration is valid.

ON/OFF Two-positionswitch

For powering the unit up/down.The green LED beneath this switch indicates when the unit is pow-ered up.

RST Pushbutton Resets the unit’s software.

IDU-ACO/ODUMomentary ac-tion two-position

switch

S On startup: selects the IDU or ODU configuration if theconfiguration data is lostS In operation: ACknOwledge (acknowledgement of an urgentalarm)/test the LEDs.


ITEM FUNCTIONTYPE

I/O (1/8)*I/O (9-16)*

Female37-pin sub-Dconnectors

2 Mbit/s port version:Tributaries 1 to 16.34 Mbit/s port version:34 Mbit/s ports on 1.6/5.6 coaxial sockets mounted on a plateinstalled in place of the top “I/O (9/16)” connector.

DC 24V-48V *Male

3-pin sub-Dconnector

Primary power supply input (24 V or 48 V DC).

RJ11connector

ESC telephone handset port.

AUDIO 1 *AUDIO 2 *

Female9-pin sub-Dconnector

Interface for ESC N°2 (4-wire telephone channel + E/M signalling).A buzzer alerts the operator if a call is received over the telephonechannel.

ESC. EXT. *Female


S Link with “ESC MAIN” connector on the extension IDU forcustomizing ESCs 3, 4 and 5.S Interface for ESCs 3, 4 and 5 if there is no extension unit.

ALARM. I/O *Female


Remote controls and telesignalling (TS/TC).

NMS 1 *NMS 2 *


Local supervision network interfaces.

F *Female


Supervisory PC interface for use with F interface adapter cable.

SKU/MTN Female9-pin sub-Dconnector

S Connector for the software feature key according to the configura-tion, enabling the equipment to operate (must be fitted).S Also used for maintenance (factory tests).

EXTFemale

68-pin mini-Dconnector

Link with the extension unit’s “MAIN” connector.

BACK TO BACKFemale


Link with the corresponding connector on the other direction’s mainIDU.

ODU Female Nconnector Link with the ODU. This connector includes a protective spark gap.

* Connectors with pin--out details in section 3 and in Appendix 6.


2.7.2 -- Light IDU

The Light IDU version has only a “Connector” panel (Figure 19) with:-- switches and a software reset button,

-- display components for ascertaining the operational state of the equipment at a glance,

-- connector ports.

It is equipped with the items listed in the table below.

Figure 19 - Controls, indicators and connectors on the Light IDU

ITEM TYPE FUNCTION

ODU Female Nconnector Link with the ODU. This connector includes a protective surge arrestor.

Red LED URG: Service Affecting alarm present

Red LED NURG: Non--Service Affecting alarm present

Yellow LED ATT: Alarm attended, not used with LUX50.

Yellow LED MAN: Remote control indicator

Green LED IDU: No IDU alarm or IDU configuration is valid

Green LED ODU: No ODU alarm or ODU configuration is valid

F * Female 9--pinSub--D connector Interface with supervisory PC for use with F interface adapter cable

NMS 1 *

NMS 2 *Female 9--pin

Sub--D connectors Supervision network bus interfaces.

I/O 1-4 * Female 37--pinSub--D connector Tributaries 1 to 4

ESC 3 /ALARM I/O *

Female 37--pinSub--D connector

S ESC Nº 3 interface

S Remote controls and telesignalling (TS/TC)

IDU-ACO/ODU Momentary actiontwo--position switch

S On startup: select the IDU or ODU configuration if the configuration islost

S In operation: ACknOwledge (Acknowledgement of urgent alarms/LEDtest).

RST Pushbutton Software reset.

DC 48V or 24V * Male 3--pin Sub--Dconnector Primary power supply input (24 V or 48 V DC).

ON/OFF Stable two--positionswitch

For powering the unit up/downThe green LED to the left of this switch indicates that the unit is powered up.

* Connectors with pin--out details in section 3 and in Appendix 6.


2.7.3 -- Extension IDU

Extension IDU operation panel

Figure 20 - Extension IDU controls, indicators and connectors

Extension IDU connector panel

The connector panel of the extension IDU is fitted with:-- indicators showing the operational status of the equipment at a glance,

-- connectors.

In the first three columns of the table below, a cross indicates the presence of the components according to thetype of extension unit:

-- Type A : ESC extension unit.

-- Type B : 1+1 extension unit with no multiplexer protection.

-- Type C : 1+1 extension unit with multiplexer protection.

A B C ITEM TYPE FUNCTION

Items shown on a shaded background appear on both panels.

Yellow LEDMAN: Indicates that a remote control has been sent to theequipment from a supervisory PC. The LED remains onuntil the remote control disappears.

Green LED TX-ODU: transmission traffic on standby ODU.

X X Green LED IDU: No alarms on extension IDU.

Green LED T-IDU: Traffic on extension multiplexer/demultiplexer.

Green LED RX-ODU: reception traffic on standby ODU.

Green LED ODU: No alarms on standby ODU.

X X X ON/OFF Two-positionswitch

For powering the unit up/down.The green LED beneath this switch indicates when theunit is powered up.

X X RST Pushbutton Resets the unit’s software.

XACCESS (1-8)ACCESS (9-16)


Link with access unit’s “EXT. (1/8)” and “EXT. (9/16)” con-nectors.

X X X DC 24V-48V *Male


Primary power supply input (24 V or 48 V).

X X X ESC. MAINFemale


Link with the main IDU’s “ESC EXT” connector for ESCextension.


A FUNCTIONTYPEITEMCB

X X X MAINFemale


Link with the main IDU’s “EXT” connector.

X X X ESC. 5Female


Port for ESC N°5.

X X X BACK TO BACKFemale


Not used.

X X XESC. 4-1 *ESC. 4-2 *


Ports 1 and 2, ESC N°4.

X X XESC. 3-1 *ESC. 3-2 *


Ports 1 and 2, ESC N°3.

X X ODU FemaleN connector

Link with the ODU.This connector includes a protective spark-gap.

OptionsC-NMS1C-NMS2

Female9-pin and 15-pinsub-D connec-

tors

Not used.

* Connectors with pin--out details in Appendix 6.

2.7.4 -- Access IDU

Figure 21 - Access IDU connectors

Access IDU connector panel

Access IDU front panel


The connector panel of the access indoor unit is fitted with the components described in the table below:

ITEM TYPE FUNCTION

I/O (1/8)*I/O (9/16)*


2 Mbit/s access version (use of IDU type 1, see § 7.2.2.2):Tributaries 1 to 16.34 Mbit/s access version:2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream port.34 Mbit/s ports on 1.6/5.6 coaxial sockets on a panel mounted inplace of the top “I/O (9/16)” connector.

MAIN (1/8)MAIN (9/16)


2 Mbit/s access version (use of IDU type 1, see § 7.2.2.2):Tributary links 1 to 16 to “I/O (1/8)” and “I/O (9/16)” connectors onthe main IDU.34 Mbit/s access version:Tributary 34 Mbit/s and 2 Mbit/s to “I/O (1/8)” connector on themain IDU.

EXT. (1/8)EXT. (9/16)


2 Mbit/s access version (use of IDU type 1, see § 7.2.2.2):Tributary links 1 to 16 to “I/O (1/8)” and “I/O (9/16)” connectors onthe main IDU.34 Mbit/s access version:Tributary link 34 Mbit/s and 2 Mbit/s to “ACCESS (1/8)” connector.

* “Customer” connectors, with pinout detailed in section 3.


2.8 -- Technical characteristicsThe values indicated hereafter are typical values.

REFERENCE STANDARDS AND FREQUENCY PLANS

Equipment ReferenceStandard

Band(GHz)

Frequency(GHz) Channeling

Standard *Tx/Rx

separation (MHz)

9413 UX

4QAM

EN 301 128 13 GHz 12.75--13.25 ERC 12--02ITU--R Rec F497--6

266

9413 UX16QAM


266

9415 UX

4QAM/16QAM


728,315, 420, 490

9418 UX

4QAM/16QAM


1008, 1010,340, 1560, 1092.5

9423 UX

4QAM

EN 300 198 23 GHz 21.2--23.6 ERC 13--02 annex AITU--R Rec F637--3

1008, 1197,1200, 1232

9423 UX

16QAM

EN 300 198 23 GHz 21.2--23.6 ERC 13--02 annex AITU--R Rec F637--3

1008, 1197,1200, 1232

9425 UX

4QAM

EN 300 431 25 GHz 24.5--26.5 ERC 13--02 annex BITU--R Rec F748--3

1008

9425 UX16QAM

EN 300 431 25 GHz 24.5--26.5 ERC 13--02 annex BITU--R Rec F748--3

1008

9438 UX

4QAM

EN 300 197 38 GHz 37--39.5 ERC 12--01ITU--R Rec F749--1

1260

9438 UX

16QAM

EN 300 197 38 GHz 37--39.5 ERC 12--01ITU--R Rec F749--1

1260

(*) Consult Alcatel if non--standard Tx/Rx separations are requested.

(*) Consult Alcatel for availability of these options.

RF CHANNELING

Capacity (Mbit/s) 2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2 / 34 + 2

RF Channeling (MHz)

(4QAM modulation)

3.5 7 14 28

RF Channeling (MHz)

(16QAM modulation)

-- -- 7 14


IN--FIELD TUNABILITY RANGE FOR 94XXUXR201, 94XXUXR202 OR 94XXUXR203

Equipment

Max frequencyagility banddepending on

duplexdifference(MHz)

Output Power(dBm)

Output Power Settingoption (dB)

9413 UX

4QAM

116 25 Fixed attenuator: 3, 6, or10 dB for 3CC08879AAxx

9413 UX

4QAM RTPC

116 25 +25 dBm to 5 dBm with 1 dBstep for 3CC12690AAxx

9413 UX

16QAM

116 21 +21 dBm to 1 dBm with1 dBstep for 3CC12683AAxx

9415 UX

4QAM

220 21 Fixed attenuator: 3, 6, or10 dB for 3CC08880AAxx

9415 UX

4QAM RTPC

220 24 +24 dBm to --6 dBm with 1 dBstep for 3CC12979AAxx

9418 UX

4QAM

480 16

24*

Fixed attenuator: 3, 6, or10 dB

9423 UX

4QAM RTPC

500 19 +19 to –11 dBm with 1 dBstep

9423 UX16QAM

500 17 +17 to –3 dBm with 1 dB step

9425 UX

4QAM RTPC


9425 UX16QAM


9438 UX

4QAM RTPC


9438 UX16QAM

560 14 +14 to –6 dBm with 1 dB step

(*) Consult Alcatel for availability of this option.


TUNABILITY RANGE FOR NEW GENERATION A9400UX flat ODU

EquipmentDuplexspacing(MHZ)

Frequencyagility band

(MHz)

Output powersetting (dB)(RTPC)

ATPC range

9413 UX

4 QAM

266 116

+24 to –6 dBm with1 dB step

24 to 4 dBm

9413 UX16 QAM

266 116+20 to –10 dBmwith 1 dB step

20 to 0 dBm

9415 UX

4 QAM315, 420, 490, 220


24 to 4 dBm

9415 UX16 QAM

315, 420, 490,728 220

+20 to –10 dBmwith 1 dB step

20 to 0 dBm

9418 UX

4 QAM340,

1008 1010 480


22 to 2 dBm

9418 UX16 QAM

1008,1010,1560, 1092.5

480+19 to –11 dBm with

1 dB step19 to --1 dBm

9423 UX

4 QAM1008, 1200,

500


19 to --1 dBm

9423 UX16 QAM

1008, 1200,

1232500


16 to --4 dBm

9425 UX

4 QAM

1008 450


17 to --3 dBm

9425 UX16 QAM


14 to --6 dBm

9438 UX

4 QAM

1260 560


16 to --4 dBm

9438 UX16 QAM


13 to --7 dBm

TYPICAL BER THRESHOLDS AT ANTENNA PORT FOR 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202 OR94xxUXR203 in dBm

Equipment 2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2 / 34 + 2

10--3 10--6 10--3 10--6 10--3 10--6 10--3 10--6

9413 UX 4QAM --95 --92 --92 --89 --89 --86 --86 --83

9413 UX 16QAM -- -- -- -- --83 --80 --80 --77

9415 UX 4QAM --94 --91 --91 --88 --88 --85 --85 --82

9418 UX 4QAM --94 --91 --91 --88 --88 --85 --85 --82

9423 UX 4QAM --92 --89 --89 --86 --86 --83 --83 --80

9423 UX 16QAM -- -- -- -- --82 --79 --79 --76

9425 UX 4QAM --91 --88 --88 --85 --85 --82 --82 --79

9425 UX 16QAM -- -- -- -- --81 --78 --78 --75


16x2 / 34 + 28x24x22x2Equipment

9438 UX 4QAM --87 --84 --84 --81 --81 --78 --78 --75

9438 UX 16QAM -- -- -- -- --77 --74 --74 --71

BER THRESHOLDS AT ANTENNA PORT FOR NEW GENERATION A9400UX flat ODU

Equipment 2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2 / 34 + 2

10--3 10--6 10--3 10--6 10--3 10--6 10--3 10--6

9413 UX4 QAM --95 --92 --92 --89 --89 --86 --86 --83

9413 UX16 QAM -- -- -- -- --84 --81 --81 --78

9415 UX4 QAM --95 --92 --92 --89 --89 --86 --86 --83

9415 UX16 QAM -- -- -- -- --84 --81 --81 --78

9418 UX4 QAM --93 --90 --90 --87 --87 --84 --84 --81

9418 UX16 QAM -- -- -- -- --82 --79 --79 --76

9423 UX4 QAM --93 --90 --90 --87 --87 --84 --84 --81

9423 UX16 QAM -- -- -- -- --82 --79 --79 --76

9425 UX4 QAM --92 --89 --89 --86 --86 --83 --83 --80

9425 UX16 QAM -- -- -- -- --81 --78 --78 --75

9438 UX4 QAM --91 --88 --88 --85 --85 --82 --82 --79

9438 UX16 QAM -- -- -- -- --79 --76 --77 --74

CONFIGURATION

Additional branching losses per terminal * Tx Rx

1+0 or1+1 FD

(Main & Stand--By channels)

0 0

1+1 HSB 1 antenna

S Main ChannelS Stand--By channel

1

11

1

11

* Typical values ODU unit inputs, antenna access

1+0/1+1 FD SYSTEM GAIN – AT ANTENNA PORT (INCLUDING DUPLEXER LOSS) FOR ODU94XXUXR201, 94XXUXR202 OR 94XXUXR203

Equipment 2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2 / 34 + 2

10--3 10--6 10--3 10--6 10--3 10--6 10--3 10--6

9413 UX 4QAM 120 117 117 114 114 111 111 108

9413 UX 16QAM -- -- -- -- 104 101 101 98

9415 UX 4QAM 115 112 112 109 109 106 106 103


16x2 / 34 + 28x24x22x2Equipment

9415 UX 4 QAMRTPC

118 115 115 112 112 109 109 106

9418 UX 4QAM 111 108 108 105 105 102 102 99

9423 UX 4QAM 111 108 108 105 105 102 102 99

1+0/1+1 FD SYSTEM GAIN – AT ANTENNA PORT (INCLUDING DUPLEXER LOSS) FOR ODU94XXUXR201, 94XXUXR202 OR 94XXUXR203

Equipment 2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2 / 34 + 2

9423 UX 16QAM -- -- -- -- 99 96 96 93

9425 UX 4QAM 109 106 106 103 103 100 100 97

9425 UX 16QAM -- -- -- -- 97 94 94 91

9438 UX 4QAM 103 100 100 97 97 94 94 91

9438 UX 16QAM -- -- -- -- 91 88 88 85

1+0/1+1 System gain – At antenna port (including duplexer loss) for A9400UX flat ODU

Equipment 2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2 / 34 +2

10--3 10--6 10--3 10--6 10--3 10--6 10--3 10--6

9413 UX4 QAM 119 116 116 113 113 110 110 107

9413 UX16 QAM 104 101 101 98

9415 UX4 QAM 119 116 116 113 113 110 110 107

9415 UX16 QAM 104 101 101 98

9418 UX4 QAM 115 112 112 109 109 106 106 103

9418 UX16 QAM 101 98 98 95

9423 UX4 QAM 112 109 109 106 106 103 103 100

9423 UX16 QAM 98 95 95 92

9425 UX4 QAM 109 106 106 103 103 100 100 97

9425 UX16 QAM 95 92 92 89

9438 UX4 QAM 107 104 104 101 101 98 98 95

9438 UX16 QAM 92 89 90 87

ANTENNA GAIN ( IN dB , typ GAIN )

Integrated Non--integrated

30 cm 60 cm Flextwist loss*

60 cm 90 cm 120 cm 180 cm

13 GHz >35 0.35 >38.3 >41 >44.6

15 GHz >30.5 >36 0.5 >39.5 >42 >45.5

18 GHz >32.7 >38 0.7 >41.6 >44 >47.3


Non--integratedIntegrated

23 GHz >34.4 >39.6 0.7 >43.1 >45.6 >48.9

25 GHz >35.6 >40.7 0.7 >44.2 >46.8

38 GHz >39.3 >44.2

* For those referenced in Appendix 9 Commercial items

ALCATEL 9400 UX – ALL FREQUENCY BANDS

Synthesizer step 250 kHz

RF stability +/-- 10 ppm

Spectrum masks Compliant with the relevant ETSI standard

Spuriousemissions

Compliant with the ETSI standard

Compliant with ERC Rec 74--01

Equalizer Type 7 coefficients (and 19 coefficients for ODU flat)

Link IdentityCode

32 codes

TRIBUTARY INTERFACES*

Type 2 Mbit/s ITU--T G.703 120 ohms or 75 Ohms

34 Mbit/s ITU--T G.703 75 Ohms

Jitter ITU--T G. 823/ G. 921

Man--Machine Interface

Visual 7 LEDs

other F interface and adapter cable for Personal Computer (WindowsTM)

Interface for Telephone Service Channel (ESC n°2 on classic IDU only)

Alarms

Equipment alarms 2 outputs

Environmentalevents

8 inputs / 1output

* In the case of a 75 Ohms connection, the respect of the G703 norms and EMC norms is only guaranteed byALCATEL if “spider” adaptersmade for this purpose are used (3CC07885Axxx or 3CC07759Axxx) with the IDUconfiguration.

POWER SUPPLY

DCnominal

24 VDC +/-- 20 to +/-- 40 VDCnominal

(primary) 48 VDC +/-- 39 to +/-- 60 VDC

Polarity + or – or floating (isolated ground)


POWER SUPPLY

Max Power

consumption forODU 94XXUXR201,94XXUXR202 OR94XXUXR203

1+0 : 63W with classic IDU

1+0 : 50 W with Light IDU

1+1 : 120W

Max Power

consumption forA9400UX flat ODU

1 + 0 : 60 W

1 + 1 : 112 W

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY / SAFETY

EMC EN 301 489 1 & 4 (version 1.2.1)

Safety EN 60 950

Power supply EN 300 132

Lightning protection Symmetric protection implemented in ODU & IDU

+/-- 1kV on cable ground according to IEC 61000--4--5 with 2 wave types: 1.2/50μs and 10/700 μs

IDU--ODU CABLE

Type 1AC001100022

Fire resistance IEC 332--1

Max length 300 m

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Storage EN 300 019 class 1.3

Transport EN 300 019 class 2.3

IDU EN 300 019 class 3.2

Temperature range : --10 to +55°C

Operation ODU EN 300 019 class 4.1,Protection factor IP 55 (IEC529 standard)

Temperature range : --33 to +55°C


MECHANICAL

Classic Main IDU,Extension IDU, Access IDU

44x450x235 mm / 3 kg (19” / 1U)

Light IDU 44x450x235 mm / 3 kg (19” / 1U)

ODU

94XXUXR201

13 to 18GHz

250x250x250 mm / 10kg

94XXUXR20194XXUXR20294XXUXR203

23 to 38GHz

220x220x250 mm / 8 kg

ODU

A9400UX flat

13 to 38GHz

235x235x72 mm / 4 kg

For the typical installation dimensions, see Chapter 3


2.9 -- Frequency agility bands

Equipment Duplex spacing Tx Band (MHz)(MHz) F min F max

9413 UX 266 1 12751.75 12864.25

2 12861.75 12978.25

1P 13017.75 13130.25

2P 13127.75 13244.25

9415 UX 315 1 14635.75 14765.25

2 14761.75 14898.25

1P 14950.75 15080.25

2P 15076.75 15213.25

420 1 14502.75 14723.50

2 14719.75 14940.25

1P 14922.75 15143.25

2P 15139.75 15360.25

490 1 14404.75 14632.25

2 14628.75 14856.25

1P 14894.75 15122.25

2P 15118.75 15346.25

644 1 14500 14700

1P 15144 15344

728 1 14502.75 14618.25

1P 15230.75 15346.25



9418 UX 340 1 18581.75 18698.25

2 18701.75 18818.25

1P 18921.75 19038.25

2P 19041.75 19158.25

1560 1 17701.75 18138.25

1P 19261.75 19698.25

1010 1 17701.75 18199.25

2 18180.75 18688.25

1P 18711.75 19210.25

2P 19190.75 19698.25

1008 1 17703.75 18199.25

2 18182.75 18678.25

1P 18711.75 19207.25

2P 19190.75 19686.25

1092.5 1 17702 18090

2 18205 18597.5

1P 18794.5 19182.5

2P 19297.5 19690



9423 UX 1008(9423UX R201

1 22001.75 22490.25(9423UX R201,9423UX R202) 2 22101.75 22590.259423UX R202)

1P 23009.75 23498.25

2P 23109.75 23598.25

1008(9400UX flat

1 22001.75 22302,00(9400UX flat

ODU) 2 22300.00 22600.00ODU)1P 23008.00 23310,00

2P 23308.00 23598.25

1232 1 21201.75 21786.25

2 21781.75 22366.25

1P 22433.75 23018.25

2P 23013.75 23598.25

1200 1 21201.75 21818.25

2 21781.75 22398.25

1P 22401.75 23018.25

2P 22981.75 23598.25

9425 UX 1008 1 24549.75 24996.25

2 24997.75 25444.25

1P 25557.75 26004.25

2P 26005.75 26452.25

9438 UX 1260 1 37059.75 37616.25

2 37619.75 38176.25

1P 38319.75 38876.25

2P 38879.75 39436.25


3 -- Installation

3.1 -- DeliveryWhen you receive the equipment in its packaging:

-- Check the condition of the packaging.

-- If damaged, make your reservations known to the carrier as quickly as possible.

3.1.1 -- Checking the configuration

The configuration is normally supplied in:-- Two packages containing the IDUs and ODUs according to the configuration, with connector manual

and test results book,

-- one or more packages containing the antennas, HSB coupler and installation accessories, servicetelephone, cables, etc.

3.1.1.1 -- Content of the ODU/IDU boxes

Light IDUCONFIG.

Nr. ofboxes CONTENT

1+0 1 or 2 1 Light IDU (19” ) + 1 ODU + 1 connector kit + documentation

Classic IDUCONFIG.

Nr. ofboxes CONTENT

1+0 1 or 2 1 main IDU + 1 ODU + 1 software feature key + 1 connector kit + documentation+ eventually 1 extension IDU.

1+1 1 or 21 main IDU + 1 ODU + 1 software feature key + 1 connector kit + documentation.

1+1 1 or 21 extension IDU + 1 ODU + 1 connector kit.

1+1 withMUX 1 or 2

1 main IDU and if necessary 1 access IDU + 1 ODU + 1 software feature key + 1connector kit + documentation.MUX

protection1 or 2

1 extension IDU + 1 ODU + 1 connector kit.

3.1.1.2 -- Unpacking

-- Unpack the equipment according to the instructions on the packaging.

-- Take an inventory and identity any missing items. If the delivery does not match the delivery advicenote, notify ALCATEL within 48 hours of receipt of the equipment.

-- Leave the equipment readily accessible during the work.

IMPORTANT NOTE: NEVER REMOVE THE ROUND YELLOW PADS USED TO SEALTHE OUTDOOR SYSTEM.

3.1.1.3 -- Storage

If installation is to be deferred, the type of packaging will define the equipment storage conditions:-- cardboard boxes should be warehoused indoors, in a dry, well aired room.

-- wooden or plywood boxes may be stored outdoors, provided that they are protected from rain and thesun’s rays.


3.2 -- Labels on the equipmentThe labels below are also affixed to the boxes to indicate their contents.

TYPICAL LABEL ON THE LIGHT IDU

* IDU model/revision index of equipmentsee list in Appendix 9* Serial number

Commercial code: see list in

Power supply voltagevalue

2 Mbit/s tributary portimpedance

Maximum IDU capacity

Memory extension

4x2 Mbit/s

75 ohms or 120 ohms

YES (required for LUX50)

Address of unit forsupervision bus

Not completed in the factory.

Service channel 3 interfacetype

20 to 40 V=39 to 60 V =

Cable interface type DIG: Digital version

* bar coded and in plain language

V.11 or V.28

Integrated mediation function Slave

Management interface type V.11 or V.28

Transmitted power control YES

Remote craft terminal YES

UX basic software

Light UX software

9400UXN001

9400UXN002

Edition date DD / MM / YYYY

Floating power supply YES

Appendix 9

or NO

The configuration depends on the factory delivery.

TYPICAL LABEL ON THE CLASSIC MAIN IDU

* IDU model/revision index of equipment

* Serial number

Commercial code

Power supplyvoltage value


Maximum IDU capacity(according to equipment )

Memory extension

4x2 Mbit/s ; 8x2 Mbit/s16x2 Mbit/s ; 34+2 Mbit/s75, 120 ohms, high impedance

2 Mbit/s aux bitstreamport impedance

IDU address forsupervision bus

not entered in the factory

Audio service channelphone number

not entered in the factory.

Service channel 3port type

V.11or

V.28

(Meaningless if an extensionIDU for dedicated SCs is

used)

20 to 40 V =39 to 60 V =

if any,

Cable interfacetype

ANA : Analog versionDIG : Digital version

* bar coded or in plain language

75 ohms or 120 ohmsor high impedance

(mux protection) or automatic

”1” or ”2”(”2” required for LUX50)

: see list in Appendix 9

: see list in Appendix 9


TYPICAL LABEL ON THE EXTENSION IDU

Power supplyvoltage value


Maximum IDUcapacity (according to

equipment)

4x2 Mbit/s ; 8x2 Mbit/s16x2 Mbit/s ; 34+2 Mbit/s

Service channel 3 porttype + corresponding

commercial code

V.11V.28

SC4 port type +corresponding

commercial code

SC5 board type

64 kbit/s G.703 codirectional64 kbit/s V.11 or V.28

300-3400 Hz 4 wire

9600 / 2 X 4800 bauds, V.11

9600 / 2 X 4800 bauds, V.28

Options as for SC3

* IDU model/revision index of equipment* Serial number

Commercial code

Cable interfacetype

ANA : Analog versionDIG : Digital version


20 to 40 V =39 to 60 V =

* Reserved for Alcatel

75, 120 ohms, high impedance(mux protection) or automatic

TYPICAL LABEL ON THE ACCESS IDU

* IDU model

* Serial number

Commercial code

Tributary port impedance

Tributary type

75 ohms120 ohms

2 Mbit/s auxiliary streamport impedance


4x2 Mbit/s ; 8x2 Mbit/s16x2 Mbit/s ; 34+2 Mbit/s

* Reserved for Alcatel

75 ohms or 120 ohmsor not applicable (if not

provided )


TYPICAL LABEL ON THE ODU 94XXUXR201 94XXUXR202 94XXUXR203


Commercial code

* ODU model/revision index

* Serial number

*Industrial code / revision index

Min and maxi operating frequencies for transmission

Duplex difference

RF local loopback YES+ commerc. code; NO

Std = Standard

Edition date

Transmit power for 15 and 18 GHz High= High power

Canal

Power supply voltage value

TYPICAL LABEL ON THE ODU A9400UX FLAT ODU

* Serial number

Min and max operation frequencies for transmissionDuplex differenceEdition date

P/N


Power supply voltage value

Commercial code

*Industrial code / revision index

ODU Software (when learning factory)Initial software SW/ICS

TYPICAL LABEL ON THE HSB (HOT STANDBY) COUPLER

* Unit mode

* Serial number

Commercial code

Operating frequencyband


10dB

Coupling value 10 dB

13; 15; 18; 23; 25;38 GHz


TYPICAL SOFTWARE LABEL KEY ON THE BOX

Integrated mediation function:+ commercial code

* Model of key /Revision index

* Serial number of key

Commercial code

TPC: only for 13, 23 to38 GHz bands

Transmit frequencyrange

RCT (remote craft terminal)

1+0 max. or1+1 max

Max bit rate + commercialcode of each software

module


Master or Slave

Y (yes) + commercialcode or N (no)

Max. configuration

2 x2 ; 4 x2 ; 8 x2 ;16 x 2 ; 34 Mbit/s

Y (yes) + commercialcode or N (no)

U

U

ALCATEL 9400 UX

7 40 GHz

TYPICAL SOFTWARE KEY LABELS

Typical label affixed to the software key

Configuration :1 + 0 MAXor 1 + 1 MAX

Maximum bit rate (Mbit/s) :2 x 24 x 28 x 216 x 2 *

Option not available

TX : Transmit frequency range enabled

7125.00 -- 8500.00

(*) also for 34 + 2 Mbit/s

Not meaningful Not meaningful

NN

Item label(on other side)

3CC07619AAAA 01C98085113 (05)


3.2.1 -- Typical installation dimensions (1+0 configuration with integrated 1 ft)

3.2.1.1 -- ODU 94xxUXR201 A 94xxUXR203

Pole mounting 1+1

38

38

38

13

Pole mounting 1+0

545

244

469

365


3.2.1.2 -- ODU A9400 UX flat ODU

Pole mounting 1+1

174

556

160

522

625

Pole mounting 1+0

365545

318

244

389


3.3 -- Installing the equipmentIt is assumed that the installer has already installed the other peripheral equipment (cable trays, multiplexes,etc).

3.3.1 -- Information required for installation

Appendix 2 contains a sheet for you to complete to collate all the general information needed for the installationprocedure.

3.3.2 -- Precautions concerning electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and safety

1) Installation is designed to meet all new requirements concerning electromagnetic compatibility and safety.

2) The EMCperformance of the equipment depends largely on installation practices (cable installation, earthingconnections, etc) which should be based on best trade practices.

3.3.3 -- Tools required

The list of the tools required to install the microwave links of the 9400 UX family is given below (applies to allfrequency bands).

Tool Usage examples

2.5 mm Allen key (for M3 screw) x For adjusting the polarization of the antenna and the HSB coupler

3 mm Allen key (for M4 screw) x For adjusting the polarization of the antenna and the HSB coupler

5 mm Allen key (for M6 screw) x For mounting the antenna, the hot standby coupler

6 mm Allen key (for M8 screw) x For pointing the antenna

8 mm Allen key (for M10 screw) x For adjusting the polarization of the HSB coupler

“Pipe” wrench and 13 mm flatwrench

For mounting the pole mounting for a separate antenna

16/17 mm box wrench and flatwrench

x For fixing the pole mounting and fine tuning the antenna and vari-ous fastenings

16/17 mm torque wrench For fixing the pole mounting and various fastening with the correcttorque

5 mm flat wrench For dismantling/reassembling the cover on classic main, extensionand access IDUs

8 mm flat torque wrench, Radiall,code: R282320

For fitting integrated attenuators in the ODU

20 mm flat torque wrench x For fitting the “N” coaxial plugs

3.5 x 100 mm screwdriver(for slotted head screws)

x Indoor installations: connectors, software key, handles, or forchanging the polarization of the antenna and for “non integrated”assembly

10 x 100 mm screwdriver(for slotted head screws)

For mounting the “pole mounting” in the case of a separateantenna.

Manually or with a screwdriver(for slotted head screws)

For mounting the solar shield of ODU A9400 flat ODU

The above tools marked with an “x” are included in a “station toolkit”, ref: 9400UXT103.Depending on installation, additional equipment may be useful:

-- “Mars Actel” OSA3Compax insertion and extraction tool, for wiring compax terminal blocks (mars actelIDC) COMPAX; and Sub-D plug crimping tool, ref: 608868-1 (AMP).

Of course, normal installer’s tools are essential: drill, drill bits, soldering iron, cable tie pliers, terminal pliers, etc.


A set of consumables, ref: 9400UXT002 for “one link” is available as an option.For commissioning, an optional “service kit” (commercial code 9400UXT102) can be used: this can be used tomeasure the AGC voltage (relative to the received field) using a DC voltmeter, and includes aheadset/microphone assembly for connecting to the telephone service channel*.* It is also possible to order just the “service kit” cable, under reference 9400UXT112.A compass and a pair of binoculars (not supplied) are useful for roughly pointing the antenna.

3.3.4 -- Torques for the screws and connectors

The table below shows the maximum tightening torques requested.

Screw caliber Maximum tightening torques

Ncm

Screw M3 61

Screw M4 150

Screw M6 490

Screw M8 1190

Screw M10 2380

Connector N (nut fastened onto the cable) 200

3.4 -- Installing 19” IDUsIDUs can be installed:

-- front connector (Light IDU has only one connector panel),

-- with the operation panel to the front.

They can be installed:-- on a desktop or on a wall mounting,

-- in a laborack or 9U subrack.

Caution: when severalIDUs are used, they mustbe stacked in the ordershown opposite

Main IDU

Extension IDU

Main IDU

Access IDU

Extension IDU

Before installation, check the labels for IDU configuration information (bit rates and port impedances), type ofremote indication loops, EOW configuration.

CAUTION: do not place anything on the indoor units


3.4.1 -- Installation on feet or on a wall mounting

For desktop installation, fit each unit with its four feet (kit ref: 9400UXI303), the feet clip onto the bottom ofthe unit.

To install units on a wall mounting, use kit ref.: 9400UXI301 which can support a maximum of three units.For thiswallmounting, the feet of theunitsmust not be fitted. Kit 9400UXI301 includes: twobrackets, four fixingsfor the brackets (M6 x 50 socket cap screws, onduflex washers and 4620 expansion bolts), and fixings by thefront handles for three units (washers 19621 and screws EX 10804).

456

70

kit : 9400UXI301

3.4.2 -- Laborack or 9U subrack installation

3.4.2.1 -- Installing the 9U unit (Ref. 9400UXI302)

Useful cableway 27x210

P=360

H=451,15

3.4.2.2 -- Alcatel recommendations for IDU installation in 9U rack

The recommendations depend on IDU configurations (1+ 0, 1+1 basic or 1+1 mux protected )

-- 1+1 mux protected configuration : each group of 2 or 3 IDU shall be separated by 1U.

-- 1+0 or 1+1 basic configuration : each IDU shall be separated by 1U.

This configuration supposes that room temperature should not exceed +45°C (and that the temperature at theIDU level never exceeds 55°C) .

These recommendations allow good installation conditions (place for cable interconnections) and goodoperation conditions (cooling of the IDU).


1U

1U

1U

1U

9 U rack

9 U rack

1+1 Mux protected

1+1 Mux protected

1+0 or 1+1 basic configuration




1U

1U

1U

1U

Figure 22 - Example of installation in 9U Rack

3.4.2.3 -- Laborack installation

.Height = 2050 mm

.Width = 540 mm

.Depth = 600 mm

Laborackdimensions :

Ref. : 9400XXI300

430

370

Front

85

85

Drilling template

S As standard, the laborack will be se-cured to the floor by four M6 socket capscrews supplied with the equipment.

S In the planned position, drill the floorin accordance with the template:

drill holes: 12 mm∅depth: 60 mm

S Fit the plugs and position the laborack

S Fix the laborack using the screws

When you have correctly positioned the fixing brackets on the 19” unit, the equipment will beheld by the front panel by four screws fitted into the laborack’s cage nuts.

UX 1U UNIT


3.4.2.4 -- Alcatel recommendations for IDU installation in rack

The recommendations depend on IDU configurations (1+ 0, 1+1 basic or 1+1 mux protected )-- 1+1 mux protected configuration : each group of 2 or 3 IDU shall be separated by 1U.

If a group of two IDU is used, aeration can be improved leaving 1U between the two IDU.-- 1+0 or 1+1 basic configuration : each IDU shall be separated by 1U.

This configuration supposes that room temperature at IDU level should not exceed +55°C

Note: Be sure the cable path lets dismantling IDUs in 1+1


3.5 -- Outdoor part installation3.5.1 -- General information

3.5.1.1 -- Pole mounting

Themechanical assembly is supplied complete, mechanically assembled, with screw fastenings kit and groundterminals included in a plastic bag inside the casting.

The standard mechanical system is mounted on a pipe with a diameter of:-- 90 to 114 mm for 300 mm diameter antennas,

-- 114 mm for 600 mm diameter integrated antennas.

CAUTION:If the pipe diameter is smaller than the one mentioned above, the fixing brackets ofthe pole mounting must be replaced by the kit 9400UXI103 that improves the windresistance of the whole equipment. This kit is especially recommended for the600 mm antennas on 76 to 90 mm tubes.

There are also supports for fixing the pole to the wall: please consult us.

Various antenna types and sizes can be used, together with radio systems operating at different frequenciesand in a variety of configurations.

CAUTION:Take care not to damage the O--Ring on the nose of the antenna connection.If the ODU is not to be mounted immediately after the pole mounting of the antenna,protect the connection nose (from water, dirt and impact).

For installation with non--integrated antenna, please refer to the antenna manufacturer recommendations.


3.5.1.2 -- ODU

9400 UX Outdoor units are designed for assembly:-- either with an integrated antenna connected directly to theOutdoor equipment, see §3.5.4.1 and3.5.5,

-- or with one or more non--integrated antennas, see § 3.5.6., mounted with flextwist guides.

NOTE : figures betweenbrackets representthe 13, 15 and 18 Ghzfrequency range

Ground socketCoaxial to IDU

Service kit cable socket221 (257)

221(257)

273 (273)231 (231)

189 (189) 42 (42)

47 (47)

(9400UXT102)Pointing antennainformation

Figure 23 - ODU 94XXUXR201 94XXUXR202 94XXUXR203

Figure 24 - ODU A9400UX FLAT ODU

235248,5

235

248

115,8Coaxial to IDU

Ground socket Service kit cable socket

Pointing antenna information(3DB00511AAAA)

CAUTION:Never remote the round yellow pads that are used to seal the system on the ODU.Do not stand on the ODUs, as they are not designed to support the weight of a man.


3.5.2 -- Choosing antenna polarization

The antennas are normally supplied with vertical polarization.

Vertical polarization Horizontal polarization

TOP TOP

Socket cap screw

“Antenna nose” slots

O-ring seal

ANTENNA - NOSE END VIEW

Drain orifice

Nose

Socket cap screw

Socket cap screw

TOP marker

vertical polarization

To change the polarization: undo the three socket cap screws and turn the nose through 90 degrees thentighten the screws again.

CAUTION: The O--ring must be coated with silicone grease before fitting (the grease isprovided with the antenna).

3.5.3 -- Installing the configuration with pole mounting 1 + 0 (9400UXI102)

The antenna is screwed on the pole mounting 9400UXI102. The ODU is mounted with quick latches.

Overall antenna steer (with turnbuckles set to the “maximum”) is:S Azimuth: 360 degrees for a 300 mm and 600 mm diameter antenna, around the pipe.

The steer obtained by the turnbuckles is:S Elevation:25 degrees,S Azimuth:10 degrees.

To avoid obstacles (wall too close, etc), you can fix the pole mounting on any side of the pipe. The dimensionsof the outdoor equipment are given in § 3.2.1.

NOTE: The pole mounting 9400UXI102 is not designed to be fixed directly to the wall

Procedure :-- 1) Position the antenna vertically (nose horizontal), with the drain hole in the bottom part and free of

obstacles.


-- 2) Insert the 7 M6 screws 1 with their “onduflex” springy crinkle washers 2 , tighten and secure thescrews (these screws can be found in a plastic bag located inside the casting.

M6 x 7 screws and“Ondulex” washer x 7

1

ODU 94XXUXR201,94XXUXR202,94XXUXR203

Centering pinor screw

2

Casting

Top marker

Flat washer Grower washer Nut

Optional kit:

9400UXI103A9400UX FLAT ODU

OR

Figure 25 - Pole mounting 1+0 configuration ( 9400UXI102)

CAUTION: For the torques of the screws, refer to chapter 3.3.4.


3.5.3.1 -- Installing the ODU 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202, 94xxUXR203

-- Remove the solar shield by undoing the M6 fixing screw with a 16 mm flat wrench.

-- Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two protrusion bosses inside the “nose” of the unit to the twogrooves in the “nose” of the antenna (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should be located in thebottom part of the ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the top catch on the support,begin by fastening the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom catch, and finish withthe top catch.

Position of catch for F < 20 GHz forODU from94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203

Position of catch for F > 20GHz for ODU from

94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203

Catch beadSupport plate A

-- Reposition the solar shield via the back of the ODU from 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203, centre thebottom ribs of the solar shield in the “grooves” of theODU. Slide fully home, andmoderately tightenby hand the screw (M6) in the recess on the underside of the ODU. Check the assembly by trying toextract the solar shield from its recess.

Note: The locking screw is not a fixing, it is simply intended to safeguard against inadvertent dismantling; donot overtighten.

CAUTION: If the screw cannot be reached by hand, use a 16 mm flat wrench (as anindication, fasten to a torque of 1mN, that is 0.1mdaN).

REMINDER:S The ODU/antenna assembly requires no additional seal on the flanges; the two ends are

smooth. Sealing is provided by the O--ring seal around the male “noses”.

S When the ODU is fitted, the polarization of the antenna can be ascertained from the position of theODU handle:

handle arranged vertically = horizontal polarization, and vice versa.


Two choices per polarization are possible:

Vertical polarization

Horizontal polarization

OR

OR

N N

N N

Figure 26 - Installing the ODU 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203


3.5.3.2 -- Installing the flat ODU


-- Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two protrusion bosses inside the “nose” of the unit to the twogrooves in the “nose” of the antenna (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should be located in thebottom part of the ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the top catch on the support,begin by fastening the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom catch, and finish withthe top catch.

Flat ODUPosition of catch forA9400UX flat ODU

Catch bead

-- Flange the ODU handle.

-- Reposition the solar shield via the back of the flat ODU. Slide fully home, and moderately tighten byhand the screw (M4) on the ODU.

CAUTION : When demounting, if the screws cannot be reached by hand, use a screw-driver.

S The ODU/antenna assembly requires no additional seal on the flanges; the two ends aresmooth. Sealing is provided by the O--ring seal around the male “noses”.

S When the ODU is mounted, the 50 Ω coaxial jack is always facing down, the natural reading of thePOL H or POL V etching shows the antenna polarization (see Figure 27).

Here, the normal reading of the POL V indicatesthe vertical polarization of the antenna

Figure 27 - Installing the ODU A9400UX flat ODU


S In vertical or horizontal polarization, the solar shield remains fixed in the same position and theODU is the only part which can rotate 90 degrees when changing the polarization. (See Figure 28).

Solar shield

The Arrow determinesthe polarization.

Vertical polarization Horizontal polarization

Figure 28 - Solar shield installation

3.5.3.3 -- Installing on the pipe.

CAUTION: Do not pick up the ODU/antenna assembly by the ODU handle.

Note: Be aware that azimutal coarse pointing of antenna is done at this phase.

3.5.3.4 -- Coarse pointing the antenna

Coarse pointing of the antenna is carried out as follows:S Roughly adjust the elevation orientation of the “pole mounting” in the direction of the remote

station. Use the antenna top marker (see figures in § 3.5.2), a compass and binoculars, thensecure the brackets.

S Azimutal coarse pointing has to be carried out when installing the pole mounting.


OR

ODU 94XXUXR201,94XXUXR202,94XXUXR203

A9400UX FLAT ODU

Figure 29 - Azimutal pointing of antenna

S Elevation alignment is performed only with the elevation turnbuckles. If the elevation angle ishigher that (+ 5°) or lower than (-- 5°), it is necessary to:

-- remove completely one of the 2 screws fixing the antenna support on the azimutal support and,

-- insert it in the third hole accessible.


α = 25 _

α = 25 _

Put the screws in thetwo external holes

si: α > 5 _ou α < -- 5 _

Put the screws in the2 holes visible throughthe window, i.e. themiddle and theexternal hole.

si --5_<α<5_

or

A9400UX FLAT ODU

Figure 30 - Elevation coarse pointing of antenna

CAUTION:In either case, the support must be fixed with 3 screws, 2 put in the window and 1corresponding to its axis of rotation.All screws must be tightened and secured only after fine pointing of the antenna

CAUTION:Take care to put the 2 screws in the window with the flat washers positioned asshown is the figure below.


3.5.4 -- Installing a configuration 1+0 with pole mounting 1 + 1 (9400UXI101) andintegrated antenna

This assembly is valid only for antenna diameters of up to 600 mm (two feet). The antenna is screwed to thepole mounting 9400UXI101. The ODU is mounted with quick latches.

Overall antenna steer (with turnbuckles set to the “maximum”) is:-- azimutal: 360 degrees for a 300 mm diameter antenna and 180 degrees for a 600 mm diameter

antenna,

-- elevation:25 degrees.

The steer obtained by the turnbuckles is:-- azimutal:9 degrees,

-- elevation:9 degrees.

If youhavephysical difficulties assembling themounting (wall too close, obstacle, etc), the “azimutal” turnbucklecan be moved and mounted on the other side of the pole mounting arm.

Procedure :-- 1) Position the antenna vertically (nose horizontal), with the drain hole in the bottom part and free of

obstacles.

-- 2) Insert the 7 M6 screws 1 with their “onduflex” springy crinkle washers 2 , tighten and secure thescrews (these screws can be found in a plastic bag located inside the casting).


Centering pinor screw 7 x M6 screw and

“Onduflex” washer

1 2

flat washer

Grower washer

Nut

Top marker

Optional kit9400UXI103

Casting

or

ODU94XXUXR201,94XXUXR202,94XXUXR203

A9400UX FLAT ODU

Figure 31 - 9400UXI101 configuration

CAUTION: For the torque of the screws, refer to chapter 3.3.4.

CAUTION: The O--ring must be coated with silicone grease before fitting.


3.5.4.1 -- Installing the ODU 94XXUXR201, 94XXUXR202, 94XXUXR203-- Remove the solar shield by undoing the M6 fixing screw with a 16 mm flat wrench.

-- Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two protrusion bosses located inside the “nose” of the unitand facing the two grooves in the “nose” of the antenna (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry shouldbe located in the bottom part of the ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the topcatch on the support, begin by fastening the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottomcatch, to complete with the top catch.





-- Swivel the antenna support through 90° on its azimuthal axis to release it from the pole. Immobilize

the vertical axis by the five screws (see Figure 32, item 3 ).

-- Reposition the solar shield via the back of the ODU, centre the bottom ribs of the solar shield in the“grooves” of the ODU. Slide fully home, andmoderately tighten by hand the screw (M6) in the recesson the underside of the ODU. Check the assembly by trying to extract the solar shield from its recess.

Note: The locking screw is not a fixing, it is simply intended to safeguard against inadvertent dismantling; donot overtighten.

CAUTION: If the screw cannot be reached by hand, use a 16 mm flat wrench (as anindication, fasten to a torque of 1mN, that is 0.1mdaN).

REMINDER:S The ODU/antenna assembly requires no additional seal on the flanges; the two ends are

smooth. Sealing is provided by the O--ring seal around the male “noses”.

S For a 1+0 configuration, when theODU is fitted, the polarization of the antenna can be ascertainedfrom the position of the ODU handle:

handle arranged vertically = horizontal polarization, and vice versa.

3.5.4.2 -- Installing the ODU 9400UX flat ODU-- Remove the solar shield by undoing the M4 fixing screw manually or with a screw driver.

-- Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two bosses located inside the “nose” of the unit and facingthe two grooves in the “nose” of the antenna (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should be locatedin the bottom part of the ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the top catch on thesupport, begin by fastening the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom catch, tocomplete with the top catch.

Flat ODUPosition of catch forA9400UX flat ODU

Catch bead

-- Swivel the antenna support through 90° on its azimutal axis to release it from the pole. Immobilize the

vertical axis by the five screws (see Figure 32, item 3 ).




CAUTION : When unscrewing, if the screws cannot be reached by hand, use a screw-driver.


S When the ODU is mounted, the 50--ohm coaxial jack is always facing down, the natural readingof the POL H or POL V etching shows the antenna polarization (see Figure 27).

3.5.4.3 -- Installing on the pipe.

CAUTION: Do not pick up the ODU/antenna assembly by the ODU handle.

3.5.4.4 -- Pointing the antenna

-- 1) Roughly adjust the elevation orientation of the “pole mounting” in the direction of the remotestation. The elevation turnbuckle should remain in its middle position. Use the antenna top marker (seefigures in § 3.5.2), a compass and binoculars, then secure thebrackets 2 in optional Kit 9400UXI103.

CAUTION: The bracket nuts should be fastened to a torque of 3 m.daN +/-- 20%.The brackets must be clean and without grease except on the threads.

-- 2) Roughly point the antenna support towards the required azimuthal by undoing the “azimuthal”locking screw. The azimuthal turnbuckle should remain in its middle position (approximately 85 mmcentres); swivel the antenna support vertically for adjustment purposes, then retighten the “azimuthal”locking screw.

CAUTION: The azimuthal turnbuckle should not exceed 94 mm centre distance whenfine tuning the adjustment.

CAUTION:Never mount integrated antennas and ODUs under the pole mounting support.Never mount the elevation axis horizontally:

ODUs must be above the pole mounting and not laterally offset.

-- 3) On the “pole mounting”, undo the 4 + 1 M8 screws (item 3 - see figure below) so that you will beable to fit the ODU later.


1

2

3

“Pole mounting”

Azimuthal lockingscrew

Kit 9400UXI103(optional)

Position of pack of screwfasteners and terminals

Figure 32 - Pointing the antenna

-- 4) Position the U bolts 2 on the pole, fit the flat washers, “grower” washers and nuts.

CAUTION: For the fasten torques of the screws, refer to chapter 3.3.4.


3.5.5 -- Installing the (1+1) HSB configuration with integrated antenna

3.5.5.1 -- Typical 1 + 1 HSB configuration with coupler 94xxUXR111

Main ODU

Solar shieldCoupler box

Support (“Pole mounting”)

Antenna

Coupler

Standby ODU

750 ( 13⇒ 38 GHz )

-- ODU 94xxUXR201 to ODU 94xxUXR203

-- ODU 9400UX flat ODU

Antenna

Support (“Pole mounting”)

Coupler

Standby ODU

Main ODU

Solar shield


INSTALLING THE HSB COUPLER

IMPORTANT NOTE: NEVER REMOVE THE ROUND YELLOW PADS THAT ARE USEDTO SEAL THE OUTDOOR SYSTEM.

The coupler is supplied with vertical polarization (see § 3.5.2). The procedure for changing the polarization ofthe HSB coupler is described in that section (see § 7.13). This must be done before installation.

To install the HSB coupler assembly:-- take it by the handle, offer up the two bosses located in the “nose” of the coupler on the side of the

antenna port, to the grooves in the nose of the antenna,

-- Do not remove the sealing window located on the antenna port. The ODU/coupler/antennaassembly requires no additional seal on the flanges; the flanges are smooth and sealing is providedby the O--ring seal located around the male “noses”.

-- fix the coupler using three M6 x 35 mm screws and nuts in the holes in the top “lugs” of the polemounting.

-- secure the coupler by the two side screws (M6 x 30) on the pole mounting.

O-ring seal

Standby ODU

Antennaport

Fixing holes on radio support ring of “polemounting”

Side fixing holes on“pole mounting” arm

CAUTION: The seal should becoated with silicon grease before

assembly

CAUTION: The O--ring must be coated with silicon grease before assembly (the greaseis provided with the HSB).

INSTALLING ODU

The positions of the main and standby ODUs are shown in the previous figures; for installing the ODUs, see§ 3.5.4.1.

3.5.5.2 -- Typical 1+1 HSB CONFIGURATION WITH THE NEW HSB COUPLER

This type of coupler must only be used with the A9400UX flat ODUs.


1) U bolts2) Pole mounting3) Radio mounting4) Fastening points for COUPLER5) Screws fastening the antenna to the support6) Antenna screw--fastening slots7) RF Coupler Fastening brackets for ODU8) Grounding points

INSTALLING THE HSB COUPLER

For the frequencies above 20 GHz, the ODU is fitted with a “nose” adapter to remain mechanically compatiblewith the HSB coupler 94xxUXR111. Unscrew the 2 Torx screws to remove the adapters on both ODUs. Fix oneof the two adapters to the antenna access of the HSB coupler. Fasten the coupler to the support through thefour locking hooks (1) that will be tightened onto the relative fastening brackets on the radio support (2).


INSTALLING THE ODU 1+1

Grasp two modules ODU by the handle. Fasten the ODU module to the support through the locking hooks(3) that will be tightened onto the relative fastening bracket on the coupler (4).

CAUTION: The O--rings must be coated with silicon grease before assembly(otherwise, the waterproofness cannot be guaranteed).


3.5.6 -- Installation with non-integrated antenna

3.5.6.1 -- Method

-- Install the antenna on the pipe, according to the instructions given by the manufacturer and suppliedwith the antenna, and prepoint the antenna towards the remote station using a compass and a pair ofbinoculars,

-- Install the pole mounting on the pipe, see § 3.5.4.3,

-- Install the HSB coupler on the pole mounting (only for 1+1 configuration), see § 3.5.5,

-- Install the ODU, see § 3.5.6.4

-- Install the flextwist (suited to the frequency) between the polemounting and the antenna, see § 3.5.6.6.


3.5.6.2 -- Typical installation

Support radio94XXUXI102

Smooth square flange

Square flangewith groove

Adpater noseAntenna 0.90 m or greater

ODU 94xxUXR201 or

94xxUXR202 or 94xxUXR203

Flextwist

Flextwist

Antenna 0.90 m or greater

ODU 9400UX flat ODU

with solar shield

Support radio94XXUXI102

a) with ODU 94xxUXR201 or 94xxUXR202 or 94xxUXR203

b) with ODU 94xxUXR204


3.5.6.3 -- Assembling and installing radio support

For installation, you will need the following:-- The ODU support, ref: 1AB128510002 is regardless of frequency band.

-- a microwave nose,

-- a 600 mm long “flextwist” waveguide.

Note : As our ODU supports are chromate plated or tinned on the “flextwist”, be careful withthe materials used facing the unit to prevent any galvanic couple.

Frequencyrange Antenna side flange Flextwist flanges Radio side

flangeFlextwistreference

13 GHz PBR 120 UBR 120/PBR 120 UBR 120 9413UXI103

15 GHz PBR 140 UBR 140/PBR 140 UBR 140 9415UXI103

18 GHzUBR 220/PBR 220 UBR 220 94XXUXI103

23/25 GHz PBR 220 UBR 220/PBR 220 UBR 220 94XXUXI103

38 GHz Only integrated antennas

The pole mounting kit comprises the parts detailed below.

Verticalpolarization

Horizontalpolarization

-- Choose the horizontal or vertical polarization to match that of the ODU before fixing nose C (typedependent on the frequency) on plate A with the three M4 x 16 socket cap screws (3 mm Allen key).

-- Choose the direction of assembly of plateB (on the right or on the left of the pipe); this should matchthat of the antenna, then bolt the plate A onto plate B with four M10 x 35 hex nuts and four washers.

-- Offer up the assembly to the antenna support pipe, then secure it with the M10 U bolts, nuts, lock nutsand washers.

-- Check that all the screw fastenings are correctly tightened. For the fasten torques of the screws, referto § 3.3.4.

CAUTION: The O--ring must be coated with silicone grease before fitting (the grease isprovided with the microwave nose).


3.5.6.4 -- Installing the ODU 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202, 94xxUXR203

-- 1) Remove the solar shield by undoing the M6 fixing screw with a 16 mm flat wrench.

-- 2) Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two bosses inside the “nose” of the unit to the two groovesin the “adapter nose” (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should be located in the bottom part of theODU). Still holding theODU, engagewithout fastening the top catch on the support, begin by fasteningthe two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom catch and finish with the top catch.





-- 3) Reposition the solar shield via the back of the ODU, centre the bottom ribs of the solar shieldin the “grooves” of the ODU. Slide fully home and, by hand, tighten the screw (M6) in the recess onthe underside of the ODU. Check the assembly by trying to extract the solar shield from its recess

*(torque, by way of indication: 1 mN = 0.1 mdaN)

3.5.6.5 -- Installing the flat ODU


-- Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two bosses located inside the “nose” of the unit and facingthe two grooves in the “nose” of the antenna (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should be locatedin the bottom part of the ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the top catch on thesupport, begin by fastening the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom catch, tocomplete with the top catch.

Flat ODU

Catch bead

Position of catch forA9400UX flat ODU



CAUTION : When unscrewing, if the screws cannot be reached by hand, use a screw-driver.



S When the ODU is mounted, the 50--ohm coaxial jack is always facing down, the natural readingof the POL H or POL V etching shows the antenna polarization (see Figure 27).


3.5.6.6 -- Installing the “Flextwist” waveguide

Refer to the example given in § 3.5.6.2 and the table in § 3.5.6.3.

This 600 mm long twistable flexible waveguide is supplied complete with gaskets and fasteners. At one end,it has a smooth square flange (to be mounted on the antenna) and at the other end, a grooved square flangedesigned to accommodate an O-ring seal (mounted at the ODU end). The kit comprises:

-- one 600 mm “flextwist” waveguide,

-- one O-ring seal for square flange,

-- six M4 x 20 or M3 x 16 stainless steel socket cap screws (13/15 GHz or 18/23/25 GHz versionsrespectively),

-- six M4 x 12 (13/15 GHz) or M3 x 12 (18/23/25 GHz) stainless steel socket cap screws,

-- 12 18/10 stainless Z4 (13/15 GHz) or Z3 (18/23/25 GHz) flat washers,

-- 12 18/10 stainless B4 (13/15 GHz) or B3 (18/23/25 GHz) “Onduflex” springy crinkle washers ,

-- six 18/10 stainless HM4 (13/15 GHz) or HM3 (18/23/25 GHz) hex nuts,

-- one record of measurements taken on the waveguide.

REMEMBER TO FIT THE GASKETS AND TIGHTEN THE SCREWS.


3.6 -- Wiring

3.6.1 -- Wiring the power supply to the 19” indoor units

3.6.1.1 -- Direct connection with the power supply

The 48 V DC or 24 V DC connection kit is for setting up the power connection between the main or extensionIDU and the distribution panel (one for each terminal). On the user side, the plus or minus pole can begrounded in the current version of the equipment.

Preparing the connecting cable--V female contact +V female contactGround

For 48 V supply, 3 x 1.5 mm2 connecting cable(minimum), flexible, unshielded

For 24 V supply, 3 x 2.5 mm2 connecting cable(minimum) flexible, unshielded

Plug + shell reference: 3CC08048AAxx or ABxx(supplied with the connector kit)

Shell

3.6.1.2 -- Power panel and IDU

19”, 3U internal power panel (ref: 9400XXC511)

This provides six ways protected by 6A fuses, providing remote connection to the “operator’s” power input.

Wall mounted power unit (ref: 9400XXC512)

This provides six ways protected by 6A fuses, forremote connection to the “operator’s” power input.


For both these products, the fuses used are 8.5 x 31.5 6A 400V gG domestic type cartridges.

The cables supplied to connect the IDUs are:-- 48 V: 3CC08165AAxx(3 x 1.5 mm2),

-- 24 V: 3CC08209AAxx (3 x 2.5 mm2).

To connect the “operator’s” input, the recommended cable is:-- 48 V : 3CC08211AAxx (3 x 4 mm2),

-- 24 V : 3CC08212AAxx (3 x 10 mm2).

3.6.2 -- Equipment grounding

Grounding connections are made on three separate parts:-- the indoor units,

-- the outdoor units,

-- the pole mounting mechanical assembly.

Earthing is bonded using green/yellow insulated cable with a minimum cross sectional area of 1x16 mm2

towards the grounding vertical run. Wiring should be kept as short as possible. The overall length for all of theconnections must not exceed 20 metres.

In addition, the IDU/ODU cable may be grounded using kit: 9400UXI204

The ground connection for the ODU part should not be done through the lightningconductor.

3.6.2.1 -- On 19” indoor units (IDU)

The ground terminal comprises a tapped terminal (connector side of the unit, alongside the IDU/ODU coaxialsocket), to which is fastened (by its M6 screw) a crimp terminal.

Tapped ground terminal

3.6.2.2 -- On outdoor units (ODU)

The mechanical ground terminal comprises a tapped terminal located on the front of the ODU (see § 3.5).GroundingEarthing connections are by crimp terminal (this is supplied with the pole mounting’s kit of screwfasteners).


3.6.2.3 -- On the pole mounting assembly

The ground terminal comprises a tapped hole located at the back of the cast part which supports the radio unitin the 1+0 configuration and the HSB coupler in a 1+1 configuration. The ground terminal is based on a crimpterminal (this terminal is supplied with the pole mounting’s kit of screw fasteners).

Figure 33 - Grounding the “pole mounting” and the cable

Indoor

The installationof the groundingkit is necessaryonly if D > 80 m

tapped holefor groundterminal

tapped hole forground terminal

groundingkit 9400UXI204

D


Figure 34 -Typical example of good grounding practice [ETSI document Draft EG 200 053 V1.4.3(2002-02) (Page 91/145), informative]

Lightning finialbonded to tower

I.F. cable outer conductor bonded totower at top and bottom of vertical

run via feeder grounding kit

I.F. cable outer conductorbonded to ground via feeder

grounding kit

Zone of protection provided by tower

I.F. cable

Ground bar below the hopper

Tower and building ground rings interconnected (driven electrode systems shown)

Independent grounding functions, e.g.DC power, AC power, etc.

Boundary fence groundvia building ground ring

Each tower leg bondedvia sacrificial ground lugto tower ground ring

3.6.3 -- IDU/ODU wiring

The link is provided by a single 50 ohm coaxial cable (for each IDU/ODU link). For protection againstinterference and to ensure that it does not radiate interference (EMC requirements), the cable used isdouble-shielded, 11 mm in diameter, with an outer PU sheathing (for UV protection) with a maximum length of300 meters approved today under the reference 1AC001100022.

The outer sheathing of the cable is marked at approximately 60 cm intervals with the cable reference1AC001100022. The cable is terminated bymale, elbow “N” type connectors, ref: 9400UXI203. The connectorsare watertight, but, for added protection, when connected, preferably wind self--amalgamating tape suppliedwith the consumables kit (optional) around the connector.

Instructions for fitting these connectors are given in Appendix 5.

The greatest possible attention should be paid to thewiring of the coaxial plugs and to compliancewith the cableinstallation rules, such as: minimum bending radius of 80 mm, watertightness, etc. If ordered by the customer,a cable grounding kit may be supplied; this is for sites where radio frequency interference is high, for example:radio stations, TV transmitters, etc. Kit ref: 9400UXI204 (see figure 33).

Instructions for the use of the cable earthing kit are supplied with the kit.

In a 1 + 1 configuration, the difference in length between IDU / ODU cables must not exceed 20 metres.


3.6.3.1 -- Fixing the IDU/ODU cable

The coaxial cable is fixed to the pole mounting as rigidly as possible to avoid repetitive movement caused bymechanical or atmospheric vibrations that might in turn damage the cable or connector.

IDU/ODU cablecorrect positioning

Cable ties

Service kit spring hook

CABLE FIXING

ODU / IDU CABLE

Cable ties

OR

ODU

9400UX flat ODU

ODU 9400UX flat ODU

ODU / IDU cable

The cable is fixed along the supporting pipe or pole by the normal methods (Colson cable ties are supplied inthe optional consumables kit)


3.6.4 -- Wiring the 34 Mbit/s tributary and auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream

The 34 Mbit/s port is implemented by 1.6/5.6 connectors located on a plate installed at:

-- “I/O (9/16)” on the main IDU for 1+0 and 1+1 configurations,

-- “I/O (9/16)” on the access IDU for 1+1 configurations with MUX protection.

If a BNC connector is required for the 34 Mbit/s stream, use a BNC/1.6/5.6 adapter kit, ref: 9400XXI405.

34 Mbit/s port

E R

1.6/ 5.6 connector1.6/ 5.6 connector

+ 2 Mbit/s auxilliary

The auxiliary 2 Mbit/s port uses female 37-pin Sub-D connectors:

-- “I/O (1/8)” on the main IDU,

-- “I/O (1/8)” on the access IDU.

PIN LAU : 3CC06061AAxxSIGNAL

In+ In-- Out+ Out--

LAU : 3CC06061AAxxLIU : 3CC06118AAxx

Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s 9 28 19 37 X

In the 75 Ω version, “In+” and “Out+” are the live input and output points and “In-” and “Out-” are the groundconnectors for the signals.

3.6.5 -- Wiring n x 2 Mbit/s tributaries

3.6.5.1 -- Connections

The user ports will be via one of the following ports described in Appendix 6.1.1:

-- 37-way “I/O (1/8)” and “I/O (9/16)” connectors on the main IDU,-- 37--way “I/O (1 -- 4)” connectors on the Light IDU version,-- 37-way “I/O (1/8)” and “I/O (9/16)” connectors on the access IDU (1+1 version with MUX protection),

when the access IDU exists.-- on 3CC13659AAxx cables (1+1 with MUX protection without access IDU)

In 120 ohms, if the non-distributor option is selected, wire the braces supplied with the IDU-ODU connectorkit (ref: 3CC07899AAxx) using a crimping tool (608868-1, from AMP).

3.6.5.2 -- Wall mounting (9400UXI301) indoor units

S The distributors described below can be fixed to a wall using this kitcomprising two brackets + fixing screws (Ref. 3CC07957AAAA).

398 mm60 mm

S 3U 19” mounting


3.6.5.3 -- 4 x 2 Mbit/s wiring with distributor

COMMERCIAL CODEOF DISTRIBUTOR

ASSEMBLY

OUTPUTTYPE CABLE DISTRIBUTOR

9400XXI404 75 Ω1.6/5.6

37-pinconnector

2 m

3CC07885Axxx

3CC08061AAxx

1 Unit

1 Unit = 44.45 mm

9400XXI4041 x 9400XX405

75 ΩBNC

37-pinconnector

2 m

3CC07759Axxx3CC08061ABxx

1U

For 120 Ω wiring, use the cables provided for the 8 x 2 Mbit/s version.



ASSEMBLY


9400XXI408 75 Ω1.6/5.6

37-pinconnector

2 m

3CC07885Axxx3CC08061AAxx

1U

9400XXI4082 x 9400XXI405

75 ΩBNC

37-pinconnector

2 m

3CC07759Axxx3CC08061ABxx

1U

9400XXI408

120 Ω

3CC07658Axxx

2 m

3CC07810AAxx

3U EMC

9400XXI408

120 Ω

3CC07658Axxx

2 m

3CC08062AAxx non EMC

1U




ASSEMBLY


9400XXI416 75 Ω1.6/5.6

37-pinconnector

2 m

2 x 3CC07885Axxx3CC08061AAxx

1U

9400XXI4164 x 9400XXI405

75 ΩBNC

37-pinconnector

2 m

2 x 3CC07759Axxx3CC08061ABxx

1U

9400XXI416

120 Ω

2 x 3CC07658Axxx

2 m

3CC07810AAxx

3U EMC

9400XXI416

120 Ω

2 x 3CC07658Axxx

2 m

3CC08062AAxx non EMC

1U

3.6.6 -- Engineering service channel wiring

This wiring is for connecting the user’s terminal equipment to the ESC connector. For the link cable, use theconnectors supplied in the connector kit shipped with the IDU-ODU assembly. The pinout of the connectorsis given in Appendix 6.2.


3.6.7 -- Alarm and remote control wiring (TS/TC)

The TS/TC interface on:-- the “ALARMS I/O” connector of the main IDU,

-- the “ESC3 / ALARM I/O” connector of the Light IDU versions.

is used to:-- supply three signals (outputs) to the equipment (dry loops, 0.5 A/100 V).

-- supply (output) one remote control (dry loop, 0.5 A/100 V).

-- connect eight housekeeping alarm inputs: nº1 to nº8 alarms. These alarms are formed by normallyopened or normally closed loops, see § 7.10.

For the connecting cable, use the connector provided in the connector kits supplied with the IDU--ODUassembly. The connector pinout is given in the Appendix 6.3.

3.6.8 -- Engineering service channel ESC2 telephone handset

The service channel telephone handset (classic IDU only, ref: 9400XXB000, optional kit) is as shown below.It connects to the IDU, via the RJ11 connector with the handset symbol; it uses DTMF (tone) dialling.

To safeguard against EMC problems, remember to clip the isolating ferrite core on thecable. This is supplied in the main IDU connector kit (3CC08048ABxx).

The handset can be connected to the main IDU, via the front panel or connector panel.

Caution: to operate, set the handset switch to “FV”.

Set switch to“FV”

Isolating ferrite core

RJ 11 connector


3.7 -- Wiring between a terminal’s units

3.7.1 -- Main IDU - extension IDU wiring

This is for 1+1 configurations of all types and 1+0 configurations with extension.

Main IDU

Extension IDU

Cable3CC07160ABxx

Cable3CC07157ABxx

( 9 / I6 )

Connect the ESC EXT connector on the main IDU to the ESC MAIN connector on the extension IDU using acable ref: 9400UXC130 (3CC07157ABxx), with male 37-way connectors (L = 300 mm).

Connect the EXT connector on the main IDU to the MAIN connector on the extension IDU via a cableref: 9400UXB221 (3CC07160ABxx), with 68-way rectangular plugs (L = 300 mm).


3.7.2 -- Wiring the access IDU to a main and extension IDU

This applies to 1+1 configurations with multiplex protection.

NOTE:When the 1+1 configuration with multiplexer protection is selected, the units must bearranged physically from top to bottom, as follows: main unit, access unit (when used),extention unit.

3.7.2.1 -- N x 2 Mbit/s without Access IDU (preferred configuration since the IDU type 2 availability )

Cables3CC13659AAxx

MAIN IDU

Extension IDU

Cable3CC07160ABxx

Cable3CC07157ABxx

2 Mbits HDB3connection

3/16

1/8

Configuration with MUX protection without access IDU

Two identical cables ref: 3CC013659AAxx, 37--pin male plugs,L = 300 mm are used to be connected to the following connectors between the two IDUs:

-- ACCESS (1/8) connector of the extension IDU to the I/O (1/8) connector of the main IDU.

-- ACCESS (9/16) connector of the extension IDU to the I/O (9/16) connector of the main IDU.

NOTE:When the 1+1 configuration with multiplexer protection is selected, the units must bearranged physically from top to bottom, as follows: main unit, extension unit.

3.7.2.2 -- 34 Mbit/s with Access IDU (for both IDU type 1 and IDU type 2)

Cables3CC07157ABxx

Main IDU

Extension IDU

Access IDUCable

3CC07160ABxxCable

3CC07157ABxx

2 Mbit/s 34 Mbit/s

Aux 2 Mbit/s HDB3 connection34 Mbit/s HDB3 connection

Two identical cables ref: 3CC07157ABxx, 37--pin male plugs,L = 300 mm are use to be connected to the following connectors of the access IDU:

-- MAIN (1/8) to the I/O (1/8) connector of the main IDU.

-- EXT (1/8) to the ACCESS I/O (1/8) connector of the extension IDU.


3.7.2.3 -- N x 2 Mbit/s with Access IDU (for old IDU type 1)

Cable3CC07160ABxx Cable

3CC07157ABxx

Main IDU

Access IDU

Extension IDU

Cables3CC07157ABxx Cable

3CC07157ABxx

2 Mbit/s HDB3 connection

Four identical cables (two if the number of tributaries is < 8) ref: 3CC07157ABxx, 37--pin male plugs,L = 300 mm are used to be connected to the following connectors of the access IDU:






3.8 -- Wiring between terminals of a station

The wiring in this case is to provide continuity of tributaries and service channels between the various terminalsof the particular station.

3.8.1 -- Tributary wiring

Set up the wiring to interconnect the various tributaries from the N x 2 Mbit/s distributors or the 34 Mbit/sconnectors of each terminal according to the wiring diagram specified by the network administrator.

3.8.2 -- ESC wiring

3.8.2.1 -- ESC1 (supervision channel)

STATION WITH TWO 2-WAY TERMINALS

Connect the NMS1 connector on the first unit to the NMS1 connector on the second unit using cable ref:9400UXC332 (3CC07711AAxx), 2 m long.

STATION WITH THREE 3-WAY TERMINALS

Connect the NMS1 connector on the first unit to the NMS1 connector on the second unit using cable ref:9400UXC332 (3CC07711AAxx) 2 m long.

Connect the NMS2 connector on the second unit to the NMS1 connector on the third unit using cable ref:9400UXC332 (3CC07711AAxx), 2 m long.

NODE EXCHANGE

The supervision bus is used to extend the wiring to N items of equipment by linking the NMS2 connector of oneto the NMS1 connector of the next, as many times as is needed, using cable ref: 9400UXC332(3CC07711AAxx), 2 m long.

SNMP bus protection: the SNMP bus supports meshed connections, for example, by linking the NMS2connector of the nth terminal to the NMS1 connector of the first terminal, and so on.

3.8.2.2 -- ESC2 wiring (analogue channel)

This channel is not provided in the Light IDU versions.

STATION WITH TWO 2-WAY TERMINALS

Connect theBACK TO BACK connectors of the main IDUs via cable ref: 9400UXC333 (3CC08729AAxx), 2mlong

STATION WITH THREE 3-WAY TERMINALS-- Connect the BACK TO BACK ports of the first unit and second unit via cable ref: 9400UXC333

(3CC06688AAxx), 2 m long,

-- and connect theAUDIO1 ports of the second unit to theAUDIO1 ports of the third unit using cable ref:9400UXC332 (3CC07711AAxx), 2 m long.


The connections can be extended to n terminals according to the figure below:-- Connect the BACK TO BACK ports of the terminals (1 and 2), (3 and 4), (5 and 6), etc, via cable

ref: 9400UXC333 (3CC08729AAxx), 2 m long,

-- and connect the AUDIO1 ports of terminals (2 and 3), (4 and 5), (6 and 7), etc, via cableref: 9400UXC332 (3CC07711AAxx), 2 m long .

E3 E4Back to back

E1 E2Back to back

E5 E6Back to backAudio1 to Audio 1 Audio1 to Audio 1

3.8.2.3 -- ESC 3, 4, 5 wiring

CLASSIC IDUSSet up specific wiring using the connectors supplied with the IDU connector kit

-- Connector pinout information is given in Appendix 5

S 9--way connector 3CC07920AAxx



LIGHT IDUOnly service channel 3 is available.

-- Prepare specific wiring with 37--way connector 3CC09311AAxx supplied with the connector kit.


4 -- Configuration and operation softwareSystems are commissioned, operated and maintained via a portable PC with the “946LUX50 1320 CT”supervision software installed which runs in Windows(TM) environment. The computer connects directly to themain IDU (F connector, item in the figure below), via an F connector adapter cable (3CC14134AAxx) andconnected to a 9-way/9-way cable (1AB 054120027) supplied with the set of software installation CD--ROM.

CLASSIC IDU

LIGHT IDU

RST

IDU

Figure 35 - Controls, indicators and connectors on the IDU

This manual applies to the 946LUX50 version of the software installed on the PC.

For the terminal to which it is connected and for the remote terminal (when the link is set up), this software canbe used to:

-- display and administer all alarms, status, remote controls,

-- read and modify the configuration (bit rate, frequencies, etc),

-- display transmission parameters (received power, transmission power),

-- monitor performance (G.784),

-- download software,

-- browse remote inventory,

-- display event log.


4.1 -- Installing the software4.1.1 -- Warning note

You are assumed to be familiar with:-- use of the installed PC and its devices,

-- operation of the PC in WINDOWS NT, 2000 or XP *.

In addition, for some of the configuration applications, the operator should be aware of certain specificationsof the International Standard Organization (ISO) and of the standards applied to the Plesiochronous DigitalHierarchy (PDH) (ITU--T Recommandations).

The PC must have the following minimum specifications:S Pentium III or compatible processor operating at 850 MHz or above,

S 256 Mbytes of RAM (512 Mbytes recommended with Windows XP),

S serial asynchronous communication port,

S 4 Gbytes hard disk,

S CD--ROM or DVD--ROM drive,

S 1024 x 768 display.

The operating systems validated are the following:S Windows NT 4.0 SP3 to SP6, 2000 to SP4, or XP to SP1 installed on the hard disk.

Before installing the system, check the following points:-- if there is a virtual disk, uninstall it,

-- check that the system date and time are correct and if not, adjust them,

-- if your PC is running under Windows XP, the firewall must be disabled.

* MS-DOS, MICROSOFT and WINDOWS are registered trademarks of MICROSOFT Corporation


4.2 -- Summary of SW installation steps

The installation steps for the software in PC WINDOWS--NT/XP/2000 environments (PC disconnected fromEquipment Controller) are as follows:

Installation from software CD--ROM-- installation of 1320CT + NE software from software CD--ROM

-- end of SW installation from software CD--ROM

CT initial configuration-- NE login

-- Craft Terminal configuration

-- NE software downloading preparation that is described in detail in following paragraphs.

4.2.1 -- Software loading in PC WINDOWS--NT/XP/2000 environment

!CAUTION:S Procedures described in the following are carried out with the PC disconnected from the NE

4.2.2 -- Installation of CT + NE software from CD--ROM

4.2.2.1 -- Standard software installation

The software installation can be performed with two different procedures:-- CT Products automatic installation

-- CT Products guided installation

The first procedure is used to “upgrade” thenewsoftware in the system, the secondonemust beused to performthe first software installation and to “upgrade” two specific components: Java and LLMan.

The standard installation sequence uses the “guided” procedure to install the first two components (Java andLLMan), and then the “automatic” one to install the other components.

The components that need to be installed are the following:-- JRE: Java Runtime Environment

-- LLMan: Alcatel Lower Layer Manager (required for craft terminal--to--IDU connection through itsF interface)

-- CT--K: Craft Terminal kernel component

-- SNMP--CT--K--ADD--ON: Craft terminal additional component for management of SNMP NES

-- HOLD--CT--K--ADD--ON: Craft terminal online help component

-- JUSM--LUX50: LUX50 Java User Service Manager, NE management interface

-- SW Package REG 946LUX50: LUX50 IDU embedded software (for IDU software download)

The following describes (step by step) the procedure to install “JRE” and “Alcatel Lower Layer Manager” withthe “CT Products guided installation”


Operations sequence:

Step 1. Select “CT Products guided installation” and press “NEXT” button.

Step 2. Select “JRE” and “Alcatel Lower Layer Manager” components.

Figure 36 - Craft Terminal Component Selection Guided Installation

Step 3. Press “Next” button to begin the installation of the previously selected components.

Step 4. Start the Java installation and answer the questions according to your system.

Step 5. If a computer restart is requested, select NO and continue the installation.

NOTE: The computer restart must be performed at the END of the installation procedure.


Figure 37 - Lower Layer Manager Welcome screen

Step 6. Press “NEXT” button to start the installation of the Lower Layers Manager.

Figure 38 - Lower Level Manager Completion Screen

Step 7. Select “Configure Lower Layer” and press “Finish” to complete the operation.


Step 8. Complete the configuration by pressing OK button.

NOTE: If a network adapter is not running on your PC, you can set the “System identifier”field with a sequenceof 12“0”. The following window will be displayed.

Figure 39 - Lower Layer Manager Settings Screen

Figure 40 - Null System Identifier Warning

Step 9. Click Yes to confirm.


The following describes the procedure for installing all the components except “JRE” and “Alcatel Lower LayerManager” with the “CT Products automatic installation”

Operations sequence:

Step 1. Select the “CT Products automatic installation ” and press “Next” button.

Figure 41 - CT Products Automatic Installation Screen


Step 2. Select all components except “JRE” and “Alcatel Lower Layer Manager”.

Figure 42 - Craft Terminal Component Selection (automatic selection)

Step 3. Press Next to execute the installation of the selected components.

4.2.2.2 -- Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers

After installing the softwareon theCT youmust configure a virtual network interface for theNE connectionusingTCP/IP through the serial port.

Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is a software component used by Alcatel Lower LayersManager to manage TCP/IP packets through the serial port.

Follow this guide to install and configure Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers using the ControlPanel.

4.2.2.3 -- Installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers under Windows NT 4.0

To install theAlcatel VirtualNetworkCard for Lower Layers select theAdapters tab in theNetwork Control Panelapplet.

Before installing Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP protocol (please referto Windows NT Help).

To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network Control Panel applet from theControl Panel.


-- Click the Add... button in the Adapter tab of the Network Control Panel applet.

-- In the ”Select Network Adapter” window, click on the ”Have Disk...” button in order to add the AlcatelLower Layer network adapter.

Figure 43 - Network Adapter Selection (Windows NT 4.0)

In the Insert Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation phase (e.g.C:\WinNT\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC; type ”echo %systemroot%” from a Command Prompt window todiscover the right location of the WinNT folder) and click OK.


Figure 44 - Alcatel Lower Layer Driver Selection (Windows NT 4.0)

-- If the following dialog box appears, the driver is already installed.

Figure 45 - Existing Net Card Warning (Windows NT 4.0)

Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now installed. Youwill need to configure its TCP/IP parametersbefore using it with Alcatel Lower Layers Manager.


4.2.2.4 -- Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers Under Windows NT 4.0

To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers use both the Bindings and the Protocols tabsin the Network Control Panel applet.

Before configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP protocol (pleaserefer to Windows NT Help).

To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network Control Panel applet from theControl Panel.

-- Select the bindings of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers in the Bindings tab (1), (2) of theNetwork Control Panel applet.

-- Disable any unnecessary components (3), (4).

-- Select the Protocols tab (5) of the Network Control Panel applet, then either a message box (NTconfiguration step 2) or a dialog box (NT configuration step 3) may appear.

-- Follow the instructions until the dialog box (NT configuration step 4) appears.

Figure 46 - Alcatel VNC Configuration (Windows NT 4.0)

1

2

3

4

5


-- Click Yes to save changes.

Figure 47 - Change Configuration Dialog (Windows NT 4.0)-- Select Protocols tab (1), TCP/IP Protocol (2) and click the Properties button (3).

Figure 48 - TCP/IP Protocol Selection (Windows NT 4.0)

1

2

3


-- Configure the IP Address and the Subnet Mask for the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layersand click OK.

Figure 49 - TCP/IP Configuration (Windows NT 4.0)

1

2

3

4

5


-- Click Close in the Protocols tab of the Network Control Panel applet.

Figure 50 - TCP/IP End of Configuration (Windows NT 4.0)

-- The new configuration of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers will be used at the next restartof the computer.

-- If you are configuring or installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you can click Yes.If you are installing some other component you should click No, continue the installation and restartthe computer later.

Figure 51 - Computer Restart Confirmation (Windows NT 4.0)


4.2.2.5 -- Installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers Under Windows 2000

To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers, run the Add/Remove HardwareWizard from theControl Panel.

Before installing and configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install the TCP/IPprotocol (please refer to Windows 2000 Help).

To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network and Dial-up connectionsapplet from the Control Panel.

-- • Click the Next button in theWelcome to the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard dialog box.

Figure 52 - Add/Troubleshoot Selection (Windows 2000)


Figure 53 - Adding Network Adapter (Windows 2000)


-- Click the Have Disk... button in the Select Network Adapter dialog box.

Figure 54 - Selecting Network Adapter (Windows 2000)

In the Install From Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation phase (e.g.C:\WinNT\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC; type ”echo %systemroot%” from a Command Prompt window todiscover the right location of the WinNT folder) and click OK.


Figure 55 - Alcatel Lower Layers Selection (Windows 2000)


-- Click Next in the Start Hardware Installation dialog box.

Figure 56 - Finish Lower Layers Installation (Windows 2000)

Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now installed. You need to configure its TCP/IP parametersbefore using it with Alcatel Lower Layers Manager.


4.2.2.6 -- Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers Under Windows 2000

To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network and Dial-up connectionsapplet from the Control Panel.

Before installing and configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IPprotocol (please refer to Windows 2000 Help).

To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Add/Remove HardwareWizard from theControl Panel.

-- Open thenetwork connection using the Alcatel Virtual NetworkCard for Lower Layers from theNetworkand Dial--up connections applet.

Figure 57 - Open Lower Layer Connection (Windows 2000)

-- Uncheck any unnecessary component in the Properties dialog box General tab (1). Check and selectthe Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) component (2) and click Properties (3).


Figure 58 - TCP/IP Protocol Selection (Windows 2000)

1

2

3


-- Configure the IP Address (1) and the Subnet Mask (2) and click OK (3).

Figure 59 - TCP/IP Configuration (Windows 2000)

3

1

2

Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now configured. You will need the Alcatel Lower LayersManager to use it.


4.2.2.7 -- Installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers Under Windows XP

To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers, run the Add Hardware Wizard from the ControlPanel.

Before installing and configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install the TCP/IPprotocol (please refer to Windows XP Help).

To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network and Dial–up connectionsapplet from the Control Panel.

-- Click the Next button in theWelcome to the Add Hardware Wizard dialog box.

Figure 60 – Add Hardware Wizard Selection (Windows XP)


Figure 61 - Adding Network Adapter (Windows XP)


– Click the Have Disk... button in the Select Network Adapter dialog box.

Figure 62 - Selecting Network Adapter (Windows XP)

In the Install From Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation phase (e.g.C:\WinNT\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC; type ”echo %systemroot%” from a Command Prompt window todiscover the right location of the WinNT folder) and click OK.

Figure 63 – Alcatel Lower Layers Selection (Windows XP)


-- Click Next in the Start Hardware Installation dialog box.

Figure 64 – Finish Lower Layers Installation (Windows XP)

Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now installed. You need to configure its TCP/IP parametersbefore using it with Alcatel Lower Layers Manager.

4.2.2.8 -- Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers Under Windows XP

To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network Connections applet from theControl Panel.

Before installing and configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IPprotocol (please refer to Windows XP Help).

To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Add Hardware Wizard from the ControlPanel.


-- Open thenetwork connection using the Alcatel Virtual NetworkCard for Lower Layers from theNetworkand Dial–up connections applet.

Figure 65 – Open Lower Layer Connection (Windows XP)

-- Uncheck any unnecessary component in the Properties dialog box General tab (1). Check and selectthe Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) component (2) and click Properties (3).

12

3

Figure 66 – TCP/IP Protocol Selection (Windows XP)


Configure the IP Address (1) and the Subnet Mask (2) and click OK (3).

3

2

1

Figure 67 – TCP/IP Configuration (Windows XP)

Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now configured. You will need the Alcatel Lower LayersManager to use it.

4.2.3 -- End of SW installation from SWP CD--ROM

Having reached this phase, youhave finished theSoftware transfer fromSWPCD--ROM to thePCenvironment.Now, you can remove the SWP CD--ROM from the PC’s CD--ROM drive.


4.3 -- CT initial configuration4.3.1 -- Preliminary Procedures

!CAUTION:S Procedures described in the following are carried out with the PC connected to the NE.

! S This is a general procedure valid for all NE types.

4.3.2 -- Craft Terminal configuration

This procedure is necessary to configure the PC in order to manage the Network Elements and includes thefollowing types of configuration:

-- PC hostname-- CT configuration-- Communication Protocol (TCP/IP):-- TCP/IP without a network card-- TCP/IP with a network card-- Switching between the two configurations-- Serial Communication with the NE-- Screen settings

!S Because you can connect the Craft Terminal on either the F socket on the IDU, or throughan Ethernet network, you must configure the Craft Terminal correctly, depending on theconnection you chose.

Refer to ”1320 CT Basic Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook”, section ”Installation”, chapter ”Craft TerminalConfiguration” (document reference 3AL79551AAAA).

4.3.3 -- NE Login

In order to carry out procedures described in following paragraphs Craft Terminal configuration, NE Profilemanagement and NE software downloading preparation, the NE must be logged--in, as described below:

Craft Terminal (CT) start--up:-- power on CT and wait for PC start--up

-- Start⇒ 1320CT--P v.x.x.x ; notes:

S if choice 1320CT--P v.x.x.x is not available, PC is not configured as Craft Terminal: SoftwarePackage loading is necessary

S x.x.x depends on Software Package loadedAfter a while, the “Network Element Synthesis” screen will appear, showing all Network Elementsthat can be selected. After this Start operation, all NEs appear with symbol “?” (it means they arenot supervised)


Figure 68 - Craft Terminal Global View Screen

Start supervision on a selected Network Element (NE):

From screen “Network Element Synthesis” (see ”CT start” above):

-- select the interested Network Element (NE) clicking once left mouse button on it;

-- whileNEselected, with rightmousebutton chooseStartSupervisionandwith leftmousebuttonexecuteit (click once).

Wait until the symbol “?” becomes colored “•” (it means “NE in supervised state”)

Figure 69 - Start NE Supervision

Network Element login

From screen “Network Element Synthesis” with NE in supervised state ( see ”Start supervision on a selectedNetwork Element (NE)”, second step, above):

-- select the interested Network Element (NE) clicking once right mouse button on it;

-- select Show Equipment.


Figure 70 - NE login

The Login Screen then appears.

Figure 71 - Login Screen

Give your user name and password and click ”Apply” (For more details on user profiles and passwords, see”Profiles Management”, para. 4.8.6 on page 187.).


4.3.4 -- NE software downloading preparation

This description is taken from the 1320CT Basic Operator’s Handbook, section “EML construction”, chapter“Administrating files”, paragraph “Software Administration” and is repeated here for ease of operation.

This phase must be manually carried out by the Operator to make the new equipment software packageavailable for its downloading toward the equipment controller and the peripheral units.

This operation is independent from the NE management state and must be executed with the followingprocedure:

-- From the Supervision pull down menu select the File Administration and then the SoftwareAdministration option:

Figure 72 - Software Administration Selection-- In the figure that opens (see next as an example) select the directory where the NE software package

is installed: Alcatel / JUSMxxx / ect / swdw / <equipment name> / <version> / <descriptor file>.

-- The NE software package can also be selected from the CD--ROM used for the installation of the NEsoftware. In this case, after inserting the CD--ROM in the driver, choose the following: ect / swdw /<equipment name> / <version> / <descriptor file>.

Figure 73 - NE Software Selection-- Click on Open to activate the installation file selected. At the end of the process, a confirmation

message is displayed.

-- At this point the NE Software Package is installed in another directory and available to be downloadedon the Network Element.


4.4 -- Software download toward NEThis chapter details all phases necessary to install the SW in the equipment environment for the first time.

!CAUTION:S Procedures described in the following are carried out with the PC connected to the NE

! This is a general procedure valid for all NE types.

4.4.1 -- Requirements

4.4.1.1 -- NE hardware

The equipment must have been already physically installed, cabled and powered on, according to theinstructions given in the:

4.4.1.2 -- Craft Terminal

The Craft Terminal, already loaded with the SW to be downloaded toward the NE, must be available togetherwith the 9 pin/9 pin cable and F connector adapter cable for its connection to the equipment F interface.

4.4.1.3 -- Operator skills and profile

In addition to skills stated in para.4.1.1, the Operator must be familiar with all the equipment functionalities.

4.4.2 -- Summary of the SW installation phases

The installation phases are:-- SW download to the NE (PC is connected to Equipment Controller), para. 4.4.3 below

-- NE configuration, para. 4.5 below

4.4.3 -- SW download to the NE-- With the suitable cable and F connector adapter cable, connect the PC to F interface of the MAIN unit

-- Activate ECT (1320CT x.x.x) and execute the Login to the NE (see para. 4.3.3 on page 141).

-- Perform the SW download with the following Craft Terminal commands:

S SW Download⇒ Server Access Configuration

S SW Download⇒ Init SW download (selecting the NE--version to be downloaded)

S then, after about 1/4 hours, ⇒ SW Download ⇒ SW status ⇒ Apply Action to activate thesoftware.

The software download can be performed also by using the Ethernet interface of the PC. In this case thedownload lasts only few minutes.


4.5 -- NE Configuration

Once the software is downloaded and activated on the NE, the NE resets in order to use the downloadedsoftware version. This reset breaks the connection with the CT. The operator must, therefore, log in to the NEagain (see para. 4.4.1 on page 123).

NE configuration in the case of first installation is processed through the quick configuration procedure. Thisprocedure is launched from the CT through the menu ”Configuration/Quick Configuration” (see para. 4.16.5 onpage 168). Follow the instructions provided on the corresponding screen. At the end of this procedure, the NEresets and should be up and running if properly configured.


4.6 -- General Introduction to views and menusThis chapter describes the organization of the 946LUX50 NE., presented after the NE login.First the view organization is introduced, then the accessible menu options are listed.Additional advice is given for Navigation principles.

4.6.1 -- 946LUX50 view organization

The 946LUX50 view below contains the following fields, which provide the operator with the information neededto manage the NE:

-- Alarm synthesis by severity,-- Alarm synthesis by domain,-- Management status control panel,-- View title,-- View area,-- Message/state area.

TheMenubar and theViewarea in theNE viewallow you to performall configuration and supervisionoperationsand display the selected item.

Menubar

Viewarea

Alarm synthesisby severity

Alarm synthesisby domain

Maintoolbar

Managementstate control panel

Figure 74 - LUX50 Main View Organization

For the meaning of the icons in the Alarm synthesis by severity, Alarm synthesis by domain, and theManagement state control panel refer to Section 3 in this handbook.


4.6.1.1 -- View Area

TheViewAreamanages all domains fromwhich the user can start. It is organized into a tabbedpanel, e.g.manywindows placed one upon another. Each window is selectable (placing it on top of the others) with a tab shownon the top.

Each panel represents a set of functions. The area consist of the following sets:-- Equipment

-- External Points

-- Line Interface

-- Performance

-- Radio

-- Protection Schemes (1 + 1 configurations only)

-- Loopback

The following figure shows the tabbed panel organization.

Each tab panel is labeled with the set name ( e.g. Equipment, Line Interface, etc ).

Figure 75 - View Areas

RESOURCETREE AREA

RESOURCELIST AREA

RESOURCE DETAIL AREA

Each tab--panel (e.g. functionalities area) consists of four areas:-- Resource--Tree Area: displays all the available resources of the Radio NE.

-- Resource--List Area: may be represented by: Tabular View (e.g., Line InterfaceDomain) or GraphicalView (e.g., Equipment Domain).


Tabular View: displays a tabular representation of the selected resource. As default, no tabularelement is shown.

Graphical View: displays a graphical representation of the selected resource. As default, notabular element is shown.

-- Resource--Detail Area: displays detailed information of a selected item in the Resource List area. Asadefault, no entry view is displayed as a consequenceof thedefault behavior of theResource List area.

4.6.1.2 -- Resource Tree Area

The “Resource Area” displays all the available resources in a tree structure like the protocol stack hierarchy.The below figure shows an example of the resource tree instance (for the Line Interface functions):

Figure 76 - Resource Tree Area

4.6.1.3 -- Selection Criteria

Each tree node consists of two symbols. The first symbol indicates the state of the structure e.g., if the symbolis ”+” the tree can be expanded to a lower level. The tree structure can be collapsed if the symbol is “--“. Finally,if there is no symbol, the node represents a leaf. The second symbol is the graphical representation of theresource.

The user must select the resource by clicking with the mouse to carry out an action that depends on the typeof click.

Each resource listed above may be selected by using the mouse with a:-- Single left click;

-- or Double left click

Single left click:Left click one on the resource to highlight it. This selection activates the resource list area, e.g.,every time the user selects a resource in the resource tree area, the corresponding Tabular orGraphical representation is displayed in the ”Resource list area” .

Double left click:Using this typeof selection on the itemsof the resource tree, theuser canexpand the tree structureand activate the “Resource list area” displaying the same information described above. When thetreenode is expandedadouble clickwill collapsethe treenodeshowing the same information in the“Resource list area”.

4.6.1.4 -- Resource Detail Area

This area displays the detailed information of the selected object in the Resource list area. It also provides thetypes of operations available


4.6.1.5 -- Button Policy

The possible buttons for selection are the following:-- Apply this button activates the changes, but does not close the window.

-- Cancel this button closes the window without modifying the parameters displayed in thewindow.

-- OK this button activates the changes and closes the window

-- Close this button closes the window

-- Help this button provides help management for the functions of the supporting window.

Critical configuration choices could present a warning message asking for user confirmation before beingactivated.

4.7 -- Introduction to the menu optionsThe menu bar lets you perform configuration and supervision functions on the Network Element.

This paragraph lists all menu options and then provides more details on the respective contained entries.

For each of them the relevant operative function are briefly introduced and it is referred the paragraphs wherethey are detailed or the introduction to the options of each menu inserted in next paragraphs of this chapter.

From Chapter 4.8 on page 154 details and operating information on all views are given.

In the menu bar, a number of permanent menu items are always displayed. Starting from the left, the menusare:

-- Permanent Menus

S Views: (first column)

To navigate among the views and to set the TMN parameters. See para. 4.7.1 on page 151.

S Configuration: (second column)

To set the general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters (performancemonitoring, OverHead parameters). See para. 4.7.1.1 on page 152.

S Diagnosis: (third column)

To get information on the NE (alarms, performance monitoring, remote inventory). Seepara. 4.7.1.2 on page 153.

S Supervision: (fourth column)

To set the supervision states (i.e. Craft Terminal enabling). See para. 4.7.1.3 on page 153.

S SW Download: (fifth column)

To manage the NE software (download, activation). See para. 4.7.1.4 on page 153.

S Help: (last column)

To activate the online help.

The menu bar also comprises other menus, presented only when a specific option is selected.-- Other Menus

S Equipment

This menu is present only when the Equipment menu (selected in the View menu or in theEquipment tab panel) is active. It lets you go back to the supporting equipment of the displayedobject.


4.7.1 -- Views menu introduction

The menu on the left side of the screen, lets you navigate among the views and to set some parameters, bymeans of the following entries:

-- Previous:

Goes back to the previous screen of the application.

-- Open Object:

Not active.

-- Open in New Window:

Not active.

-- Duplicate View in New Window:

Not active.

-- Equipment:

Opens theEquipment view. Then the “Equipment”menu is available on themenubar. SeeChapter4.9 on page 192.

-- External Points:

Displays and sets the input/output environmental alarm. See Chapter 4.12 on page 216.

-- Line Interface:

Opens the Line Interface view to configure all the tributary ports. See Chapter 4.10 on page 201.

-- Performance:

Lets you manage the Performance monitoring. See Chapter 4.17 on page 247.

-- Radio:

Lets you manage all the functions relevant to the radio channels. See Chapter 4.11 on page 205.

-- Protection Scheme:

Lets you manage the Protection schemes in 1+1 configuration. See Chapter 4.14 on page 221.

-- Loopback:

Lets you manage the loopbacks available with the equipment. See Chapter 4.15 on page 232.

It is possible to access directly the menus for Equipment, External Points, Line Interface, Performance, Radio,Protection Scheme, Loopback by clicking on the relevant tab panel above the view area.


Figure 77 - Tab panel

Tab panel

4.7.1.1 -- Configuration menu introduction

This menu lets you set the general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters, by meansof the following entries:

-- NE Time:

Displays and sets the NE local time. See para. 4.8.1 on page 154.

-- Network configuration:

See para. 4.8.2 on page 155.

-- Alarm Severities:

Manages the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile. See para. 4.8.3 on page 163.

-- System setting:

Allows system configuration, sets all the parameters for the NE setup. See para. 4.8.4 on page168.

-- Quick configuration:

Allows a full system configuration through a guided procedure. See para. 4.8.5 on page 172.

-- Profiles management:

Manages the Security Profiles. See para. 4.8.6 on page 187.


4.7.1.2 -- Diagnosis menu introduction

This menu lets you get information on the NE, by means of the following entries:

-- Log Browsing:

Manages the events stored in the NE. (See para. 4.16.2 on page 240.) Opens the following menuoptions:

Alarm log

Event log

-- Current configuration View:

Displays the current configuration of the NE. See para. 4.16.3 on page 241.

-- Summary Block Diagram View:

Displays a global logical view (strictly related to the physical implementation) highlighting asynthesis of all the alarms and status conditions present in the system (ODU+IDU). See para.4.16.5 on page 242.

-- Abnormal condition list:

Displays the manually operations active in the NE.

4.7.1.3 -- Supervision menu introduction

This menu lets you set the supervision states of the NE, by means of the following entries (see chapter 4.13on page 218) :

-- Access State:

Manages the supervision access to the NE, via CT or OS. (See para. 4.13.1 on page 218.) Opensthe following menu options:

OS

Requested

-- Restart NE:

Reset of the NE software. See para. 4.13.2 on page 219.

-- Feature Key Limitations:

Displays the limitations provided by the software feature key plugged into the main IDU. See para.4.13.3 on page 220.

4.7.1.4 -- Download menu introduction

This menu lets you manage the NE software by means of the following entries (see chapter 4.18 on page 255):-- Server Access Configuration:

Manages the configuration of the FTP server to be used for the software download to the NE. Seepara. 4.18.1 on page 255.

-- Initi SW download:

Manages the software download to the NE. See para. 4.18.2 on page 255.

-- SW status:

Shows and manages the status of the software packages installed in the NEmemory banks. Seepara. 4.18.3 on page 257.


4.8 -- CONFIGURATION4.8.1 -- NE Time

The NE local time can be displayed and/or reset to the OS time setting.

From the Configuration pull down menu, select the NE Time option.

The following dialog box opens, from which you can set the local NE time.

Figure 78 - NE Time Dialog Box

The NE Time dialog box displays the current NE time and the current OS time.

To reset the NE time to the OS time, click on the Set NE Time With OS Time check box and click the Applypushbutton to validate.

With a click on theDaylight Saving Time (DST) check box themanual management of the summer time takesplace.

The Refresh pushbutton lets you read the time actually present in the NE.


4.8.2 -- Network Configuration

To access the Network Configuration option, select the Configuration pull down menu, as shown in thefollowing figure:

Figure 79 - Network Configuration Menu

The Network Configuration lets you perform the following operations:-- Local Configuration:

Defines the NE IP address

-- IP Configuration:

IP static routing configuration: defines the Host/Network destination address for IP static routing

OSPF Area configuration: defines the Open Shortest Path First configuration

IP Address configuration of Point--To--Point Interfaces: defines the configuration of the interfaceswhich use the PPP protocol

-- Routing information:

Displays the contents of the NE’s routing table.

The options are described in next paragraphs.


4.8.2.1 -- Local Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu.

Select the Network Configuration option and then, from the cascading menu, the Local Configurationoption.

The dialog box opens (figure below) which lets you to configure the local IP address of the NE.

This local IP address is the IP address associated witth the F interface and with the other interfaces which usethe PPP protocol (the 3 NMS channels).

The Apply button is used to confirm the data contained in the dialog box and closes it.

The Close button closes the dialog.

The Help button provides some useful information on the dialog.

Figure 80 - Local Configuration Dialog Box

4.8.2.2 -- IP Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select Network Configuration and then select the IPConfiguration option from the cascading menu ( see following figure).

Figure 81 - IP Configuration Screen


4.8.2.3 -- IP static routing configuration

The dialog--box opens and lets you set the parameters for IP Static Routing Configuration.

The following fields and data are present:S IP Address: lets you define the IP address necessary to reach a specific Host

S IP Mask: lets you define the IP Mask to reach a network

S Default Gateway IP Address: lets you define the address of the next hop gateway

S Interface type: lets you use point to point interfaces made available by the NE.

The New button is used to insert a new static route.

The Delete button is used to delete the selected static route.

The Close button closes the dialog.

Figure 82 - IP Static Routing Configuration Screen

By pressing the Create button the following screen opens.

In the Host or Network Address Choice field select:-- Host to address to a single IP address;


-- Network to address to a range of IP addresses.

In the Default Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice select:-- Default Gateway IP Address for the Ethernet interface;

-- Point to Point Interface Index for the NMS channels (NMS--RF, NMS1--V11, NMS2--V11)

Figure 83 - Create Static Routing

If the Default Gateway IP Address radio button has been selected in the above screen, set the DefaultGateway IP Address in the corresponding field below.


If the Point To Point Interface Index radio button has been selected, the following dialog box opens.

Figure 84 - Create Static Routing: Point To Point Interface Choice

In this screen, one of the 3 NMS channels (NMS--RF, NMS1--V11, NMS2--V11) can be selected.


4.8.2.4 -- OSPF Area configuration

Thedialog--box opens (figure below) and lets you configure theparameters forOSPF (OpenShortest PathFirst)Area Table Configuration.

The following fields and data are present:

OSPF Area IP Address

OSPF Area Range Mask (Network Mask)

OSPF Area Stub Flag (used to restrict the NE’s routing table to routes belonging to its own area)

The fields give summary information that includes all the addresses (specific to a NE and to a Network) in anArea.

The Apply button is used to accept a configuration change on the NE and close the view; the view is visibleuntil the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.

The Close button closes the dialog without changing the data.

Figure 85 - OSPF Area configuration screen

In the screen, enter the IP address, the IP mask and select the flag (True/False).


4.8.2.5 -- IP Address Configuration of Point--To--Point Interfaces

The following dialog box opens and lets you Enable or Disable the three NMS channels, which use the PPPprotocol.

The Apply button is used to accept a configuration change in the dialog box and then closes it; the dialog isvisible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.

The Close button closes the dialog without changing the data.

Figure 86 - IP Address configuration of Point-To-Point Interfaces screen

The ”Mode” parameter lets you configure the NMS V11 working mode (see page AUCUN LIEN ).-- DTE

-- DCE

-- Codirectional


This parameter cannot be configured in the case of NMS RF and, therefore, is always set to ”Not Used” in thiscase.

Figure 87 - Available NMS Interfaces

SupervisionRadio

MSU1

Routing

NMS1

NMS2

NMS1 NMS2

With946LUX50software

4.8.2.6 -- Routing information

Select theConfiguration pull downmenu. SelectNetwork Configuration and then theRouting informationoption from the cascading menu,.

The following dialog box opens:

Figure 88 - Routing information screen

This screen is a read--only screen and displays the IP routes currently defined in the NE’s routing table.

The Refresh button lets you refresh some of the information shown in the screen. (”IP Routing” field is notrefreshed.)

The possible values for the ”IP Routing Local Point--to--Point Interface” field are:-- 1: NMS--RF interface-- 2: NMS1--V11 interface-- 3: NMS2--V11 interface-- 4: F interface-- 6: Loopback interface

The Close button closes the dialog without changing the window.


4.8.3 -- Alarm Severities

By selecting theAlarm Severities option from theConfigurationmenu theAlarmSeverities Profiles screenappears.

In this screen in the Profile Name field are listed the 4 default Alarm Severity Profiles:-- Profile “No Alarms”. With this profile all alarms are disabled.

-- Profile “PrimaryAlarms”. This profile enables the emissionof theprimary alarms.General rules usedto define the alarms severity:

MAJOR: the alarm affects the service (it is service affecting);

MINOR or WARNING (according to the impact of the alarm): the alarm doesn’t affects the service(with the exception of High BER alarm, for which MINOR alarm severity is defined, even if it isservice affecting).

-- Profile “No Remote Alarms”. This profile enables the emission of the primary alarms plus EarlyWarning and Low BER alarms. This profile uses the following rules to define the alarms severity:

MAJOR: the alarm affects the service (it is service affecting);

MINOR: the alarm is potentially service affecting but a protection has recovered the service;

WARNING: the alarm cannot affect the service (independent from any protection).

-- Profile “All Alarms”. This profile enables the emission of all the alarms (including AIS and RDI). Thisprofile uses the same severity as the “Primary alarm” profile, the only difference is that Early Warning,Low BER, AIS and RDI alarms are emitted.

The rules used to define the alarm severity are the same as for the “Primary alarm” profile.

In case of alarms affecting a protection, different severities are used for SA andNSA. The same severity is usedboth for SA and NSA in case of service independent alarms.

The rules used to define the profile alarms severity described above, are not applied to the housekeepingalarms. In this case, in order to enhance the flexibility, a different severity is assigned to eachalarm profile (WAR,MIN and MAJ).


Figure 89 - Alarm Severities Profile

Two buttons are available in the Alarm Severities Profile screen:-- Close: to close the screen.

-- Clone: to create a new Alarm Severity Profile. To create a clone refer to para. 4.8.3.1 on page 165.

Only 3 new profiles can be created.

An Alarm Profile is the complete set of the equipment alarms with their severity in case of Service Affectingsituation and No Service Affecting situation.

Each alarm has its Service Affecting and No Service Affecting attribute, which can differ according to the AlarmSeverity Profile.

To some objects in the equipment (overhead alarm, input housekeepingalarm, tributaries etc.) can beassignedan Alarm Profile.

To do this association:-- select the tab panel (Equipment, Line Interface, etc.) in which the object to be associated to a specific

Alarm Severity Profile is present;

-- select the object;

-- select the Configuration menu in the relevant Resource Detail Area;

-- select in the Alarm Profile field the Alarm Profile to be associated.


4.8.3.1 -- How to create a new Alarm Severity Profile

-- Select the Alarm Profile to be cloned from the Alarm Severities Profile screen.

-- Click the Clone pushbutton.

-- The following Clone Alarm Severity Profile screen appears.

Figure 90 - Name of a cloned alarm profile

-- Enter the name to be assigned to the new Alarm Profile and click on Apply.

-- Select again the Alarm Severity option from the Configuration menu.

-- Select the newly created Alarm Profile (Link 1 in the following screen).


Figure 91 - Clone of an Alarm Severity Profile

-- 4 buttons are available in this screen :

Close: to close the screen without any change

Rename: to change the name of the Alarm Severity Profile

Modify: to modify the Alarm Severity Profile

Delete: to delete the Alarm Severity Profile.

-- Click on the Modify button.

-- To modify the severity of an alarm, click theService Affecting field of the appropriate alarm and selecta new severity (following screen).


Figure 92 - Selection of a new severity in the Service Affecting field


-- To modify the severity of an alarm, click on the No Service Affecting field, then click on the suitablealarm, and select a new severity as shown in the followiing screen:

Figure 93 - Selection of a new severity in the No Service Affecting field

-- To save the changes in the Alarm Severity Profile click on Apply. (By clicking on Cancel you quit theAlarm Severity Profile screen without any change).

4.8.4 -- System Settings

This menu allows system configuration and lets you set all the parameters for the NE setup.

The main window provides 3 tabbed--panels, one for each type of function to be managed:-- NE configuration

-- Link Identifier

-- Overhead (Not available with the IDU Light.)


4.8.4.1 -- NE Configuration

The user can view the NE configuration by selecting the “NE Parameters” tabbed panel.

The window displayed below will appear.

Figure 94 - System Settings: NE configuration

The “Type” field shows the current NE configuration.

The “Structure” area displays the market, capacity, modulation and, when possible, the ability to change it.

The ”Market” field shows the market type, which in the case of 946LUX50 is ETSI.

The ”Capacity” field shows the data capacity on the NE.

The information related to the modulation type is shown in the “Modulation” field. The possible values are”4QAM” and ”16QAM”.

The capacity and the modulation can be modified by selecting a different type according to the Capacity andModulation table below and then selecting the ”Apply” button to send the new value.

Capacity and Modulation

Capacity Modulation

2xE1 4QAM

4xE1 4QAM

8xE1 4QAM / 16QAM

16xE1 4QAM / 16QAM

1xE3 + 1E1 4QAM / 16QAM


4.8.4.2 -- Link Indentifier

The ”Link Identifier” area, in the System Settings dialog, displays the current values of the parameters relatedto link management.

The operator choices are sent to theNE by clicking on the related “Apply” button. The parameters involved are:-- Expected Value: this field is the link identifier value expected by the NE (allowed values: 0 to 31).

-- Sent Value: this field is the link identifier value transmitted by the NE (allowed values: 0 to 31).

Figure 95 - System Settings: Link Identifier

The operator choice will be applied by selecting the related “Apply” button.


4.8.4.3 -- Overhead

The ”Overhead” tabbed panel (screen below) identifies the parameters for the management of the phonenumber.

Figure 96 - Overhead Configuration

The field ”Phone Number” in the ”Order Wire Configuration” area allows the operator to read and write thestation number associated to the Engineering Order Wire to be used in the selective call. Possible values are:011--999 (with no more than one zero digit in the number).

The phone number can be enabled or disabled by selecting the corresponding buttons.

The parameter will be sent to NE by clicking on the related “Apply” button.


4.8.5 -- Quick Configuration Procedure

This procedure allows a full system configuration through a guided process, based on a reduced set of screens.The related windows will be displayed by a “Wizard Tool” according to a specific order.

To start this application, select the “QuickConfiguration” option from the “Configuration” menu. Thiswindowthat opens is the first step of the procedure.

The procedure consists of different steps according to the configuration:-- 1+0 configurations:

6 steps for the simplified configuration

11 steps for the advanced configuration (the advanced configuration can be activated in step 5)

-- 1+1 configurations:

7 steps for the simplified configuration

12 steps for the advanced configuration (the advanced configuration can be activated in step 6)

The table below lists all the Quick Config steps involved depending on the NE configuration and the use of theAdvanced Configuration option:

Step 1 + 0 1 + 0Adv. Config 1 + 1 1 + 1

Adv. Config

NE configuration 1 1 1 1

Tributariesconfiguration 2 2 2 2

Frameconfiguration 3 3 3 3

Restoration criteria -- -- 4 4

Channelsconfiguration 4 4 5 5

Local IP addressconfiguration 5 5 6 6

OSPF areaconfiguration -- 6 -- 7

IP static routesconfiguration -- 7 -- 8

NMS--RF interfaceconfiguration -- 8 -- 9

NMS1--V11configuration -- 9 -- 10

NMS2--V11configuration -- 10 -- 11

Summary 6 11 7 12

Note on the use of the buttons available in the screens:-- ”Back”: by clicking on this button the procedure goes back to the previous step

-- ”Next”: by clicking on this button the procedure goes on the next step

-- ”Finish”: this button is active only in the last step. By clicking on this button the operator confirms theconfiguration and the new parameters are sent to the equipment.

-- ”Cancel”: by clicking on this button the operator quits the procedure without any change in theconfiguration.

-- ”Help”: by clicking on this button the operator calls the help--on line.


Step 1

The following screens correspond to the most complete procedure for a 1+1 configuration with the AdvancedConfiguration option which includes all the Quick Configuration steps.

Figure 97 - Quick Configuration Procedure: NE Configuration (Step 1)

The first step provides a screen allowing configuration of NE parameters:”Type” configuration.

The possible values are:1 + 0: unprotected configuration with a classic IDU1 + 0 L: unprotected configuration with a light IDU1 + 0 EXT: unprotected configuration with service channel extension1 + 1 HSB: hot standby protected configuration1 + 1 HSB--SD: hot standby protected configuration with space diversity1 + 1 FD: frequency diversity protected configuration1 + 1 HSB--MP: 1 + 1 HSB with multiplexer/demultiplexer protection1 + 1 HSB--SD--MP: 1 + 1 HSB--SD with multiplexer/demultiplexer protection1 + 1 FD--MP: 1 + 1 FD with multiplexer/demultiplexer protection

”Market”:ETSI (read only)

”IDU configuration”:

Depending on the selected configuration type above, the main unit type an be set with one ofthe following values:


IDU Light 4x2 Mbps (1 + 0L configuration only)

IDU Main 4x2 Mbps

IDU Main 8x2 Mbps

IDU Main 16x2 Mbps

IDU Main 34 Mbps

TheExtensionunit is automatically updateddependingon the selected configurationTypeandMain Unit Type.

If an Extension unit is present, Extension ServiceChannels 3 and 4 can be configuredwith thefollowing values. These valuesmust comply with physically connected ESC3 and ESC4 daughterboards inside the extension unit:

ESC 64 kbps G703

ESC 4--wire Audio and E--Q

ESC 64 kbps V11

ESC 64 kbps V28

ESC 9600 or 2x4800 bps V11

ESC 9600 or 2x4800 bps V28

”ODU configuration” contains the following fields:

”Model”: ODU Model connected to the equipment. Relevant values for 9400 UX are:

ODU UX 13 GHz 4QAM with RTPC

ODU UX 13 GHz 4QAM, no RTPC

ODU UX 13 GHz 16QAM

ODU UX 15 GHz Standard Power

ODU UX 15 GHz High Power

ODU UX 15 GHz 4QAM with RTPC

ODU UX 18 GHz Standard Power

ODU UX 18 GHz High Power

ODU UX 23 GHz 4QAM

ODU UX 23 GHz 16QAM

ODU UX 25 GHz 4QAM

ODU UX 25 GHz 16QAM

ODU UX 38 GHz 4QAM

ODU UX 38 GHz 16QAM

ODU UX Flat

”Duplexer”: Depending on the selected ODU Type, the list of duplexers available with thistypeofODU is displayed. For example, whenODUUX 38GHz 4QAM is selected, the duplexer listis the following:


Dupl. 1260 MHz LO Inf. (for 1 or 2 Tx Band)

Dupl. 1260 MHz LO Sup. (for 1P or 2P Tx Band)

Other Duplexer

For additional information on LO Inf. and LO Sup. see section 2.9 beginning on page 59.

The special choice ”Other Duplexer” allows you to configure Rx Frequency independently ofthe Tx Frequency. In all other cases, only Tx Frequency can be confiigured, Rx Frequency beingdeduced from Tx Frequency and duplexer shift.

RF Loopback Support: with someODUmodels RF loopback unit is optional. In this case, thisfield allows you to indicate if RF loopback is preset or not. In case of ODUs for which RF loopbackunit is not, this field is automatically set to the appropriate value.

! WARNING: In the case of a 1 + 1 configuration, only one kind of ODU can be configured forboth channels.


Step 2

The screen shown below provides the fields to set the Structure of the Frame configuration (Capacity andModulation).

The capacity implies the choice of modulation; for example, if the tributary structure is 2E1 only 4QAMmodulation scheme is supported.

The association between Capacity and Modulation is shown on page 169.

Figure 98 - Quick Configuration Procedure: Frame Configuration (Step 2)

In the screen displayed above (and in the following Steps), the “Back” button is enabled also. It allows theoperator to turn back and change the parameters configured in the previous screen.

To go to the next step click on button “Next”.

To go back to the previous step click on button “Back”.


Step 3

Step 3 allows the operator to choose, for each tributary configured, the signal mode status. Possible valuesare ”Unframed” and ”Disabled”.

Figure 99 - Quick Configuration Procedure: Tributaries Configuration (Step 3)

By clicking on one of the facility buttons (“All Unframed” or “All Disabled”), the operator can configure all thetributaries at once; otherwise he can configure each tributary separately by selecting the related value from therelevant scroll list.




Step 4 (1 + 1 Configurations Only)

Figure 100 - Quick Configuration Procedure: Restoration Criteria (Step 4)

Step 4 shows the operator the restoration criteria (revertive or not revertive) for the 3 possible protectionsavailable in the 1+1 configurations:

-- Radio protection

-- Mux/Demux protection

-- HSB Tx protection

The restoration criteria values depend upon the selected configuration type in step1 (1 +1HSB, 1 +1FD--MP,etc.). These values cannot be modified by the operator.

For radio protection restoration criteria values, see § 4.14.2.




Step 5

Step 5 allows the operator to define the basic parameters for each configured channel. The related screen isshown below:

Figure 101 - Quick Configuration Procedure: Channels Configuration (Step 5)

The Channel Configuration screen allows you to configure the Tx power and Frequencies of the ODU(s).

Depending on the choices made in Step 1 (configuration type, duplexer type), some values could be read only.

-- If the configuration type is 1 + 0, only one channel needs to be configured. In 1 + 1 configurations bothchannels (1 and 0) need to be configured.

-- If the configuration type is 1 + 1 HSB, Tx frequency for channel 0 is automatically set according to Txfrequency for channel 1, while Tx Power can be set independently on both channels.

-- If the configuration type is 1 + 1 FD, Tx Frequency has to be configured on both channels, while TxPower on channel 0 is synchronized with Tx Power on channel 1.

-- If the configured duplexer type is ”Other Duplexer”, the Rx frequency value can be configuredindependently of theTxFrequency. In all other cases, theRxFrequency value is deducedautomaticallyfrom the Tx Frequency and duplexer shift.

-- If the configured IDUMainUnit is not ”IDULight 4x2Mbps”, and if the configuredODU is ”ODUUXFlat”,the ATPC mode can be enabled or disabled (otherwise ATPC is forced to disabled, due to the fact thatit is not supported).




Step 6

Step 6 performs the network configuration. This window allows the operator to configure the NE IP address.

Figure 102 - Quick Configuration Procedure: Local IP Address (Step 6)

For an advanced network configuration the operator must select the “Advanced Configuration” flag.

If the flag has beenselected, the screens in thenext steps allow theoperator to performacompleteconfigurationof all the Network parameters.




Step 7 (Advanced Configuration Only)

Step 7 allows you to configure the OSPF Area.

Figure 103 - Quick Configuration Procedure: OSPF Area Configuration (Step 7)

If the OSPF area must be a stub area, make the selection in the Stub Area check box.

LUX50 supports one single OSPF area. This area cannot be a backbone area (e.g., area 0.0.0.0 is notauthorized).

Enter the OSPF area number in the IP address field.

Enter the OSPF range mask in the Range Mask field.

IMPORTANT: All NEs belonging to the same OSPF area must have the exact same range mask value.





The following windows for Network Configuration allow complete IP configuration.

Step 8 lets you configure static routes.

Figure 104 - Quick Configuration Procedure: IP Static Routes Configuration (Step 8)

LUX50 NEs can have up to 10 static IP routes defined.

Each static route can be either a route to a host or a route to a gateway.S If ”Host Address” is selected, the following parameters have to be configured:

Host IP address

IP Mask (if ”Network address” is slected).

S If ”Gateway Address” is selected, the following parameters have to be configured:

Default gateway IP address

S If ”PPP Id” is selected, the PPP interface used for this route has to bedefined among theNE’s threePPP interfaces (NMS RF, NMS V11#1, NMS V11#2).





Step 9 allows the configuration of the NMS--RF channel:

Figure 105 - Quick Configuration Procedure: NMS-RF Interface Configuration (Step 9)

The “NMS--RF” interface is a communication interface based on the use of an inframe RF proprietary 64 kbit/schannel. Through the “NMS--RF” interface the NE can exchangemanagement messages with a remote OS (orCraft Terminal) station.

The NMS--RF channel can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the NMS RF field.

In the Routing IP Protocol field, indicate whether or not OSPF is used.





Step 10 allows the configuration of the NMS1-V11 interface:

Figure 106 - Quick Configuration Procedure: NMS1-V11 Interface Configuration (Step 10)

Through the “NMS1--V11” interface the NE can exchange management messages with an OS (or CraftTerminal) in the same station.

The NMS1--V11 channel can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the NMS1 V11 field.

In the Routing IP Protocol field indicate whether or not OSPF is used.

In the PPP_MODE field the following selections can be made:DTE Mode:

Interface with equipment configured in DCE mode

DCE Mode:

Interface with equipment configured in DTE mode

Codirectional Mode:

Interface with equipment configured in codirectional mode





Step 11 allows the configuration of the NMS2-V11 interface.

Figure 107 - Quick Configuration Procedure: NMS2-V11 Interface Configuration (Step 11)

Using the “NMS2--V11” interface, the NE can exchangemanagement messages with an OS (or Craft Terminal)in the same station.

The NMS2--V11 channel can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the NMS2 V11 field.

In the Routing IP Protocol field, indicate whether or not OSPF is used.

In the PPP_MODE field the following selections can be made:DTE Mode:

Interface with equipment configured in DCE mode

DCE Mode:

Interface with equipment configured in DTE mode

Codirectional Mode:

Interface with equipment configured in codirectional mode




Step 12

Step 12 is the last step. The screen shown below summarizes all the parameters configured during thisprocedure and some relevant parameters with default values.

Figure 108 - Quick Configuration Procedure: Summary (Step 12)

All the parameters can still be changed by clicking on the “Back” button. The operator can navigate back tothe desired screen and set the new values.

At the end, the operator confirms the selections by pressing the “Finish” button. All the parameters will bestored and sent to the NE.

NOTE: This operation can take a few minutes.

NOTE: In most cases, the NE will reset at the end of the process so that the new configuration parameters canbe taken into account.


4.8.6 -- Profiles ManagementTo access the Profiles Management option, select the Configuration pull down menu, as shown in thefollowing figure:

Figure 109 - Profiles Management Menu

The Profiles Management lets you perform the following operations:S Users Management :

Displays the list of the created usersEnables the creation, the password modification and the deletion of users

S Change Password :

Enables the password modification of the current user

The options are described in the next paragraphs.

4.8.6.1 -- Users Management

Select the Configuration pull down menu.

Select the Profiles Management option and then, from the cascading menu, theUsers Management option.

This option is only available for users associated to an administrator profile.

The dialog box opens (figure below). It displays the list of the created users and lets you to create new users,change users passwords and delete users. Each user is associated to a pre--defined security profile. There canbe more than one user using each profile. The ”initial” user is created by default and it cannot be deleted.

Figure 110 - Profiles Management Screen


The predefined security profiles are:-- Administrator

S can do everything on the NE.

S can manage security features (add/remove users or change own password and all userspasswords).

-- Operator

S is in charge of the operation at network level, not at radio site.

S cannot add or remove users.

S can change only own user password.

S cannot manage network configuration, only for NTP Configuration, due to dangerous isolation ofNE.

S cannot do quick configuration, restart NE. Also the provisioning of equipment is not supported andthe operations that require the operator presence on the radio site.

-- CraftPerson

S is in charge of the installation and the maintenance at radio site.

S can do everything on NE system, but cannot add or remove users.

S can change only own user password.

-- Viewer

S can only explore the NE: he cannot change the NE configuration.

S cannot add or remove users.

S can change own user password.

All user--predefined profiles can be connected to NE by an F interface (local serial interface) or by a remoteinterface.

Five buttons are available in the Profiles Management Screen:-- Create: to create a new user. Refer to para. 4.8.6.1.1 on page 188.

-- Change PW: to change a user password. Refer to para. 4.8.6.1.2 on page 189.

-- Delete: to delete an existing user. Refer to para. 4.8.6.1.3 on page 190.

-- Cancel: to close the screen.

-- Help: this button provides help management for these functions.


4.8.6.1.1 -- How to create a new user

-- Click the Create pushbutton from the Profiles Management Screen.

-- The following Create User screen appears.

Figure 111 - Create User Screen-- Enter the current administrator user password.

-- Enter the name to be assigned to the new user.

-- Select the profile to be associated to the new user from the cascading menu (following screen).

Figure 112 - Selection of a profile for user creation-- Enter twice the password of the new user.

-- Click on the Apply button.


4.8.6.1.2 -- How to change a user password

-- Select the user to be changed from the Profiles Management Screen.

-- Click the Change PW pushbutton.

-- The following Change Password screen appears.

Figure 113 - Change Password Screen-- Enter the current administrator user password.

-- Enter twice the new password of the user.


4.8.6.1.3 -- How to delete a user

-- Select the user to be deleted from the Profiles Management Screen.

-- Click the Delete pushbutton.

-- From the confirmation dialog box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the ”user deletion” operation.

-- The following Delete User screen then appears.

Figure 114 - Delete User Screen-- Enter the current administrator user password.


Note that the ”initial” user is a default user that cannot be deleted.


4.8.6.2 -- Change own password

This option is available for all users. It allows to change only a user’s own password, whereas the passwordchange described in para. 4.8.6.1.2 ”How to change a user password” page 190 allows an administrator userto change the password of all the created users.

-- Select the Configuration pull down menu.

-- Select the Profiles Management option and then, from the cascading menu, the Change Passwordoption.

-- The following Changing Password screen appears.

Figure 115 - Changing Password Screen-- Enter the previous user password.

-- Enter twice the new password of the user.



4.9 -- EQUIPMENTThis chapter describes the types of functions offered to the user for Equipment Management.

The equipment domain deals with themanagement of theNE as awhole and its physical components (subrack,boards,...)

The main screen of the Equipment tab panel is shown below for a 1+0 Radio configuration:

Figure 116 - 1+0 Radio Equipment view

IDU

ODU

IDU Status

ODU Status

Equipment Status


The main screen of the Equipment tab panel is shown below for the 1+1 HSB--MP.

Figure 117 - 1+1 HSB-MP view

IDU

ODU

IDU Status

Equipment Status

ODU Status

The Resource List Area shows a graphical representation of the Equipment, which consists of an IDU and oneor two ODUs.

A colored ball gives information on the status of the associated object. The color differs according to the severityof the alarms currently active on ths object:

-- Green: no alarm

-- White: indetermination alarm active (not operative)

-- Cyanic: warning alarm active

-- Yellow: minor alarm active

-- Brown: major alarm active

-- Red: critical alarm active


4.9.1 -- IDU level

To enter the IDU level click on the IDU object in the Resource Tree Area or double click on the IDU image inthe Resource Detail Area.

1+0 configuration

The following screen will appear.

Figure 118 - 1+0 IDU view

IDU Status

MAIN IDU BOARD Status

MAIN IDU BOARD

IDU


The IDU consists of 1 board, the IDU Main board.

1+1 configuration

The following screen will appear.

Figure 119 - 1+1 IDU view

IDU

EXTENSION IDUBOARD Status

IDU Status

MAIN IDU BOARD

EXTENSION IDU BOARD

MAIN IDU BOARDStatus

The IDU consists of 2 boards:-- Main board

-- Extension board


4.9.1.1 -- Board level

Toenter a board click on theobject in theResourceTreeArea or double click on theboard image in theResourceDetail Area.

For example, following screen shows the MAIN IDU board:

Figure 120 - Main IDU board view

BOARD Status


4.9.1.2 -- ODU level

To enter the ODU level click on the ODU object in the Resource Tree Area or double click on the ODU imagein the Resource Detail Area.

The following screen will appear in case of a UX ODU.

Figure 121 - UX ODU view


The following screen will appear in case of UX--Flat ODU:

Figure 122 - UX-Flat ODU view


4.9.1.3 -- Alarms

The Alarms tab panel provides the fault mangement, which checks the current state of alarms related to theselected object: (See Appendix 7, page 357.)

Figure 123 - Alarm tab panel for a selected object

The alarm tab panel has one row for each possible alarm, but only rows related to the active alarms arehighlighted. When the alarm disappears it is automatically cleared in the screen.

By putting a tick in the Include alarms from sub--nodes box the alarms currently active in the sub--nodes ofthe object will also appear.

For every alarm the following information is given:-- Severity: the severity associated to the alarm and assigned in the Alarm Profile

-- Event Time: the time of the generation of the alarm

-- Entity: the entity involved in the alarm

-- Probable Cause: the probable cause of the alarm

-- Managed Object Class: the class of the alarm.


4.9.1.4 -- Configuration

The “User Label”’ field displays the label associated to the selected node in the tree.

The fieldAlarmProfile allows to associate to the object alarms a particular AlarmProfile: a default alarm profileor an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 4.8.3.1 on page 165). To associate adifferent Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the selection among the available Alarm Profile.

The default associated Alarm Profile is the Primary Alarm profile.

Figure 124 - Configuration tab panel for a selected object

4.9.1.5 -- Remote Inventory

The information about the unit can be read in the Remote Inventory (when available) panel in the ResourceDetail Area as the following window shows:

Figure 125 - Remote Inventory tab panel for a selected object


4.10 -- LINE INTERFACE

This chapter describes the type of functions available for Line Interface Management.

4.10.1 -- Tributaries

The Line Interface domain deals with the management of the aggregate frame and tributary ports (line side).

The Line Interface view allows the user to manage the resources of a PDH signal, i.e., frames, tributary ports(line), etc.

-- This domain view consists of the following areas:

Resource Tree Area: displays the frames and tributary ports sorted by the channel number.

Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in the tree area.

Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the selected object’s properties in thelist area. This area allows you to execute the available commands for the selected resource.

Figure 126 - Line Interface View

The Resource List Area provides information about the tributaries.-- Interface Type (E1,E3 etc.)

-- Port Number: the port for a given channel and type of port

-- Channel Number: the channel identifier

-- Rate/Modulation: the bit rate of the tributary

-- Signal Mode: the type of frame (Unframed/Disabled)

To change the Signal Mode, select the tributary and change the Signal Mode field in the Resource Detail Area.


4.10.1.1 -- Alarm

The fault management checks the current state of alarms related to the selected tributary.

It is provided by the alarm panel like the one explained in para. 4.9.1.5.


The window shown below gives you access to all available functions for a tributary port.

The managed tributary types are E1 and E3.

To define the involved ports, the channel must be selected in the tree view. Consequently, the selection of thedesired tributary port in the tabular view allows the “Resource Detail List” to show the available functions for theindividual resource.

Figure 127 - Tributary Configuration Panel

The information related to a PDH frame is shown above, where the fields are read only:-- Interface Type (E1,E3 etc.)

-- Port Number: the port for a given channel and type of port

-- Channel Number: the channel identifier

The fields which can be changed are:-- Signal Mode

-- Alarm Profile

Signal Mode

The possible values are:-- Unframed

-- Disabled

The current state can be modified by selecting a different signal mode value and then clicking on the “Apply”button to send the new value to the NE.

Alarm Profile

The Alarm Profile field lets you associate a particular Alarm Profile with the tributary alarms: a default alarmprofile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the operator (refer to para. 4.8.3.1). To associate a differentAlarm Profile, click on the selection button and select from among the available profiles.

The default associated Alarm Profile is the No Alarm profile.


4.10.1.3 -- Test

The “Test” tab allows you to perform certain tests on the selected tributary by inserting a pseudo random binarysequence (PRBS) into this tributary at the transmission side andbymeasuring the Bit Error Rate on its receptionside.

Figure 128 - Tributary Test Panel

PRBS insertion and corresponding BER measure can be started/stopped using the “Start”/“Stop” button.

The inserted PRBS sequence is (215 -- 1) inverted.

When PRBS insertion is activated, an abnormal condition is raised on the tributary in order to remind theoperator that the NE is currently not working in normal condition. This abnormal condition disappears when thePRBS insertion is stopped.

Themeasures reported on BERmeasure are the “Current” BERmeasure value on the selected tributary, alongwith “Min” and “Max” BER measure values received since the beginning of the measurement.

NOTE 1: PRBS can only be inserted on one tributary at a time. Therefore, make sure that PRBS is not currentlyinserted on another tributary (this can be done easily by checking abnormal condition list) before trying to insertit on a new tributary.

NOTE 2: Using the “Start”/”Stop” button for PRBS insertion and BER measure starts or stops both together,however, these two features can be used independently of each other.


4.10.2 -- NMS Interfaces

Line Interface view also allows management of alarms related to the 3 NMS interfaces:

Figure 129 - NMS Interface Alarms

Using the “Alarms” tab, the operator can check if an alarm is present on the selected NMS interface. Theoperator can also change the alarm profile for each of the NMS interfaces through the “Configuration” tab


4.11 -- RADIOThe Radio domain view allows the user to manage the resources of the radio transmission channel.

A Radio NE consists of one or two radio channels with a set of functional blocks (tributary ports, radio ports etc).

This domain view consists of the following areas:

-- Resource Tree Area: displays the radio ports sorted by channel number.

-- Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in tree area.

-- Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the object’ s properties selected in the listarea. This area allows you to execute the available commands for the selected resource.

Figure 130 - Radio Domain View

Six tab panels are present in the Resource Detail Area:

-- Alarms: shows the active alarms (refer to para. 4.11.1 on page 206)

-- Configuration: configures some radio parameters (refer to para. 4.11.2 on page 206)

-- Frequency: sets the Tx/Rx RF frequency (refer to para. 4.11.3 on page 207)

-- RTPC & ATPC: sets the Tx Power (refer to para. 4.11.4 on page 208)

-- Power Meas: performs the Tx and Rx power measurements (refer to para. 4.11.5 on page 210).

-- BER Meas: refers to BER measurement (refer to para. 4.11.6 on page 215)


4.11.1 -- Alarm

The fault management allows you to check the current state of the alarms related to the selected object.

It is provided by the alarm panel like that shown in para. 4.9.1.3 on page 199.

4.11.2 -- Configuration

The Radio Frequency window gives you access to all the available functions for a Radio PDH port.

To define the involved port, first select the port/channel in the tabular view: this selection enables the “ResourceDetail list” to show the available functions for the single resource.

4.11.2.1 -- Tx Local Mute

The information related to the transmitter status is shown in the “Status” field. To change the transmitter statuschoose the desired value (ON for Tx Squelched andOFF for Tx not Squelched) and press the related “Apply”button.

When Tx Local Mute is activated, an abnormal condition is raised on the channel in order to remind the operatorthat the NE is currently not working in normal condition. This abnormal condition disappears when the Tx LocalMute is stopped.

4.11.2.2 -- Alarm Profile

The fieldAlarmProfile allows to associate a particular AlarmProfile to the object alarms: a default alarm profileor an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 4.8.3.1 on page 165). To associate adifferent Alarm Profile click on the selection button and select among the available Alarm Profile.

The default associated Alarm Profile is the Primary Alarm profile.


4.11.3 -- Frequency

This menu lets you read and, if necessary, set the frequency parameters.

The information shown concerns the port/channel selected in the Resource Tabular View.

Figure 131 - Radio Frequency menu

4.11.3.1 -- Tx Radio Frequency

The “Tx Freq” field in the “Frequency Value” area of the tabbed window shows the current value of thetransmission radio frequency (expressed in kHz). To change this parameter write the new value in the field andpress the “Apply” button.

The new value must be within the allowed radio frequency range. The allowed range is shown in “Min/MaxValue” fields. See section 2.9 on page 59 for available frequencies.

4.11.3.2 -- Rx Radio Frequency

The “Rx Freq” field in the “Frequency Value” area of the tabbed window shows the current value of the receiveradio frequency (expressed in kHz).

In most cases it is automatically changed as a consequence of the definition of the Tx frequency according tothe Frequency Shifter.

If the configured duplexer is “Other Duplexer”, Rx frequency can be configured independently from the Txfrequency.


4.11.4 -- RTPC & ATPC

The RTPC & ATPC menu lets you read and, if necessary, set the Tx power parameters.

The shown information is related to the channel selected in the Resource Tabular View.

!

To work properly, the ATPC must be put in operation in the local and remote stations.When ATPC is disabled, the active part of the screen is the RTPC area. Refer to paragraph4.11.4.2.When ATPC is enabled (if IDU and ODU alow it), the active part of the screen is the ATPCarea. Refer to paragraph 4.11.4.1.In ATPC mode, when the modulation is changed from 4QAM to 16QAM, the ATPC mode isautomatically de--activated. It is necessary to reactivate the ATPC mode in ”operationalconfiguration” after the change of modulation.

4.11.4.1 -- ATPC

Figure 132 - ATPC configuration

The purpose of ATPC functionality is to control the power transmitted by the local station in order to maintainthe received power level of the remote station in a given range.

Depending on the configured IDU andODU (ATPC is supportedwith IDUmain classic type 2 and ODUUX--Flatonly), ATPC can be Enabled orDisabled for 34 Mbit/s IDU, this feature is only available for IDUproducedafter January 2004 (see label underneath the IDU). The feature is not available with the light IDU.

When ATPC is enabled, the “ATPC Max Value” parameter in “ATPC Range” area, and the “Low Power”parameter in “ATPC Rx Threshold” area need to be configured in order for ATPC regulation loop to workproperly.


-- “ATPC Max Value” parameter allows to define the maximum Tx power level at which the NE isauthorized to transmit. The ATPCmin value is read--only is defined by theODU performance (ATPCrange, cf. §2.8). Practically, theminimumTxpower can also be limited by the link characteristic(free space attenuation too important).

-- “ATPC Rx Threshold” parameter defines the Rx power level below which the ATPC regulation loopwill start increasing the transmission power level in order to compensate for the low Rx power level.On the other hand, the ATPC regulation loop will start decreasing the transmission power level whenthe measured Rx power level goes above (“ATPC Rx Threshold”).

Note: The “ATPC Rx Threshold” must be choosen considering the link budget. For example, if thethreshold is too high, the remote transmitter will permanently remain at maximum power. As a rule ofthumb, it is recommended to choose a value within -55 dBm and 10 dB above the 10-6 BER threshold.

4.11.4.2 -- RTPC

Figure 133 - RTPC configuration

The “Nominal Power” field in the “RTPC” area is a read--only field and shows the nominal value of thetransmitted power (expressed in dBm).

The “Tx Power” field in the “RTPC” area shows the current value of Tx power (expressed in dBm), when theODU supports RTPC and ATPC is disabled, it is possible to modify this value by entering the new value andby pressing the related “Apply” button.

The new value must be within the allowed transmitted power range. This range is shown in the “Power Value”label of “RTPC” area.


4.11.5 -- Power Measurement

The Power Measurements capability is available by selecting the “Power Meas” tab shown circled in theresource detail view below:

Figure 134 - Power Measurements

The Measurement screen allows the operator to set initial parameters for the required measurement.

“Measurement interval” fields allow the operator to set the time--duration of the measurement. The defaultis Days: 7, Hours: 0, Minutes: 0. A 7--day measurement interval is also the maximum allowed interval.

“Sample time” field is the period between two consecutive measurement samples. The choice is among 2, 4,6, 30, 60 sec.

The last section of the dialog refers to an optional Log file.


By selecting Create File the log file is created and a default path and name for this file is displayed to theoperator. The file is stored in the ALCATEL/CT--Kv3.0.3 directory.

The log file contains the sample value and records the measurement up to a maximum dimension ( 7 days fora 2 second sample time).

By clicking on the “Start“ button the screen “ Power Measurement Graphic “ appears.

The Power Measurement Graphic is available only if the CT is connected to the NE.

The screen shows the Tx and Rx measurements related to the local NE:

Figure 135 - Power Measurement Graphic

Using this screen the operator can see, in real time, the power transmitted by the local transmitter (Tx) and thepower received by the local receiver (Rx).

If ATPC mode is enabled, the Tx Power displayed in Power Measurement Graphic does not reflect the actualTx Power value but the ATPC Max value.

If ATPC mode is disabled, the Tx Power displayed in Power Measurement Graphic is the RTPC powertransmitted by the local transmitter.

The top graphic screen area shows the TX curve, while the bottom area shows the Rx curve.

The top of the screen offers all the characteristics present in the current measurement:-- Radio channel: gives the symbolic name associated to the radio channel being analyzed;

-- Sample time: indicates the frequency used to send the measurement requests to NE;

-- Start time: is the first request time;

-- Stop time: is the interval time selected in the previous parameters window, added to the start time;

-- Time: is the current response time;

-- Log File: is the complete pathname of the file where the received values are stored.


By clicking on “Show details” box, on the left side of the Power Measurement Graphic, a new table appears:

Figure 136 - Power Measurement Details

This table shows the following relevant values of the received and transmitted power:-- Tx Local End

S Max TX local value and date when this value was received for the first time.

S Current TX local value and its current date.

S Min. TX local value and its current date when this value was received for the first time.

-- Rx Local End

S Max Rx local value and date when this value was received for the first time.

S Current Rx local value and its current date.

S Min. Rx local value and its current date when this value was received for the first time.

PTx and PRx levels software reading tolerance is:-- PTx = Real Value ± 3dB

-- PRx = Real Value ± 5dB


4.11.5.1 -- How to read a Power Measurement file

Click on Read File field and press on the Select File button. The directory of the CT automatically opens tonavigate and get the power measurement file.

As default, the measurement files are stored in the ALCATEL/CT--Kv3.0.3 directory and have the extension“.txt”.

Figure 137 - Name of File ( Log File ) selected screen

Select the desired file and click the Open button to open the file.

Figure 138 - Example of “Power Measurement File Reading“


The button in the lower part of the window lets the graph display changes within the measurement interval.

Select the .txt file and click with the right mouse button to open the .txt file with a text editor (e.g. WordPad) andsee the power information in tabular mode:

Figure 139 - Example of Power Measurement File Reading (with WordPad)


4.11.6 -- BER Measures

The “BER Meas” tab lets you perform Bit Error Rate measures on each radio channel.

Figure 140 - BER Measures

The BER Measures screen allows the operator to set initial parameters for the required measure.

“Sample Time” field defines the period between two consecutive measure samples.

Clicking on “Start” button triggers the measurements.

Displayed values are the “Current” BER measure value, along with “Min” and “Max” BER measure values,corresponding to minimum and maximum BER values encountered since the beginning of the measure.

Measures will go on until the operator clicks the “Stop” button.


4.12 -- EXTERNAL POINTSThis chapter describes the types of functions offered to the user for External Points Management.

There are two types of external points: input and output external points.

When you click on the tree root, the tree will be expanded according to the equipment configuration.

A single left click selection of a tree element causes the activation of the corresponding Tabular representationdisplayed in the “Resource list area”. A click on a row in the Resoure list area opens the Configuration menuin the Resource Detail Area.

4.12.1 -- Input External Points

An input external point is described by the following parameters:-- Id: identification number

-- User Label: associates a user--friendly name to an external point

-- External State: describes the state (on/off)

-- Alarm Profile: describes the associated Alarm Profile

The lower part provides the possible parameters, which can be modified; after a row selection, the user canmodify the User Label and can associate a different Alarm Profile by clicking on the Selection button.

The operator choices will be sent to NE after selecting the “Apply” button.

Figure 141 - Input External Points View


4.12.2 -- Output External Point

An output external point is described by the following parameters:-- Id: identification number

-- User Label: associate a user--friendly name to an external point

-- External State: describes the state (on/off)

The lower part provides the possible parameters which can be modified; after a row selection, the user canmodify the User Label and External State of the external point selected (On=active; Off=not active).

The operator choices will be sent to NE by clicking on the “Apply” button.

Figure 142 - Output External Point View


4.13 -- SUPERVISION4.13.1 -- Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access)

The NE can be managed by the OS or by the Craft Terminal. To control the access conflicts of the OS and theCT, a Local Access Control (LAC) is available.

If the LAC is “access denied”, it means that the OS manages the NE and the CT is not allowed to modify theNE configuration (it can only “read”). In the view, the icon with a key symbol has a circular shape.

If the LAC is “granted”, it means that theCT is allowed tomanage theNE. In the view, the icon with a key symbolhas a rectangular shape.

If the LAC is “requested”, it means that theCT has requesteda permission from theOS and is waiting for a reply.

However, the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services. These services include:-- Alarm reception and processing,

-- Performance processing,

-- Switching back to the OS access state.

The access state of an NE can be modified from two types of views:

4.13.1.1 -- Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state

Select the Supervision pull downmenu. Then select theRequested option from theAccess State cascadingmenu as shown in the following figure:

Figure 143 - Craft access state configuration from the Equipment NE view in OS mode

The request is sent up to the OS which accepts or refuses it.

If the OS doesn’t answer in a predefined time, it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access state and can bemanaged by a Craft Terminal.


4.13.1.2 -- Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state

Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then from the Access State cascading menu, select the OS option.

From the confirmation dialog box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the “OS access” operation.

The NE is now managed by the OS.

The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view indicates whether the NE is managed by a craftterminal or by the OS.

Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the NE. When thecommunication with the NE is lost, the OS automatically recovers the communication and forces the stateexisting before the loss of communication (therefore, Craft Terminal access can be denied or granted).

4.13.2 -- Restart NE

The RESTART operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions.

From the Supervision cascading menu, select the Restart NE option.

Figure 144 - Restart NE call

The following dialog box opens.

Figure 145 - Restart NE confirmation

Click the Yes button to confirm the restart NE operation

Click the No button to abort the restart NE operation.


4.13.3 -- Software Feature key

From the Supervision cascading menu, select the Feature key option.

In this screen the information read from the feature key plugged into the main IDU are shown.

Figure 146 - Feature Key Screen

Note: Running an equipment without the feature key plugged in is not permitted, and trying to do so, theoperator may sometimes get inappropriate messages when trying to change the NE configuration.


4.14 -- PROTECTION SCHEMES

This domain is present with 1+1 configurations only.

This domain view consists of the following areas:-- Resource Tree Area: displays the radio ports sorted by channel number.

-- Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in tree area.

-- Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the properties done in list area. This areaallows you to perform the available functions for the selected resource.

By clicking on the tree root shown below, the tree will be expanded according to the supported protectionschemes.

Figure 147 - Protection Schemes

A single left click selection of an element tree causes the activation of the corresponding graphicalrepresentation displayed in the “Resource list area”.

Three 1+1 protection schemes are available, depending on the NE configuration:-- Mux/Demux protection: EPS protection in Tx side

-- Radio protection: EPS protection in Rx side

-- HSB protection: Hot Stand--by protection

To see the current position of the switches enter themenuDiagnosis --> SummaryBlockDiagramView (referto para. 4.16.5 on page 242).

-- The Mux/Demux protection corresponds to the Switch Tx

-- The Radio protection corresponds to the Switch Rx


-- The HSB protection is implemented in the ODU: one Transmitter is connected to the antenna (active),the other transmitter is in standby.

-- The Criteria column provides information related to the event that triggered the last switch from thecorresponding channel. This is not analarm. For instance, after startup this criteriamay beset, in somecases, to ”Equipment Failure” even if no such event actually happened.

4.14.1 -- Mux/Demux Protection Management

This protection is available for the 1 + 1 HSB--MP, 1 + 1 HSB--SD--MP, and 1 + 1 FD--MP configurations.

The Equipment Protection Management is performed by selecting MuxDemux Protection tree element.

The following windows permit a complete view of all NE resources involved in the EPS protection:-- Schema Parameters

-- Channels Parameters

Figure 148 - Mux/Demux Protection

4.14.1.1 -- Schema Parameters

The window “Schema Parameters” displays information about the protection.

The Schema parameters are:

-- Protection Type: this parameter is defined at configuration time and it is read only. The supported typeis: 1+1, e.g. a working channel (Main) is protected by a protecting channel (Spare).

-- Operation type: never revertive (automatic restoration inhibited).

The operator choice for “Operation Type” will be applied by clicking on “Apply” button.


4.14.1.2 -- Commands

To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element in the Tree view or on the Main #1 element.

Figure 149 - Mux/Demux Protection Switch (Spare #0)


Figure 150 - Mux/Demux Protection Switch (Main #1)

You can modify the state of the switch with the Lockout, Forced and Manual commands.

Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces Channel 1 into service independently of thepossible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC (Abnormal Condition).

Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces in serviceChannel 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC.

Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the commandsgenerated by the logic.

Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an automatic switch.It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If this command is active, it willbe removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling AC.

Command priority list

Command Priority

Lockout 1

Forced 2

Automatic switch 3

Manual 4

To release a previously activated command select None and click on Apply.


4.14.2 -- Radio Protection Management

This protection is available with all 1 + 1 configurations.

The Radio Protection Management is performed selecting Radio Protection element tree.

The following windows permit a complete view of all NE resources involved in a RPS protection:-- Schema Parameters

-- Switching Threshold Parameters

Figure 151 - Radio Protection View

4.14.2.1 -- Schema Parameter

The window “Schema Parameters” displays information about the protection.

The Schema Parameters are:-- “Protection Type” field: shows the protection schema architecture: 1+1;

-- “Operation Type” field: always indicates notRevertivewhile actually automatic radio protection alwaystries to give priority to the channel with the best reception quality.


4.14.2.2 -- Switching Thresholds

Protection switching thresholds are the alarm activation thresholds associated with radio protection switchingrequests in a 1+1 configuration.

Figure 152 - Radio Protection Switching Thresholds

Two kinds of thresholds can trigger the early switching request: received power level or error ratio.

-- Early Warning alarm. Early Switching Request (ESR):

S Early warning on Rx Power Level: Defines the absolute received power level at which the EarlyWarning alarm is triggered.

S Early warning on BER: Defines the BER threshold at which the Early Warning alarm is triggered.

-- Low Bit Error Ratio. Switching Request (SR):

S Defines the BER threshold at which the low Bit Error Ratio switching request alarm is triggered.

-- High Bit Error Ratio. Priority Switching Request (PSR):

S Selects the BER threshold at which the high Bit Error Ratio switching request alarm is triggered.The selected error rate determines the AIS engagement.



To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element in the Tree view or on the Main #1 element.

Figure 153 - Radio Protection Switch (Spare #0)


Figure 154 - Radio Protection Switch (Main #1)

The operator can modify the state of the switch with the Lockout, Forced and Manual commands.

Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces in service Channel 1 (default channel),independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC.

Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces in serviceChannel 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC.


Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an automatic switch.It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If this command is active, it willbe removedby an incomingalarm. This command does not activate signaling AC. Due to the fact that automaticradio protection always tries to work with the best channel, manual command is useless in this particular case.

Command priority list

Command Priority

Lockout 1

Forced 2

Automatic switch 3

Manual 4


Due to the fact that automatic radio protection always tries to work with the best channel, manual commandis useless in this particular case.


4.14.3 -- HSB Transmission Protection Management

This protection is available with all 1 + 1 HSB configurations.

The Transmission Protection Management is performed selecting Transmission Protection element tree.

The following windows permit a complete view of all Ne resource involved in a EPS protection:-- Schema Parameters

-- Channels Parameters

Figure 155 - Transmission Protection View

4.14.3.1 -- Schema Parameters

The window “Schema Parameters” displays the parameters that can be modified.

The Schema parameters are:-- Protection Type: this parameter is defined at creation time and it is read only. The supported types

are: 1+1, e.g. a working element is protected by one protecting unit.

-- Operation type: Shows the automatic restoration criteria from the protecting to the protected unit.

In the case of 1+1 HSB--SD and 1+1 HSB--SD--MP configurations (space diversity: 2 antennas).Operation type is not revertive (automatic restoration inhibited).

In case of 1+1 HSB and 1+1 HSB--MP (1 antenna and 1 coupler): Operation Type is revertive(automatic restoration allowed).

The operator choice for “Operation Type” will be applied clicking on “Apply” button.



To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element or on the Main #1 element in the Tree view.

Figure 156 - Tx Protection Commands (Spare #0)


Figure 157 - Tx Protection Commands (Main #1)

You can modify the state of the switch using the Lockout, Forced and Manual commands.

Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation connects to the antenna Transmitter 1 (defaulttransmitter), independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC.

Forced has higher priority than theautomatic operation: the activation of this command connects to theantennaTransmitter 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC.


Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an automatic switch.It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If this command is active, it willbe removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling AC.

Command Priority List

Command Priority

Lockout 1

Forced 2

Automatic switch 3

Manual 4



4.15 -- LOOPBACKSThe functions described in this section allow to perform the test operations.

This domain view consists of the following areas:-- Resource TreeArea: displays the object onwhich the loopbacks can be performed, sorted by number.

-- Resource Filter Area: displays the possible filters to apply to loopback search.

-- Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the loopback supported by the resourceselected in tree area.

-- Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the properties done in list area. This areaenables to perform the available functions for involved resource.

4.15.1 -- Available Loopbacks

The loopbacks can be activated on the local NE only.

4.15.1.1 -- 1+0 Loopbacks

Figure 158 - 1+0 available loopbacks

TRIB MODEMMUX/DEMUX

RF

4

MODEMRF TRIB

3

IDU ODU ODU IDU

CT

MUX/DEMUX

2 1


Figure 159 - Channel 1 Loopback View (1+0)

In the Resource List Area are listed all the loopbacks which can be performed.

In this area the following information is given:-- Channel: the number of the channel (channel 1 only)

-- Type Interface: the type of interface in which a loopback can be performed.

-- Location: the station in which the loopback is performed (Near End)

-- Type: the type of the loopback (Internal/External Line/External Line RF)

-- Modality: the type of the loopback (Loop and Continue only)

-- Activation: the activation status of a loopback (Active/Not Active)


Figure 160 gives the relationship of all the possible loopbacks and their positions in the block diagram of theequipment provided by the Summary Block Diagram View option, available in the Diagnosis menu.

Figure 160 - 1+0 Loopback types

ODUCABLE Radio

port(RF loop)

IDUCABLE

E1/E3 Port # xx1

34

2

Clicking on a ”L” square in the Summary block diagram view alllows you to navigate directly to the loopabckconfiguration screen.

Tab. 1. 1+0 Loopbacks

No.Loopbackname

CT selection inthe ResourceTree Area

Ref. toFig.

LocationLoopback

typeNote

1E1/E3Port#xx

Channel 1 160 Near End Internal Loopback in the remotestation at tributary level

2 IDU cable Channel 1 160 Near End Internal Loopback at the IDU outputat aggregate level

3 ODU cable Channel 1 160 Near End Internal Loopback at the ODU inputat aggregate level

4 Radio port Channel 1 160 Near End Internal RF local loopback


4.15.1.2 -- 1+1 Loopbacks

Figure 161 - Channel 1 Loopback View (1+1)

In the Resource List Area are listed all the loopbacks which can be performed.

In this area the following information is given:-- Channel: the number of the channel (channel 1 only)

-- Type Interface: the type of interface in which a loopback can be performed.

-- Location: the station in which the loopback is performed (Near End/Far End)

-- Type: the type of the loopback (Internal/External Line/External Line RF)

-- Modality: the type of the loopback (Loop and Continue only)

-- Activation: the activation status of a loopback (Active/Not Active)

In Figure 162 is given the association of all the possible loopbacks and their positions in the block diagram ofthe equipment provided by the Summary Block Diagram View option, available in the Diagnosis menu.


Figure 162 - 1+1 Loopback types

Radio port(RF loop)

IDUCABLE

E1/E3Port # xx

ODUCABLE

1

3

4

2

Tab. 2. 1+1 Loopbacks

No.Loopbackname

CT selection inthe ResourceTree Area

Ref. toFig.

LocationLoopback

typeNote

1E1/E3Port#xx

Channel 0 or 1 162 Near End Internal Loopback in the remotestation at tributary level

2 IDU cable Channel 0 or 1 162 Near End Internal Loopback at the IDU outputat aggregate level

3 ODU cable Channel 0 or 1 162 Near End Internal Loopback at the ODU inputat aggregate level

4 Radio port Channel 0 or 1 162 Near End Internal RF local loopback


4.15.2 -- How to activate a loopback

To activate a loopback:-- Select the suitable loopback to be activatedby clickingon the relevant object in theResource TreeArea

or by selecting the relevant row in the Resource List Area.

-- The following screen will appear:

Figure 163 - Loopback activation

-- Select Active in the Activation field.

-- Click on Apply.

-- In the row in the Resource List Area the Activation field of the relevant loopback changes from NotActive to Active.

When loopback activation is activated, an abnormal condition is raised on the tributary in order to remind theoperator that the NE is currently not working in normal condition. This abnormal condition disappears when theloopback activation is stopped.


4.15.3 -- How to remove a loopback

To remove a loopback:-- Select the suitable loopback to remove by clicking on the relevant object in the Resource Tree Area

or by selecting the relevant row in the Resource List Area.

-- The following screen will appear:

Figure 164 - Loopback deactivation

-- Select Not Active in the Activation field.

-- Click on Apply.

-- In the row in the Resource List Area the Activation field of the relevant loopback changes from Activeto Not Active.


4.16 -- DIAGNOSIS

In the Diagnosis menu, six options are available as shown here:

Figure 165 - Diagnosis menu

4.16.1 -- Alarms

In the diagnosis pull--downmenu, select theAlarms/NEAlarmsoptions. This opens theAlarmSurveillance (AS)application, allowing managment of the NE alarms.

Figure 166 - NE Alarms Synthesis


Figure 167 - NE Alarms details

These are the alarms stored in the CT since its last connection to the NE.

4.16.2 -- Log Browsing

In the Diagnosis pull--down menu, select the Log Browsing option.

The proposed options:-- Select the Alarm Log option to access the Alarm Log file.

The Alarm Log window opens, permitting to analyze all the alarms stored in the NE.Refer to the “1320 CT Operator’s Handbook” (Alcatel Ref. 3AL79552AAAA).

Figure 168 - Alarm Log Window


-- Select the Event Log option to access the Event Log file.

The Event Log window opens, permitting to analyze all the events stored in the NE.Refer to the “1320 CT Operator’s Handbook” (Alcatel Ref. 3AL79552AAAA).

Figure 169 - Event Log Window

4.16.3 -- Remote Inventory

This screen is a read--only screen, which shows all the information on the equipment.

Figure 170 - Remote Inventory Window


4.16.4 -- Abnormal Condition List

The Abnormal Condition List option in the Diagnosis menu displays all the abnormal conditions (i.e. themanual operations) currently active in the NE.

Figure 171 - Abnormal Condition List Window

The abnormal conditions can be:-- Switch commands Forced or Lockout

-- Loopbacks

-- Tx muting (manual or automatic)

4.16.5 -- Summary Block Diagram View

The “Summary Block Diagram View” of the Diagnosis menu displays a global logical view (strictly relatedto the physical implementation) highlighting a synthesis of all the alarms and statuses present in the system(ODU+IDU).

This window also shows a logical view of the signal flowing through the functional block and switches.

Line (and arrow) trace changes in compliance with the current switch status. By clicking on the objects of thedrawing shown in the figure the operator can navigate to the specific view to perform maintenance operation(for example specific alarm details, equipment details, manual switches, loopback (L), performancemonitoring(P).

The Summary Block Diagram View depends on the configuration.

As an example, the following configurations are shown here:-- 1 + 0 (see Figure 172 page 243)

-- 1 + 1 HSB with mux/demux protection (see Figure 173, page 244)

-- 1 + 1 Frequency Diversity (see Figure 174, page 245)


In detail, it is possible to:-- navigate from Alarm indicator to related “Alarm Synthesis”;

-- navigate from External Point indicator to “External Point” view;

-- navigate from Switch indicator to related “Protection Scheme” view;

-- navigate from Loopback indicator to specific “Loopback” view; for example, by clicking on (L)indicator of main board (Ch#1) the operator can navigate to loopback view for IDU cable;

-- navigate from Performance indicator to specific “Performance” view; for example, by clicking on (P)indicator (line side) the operator can navigate to “Current Data” view;

-- navigate from ODU box to the “radio view” with automatic selection of the related channel.

To refresh the screen press the Refresh button.S Loopback indicator: yellow letter L means active loop.

S Performance indicator: yellow letter P means active performance.

In the 1+1 configuration the current position of the switches is also shown.

Figure 172 - Summary Block Diagram View: 1+0


Figure 173 - Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 HSB with Mux/Demux protection


Figure 174 - Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 Frequency Diversity

By pressing the Refresh button the refresh of the screen takes place (active loopback and performance andposition of the switch).


4.16.6 -- Current Configuration View

This screen is a read--only screen, which shows the current configuration of the NE.

Figure 175 - Current Configuration View


4.17 -- PERFORMANCE MONITORINGThis chapter describes the functions to provide Performance Monitoring (PM) management. It explains theprocedures that the operator must perform in order to activate a PM process.

!

CAUTION:S In order to avoid discrepancies between performance monitoring data timestampand PC current time, first make sure that date and time are in sync between the NEto be monitored and the PC running the craft terminal (refer to section 4.8.1 for NEtime configuration).

!CAUTION:SWith the analog cable interface, the G.826 counters are not correctly evaluated.

4.17.1 -- General information on the performance monitoring processThe performance monitoring (PM) gives indication on the quality of the service.

Quality of service PM is performed in accordance with G.826 and G.784.It is assumed that the quality of the single tributary (E1, E3) can be derived from the quality of the aggregatesignal, therefore no dedicated quality of service PM is foreseen on the single tributaries.

Considering one section (see below), one current register is for 15 min and one for 24 h; 96 history registersare available for 15 min and 8 for 24 h.

The radio section monitored is:-- Radio Hop Section: the section between two radio stations inside the protection section;

Figure 176 - Radio section

MODEMRF

MODEMRF

FECDECODE

PROPR.FRAMING

PROPR.FRAMING

FECENCODE

Radio Hop

The counters supported are the following:-- Errored Seconds

-- Severly Errored Seconds-- Background Block Error

-- Unavailable Seconds

The following table provides, for each frame structure, the main features useful to define a SES.

Tab. 3. SES Thresholds

E3 16E1 8E1 4E1 2E1

Gross bit rate

[MHz]39,498 39,498 19,748 9,874 4,537

G.826 Block size 8 8 4 2 1

Blocks per sec. 4937 4937 4937 4937 4937

SES Threshold

(Note 1)1481 1481 1481 1481 1481

(Note 1) Note that according to ITU--T G.826 a second isdeclared a Severely Errored Second if it is a period of one second withmore than 30 % errored blocks or at least one defect.


The flow chart shown below illustrates the recognition of anomalies, defects, errored blocks, ES and SESaccording to ITU--T G.826 (12/2002).

Figure 177 - Anomalies, defects, errored blocks, ES and SES according to ITU-T G.826

T1313790--98

Monitoredsecond

YesDefects?

No

Anomalies?

No

%EB≥30?

ES(but not a SES)

Path inavailableState?

cES = cES + 1

Path inavailableState?

cBBE = cBBE + EB(s) cSES = cSES + 1

End

cES = cES + 1

SES(and therefore an ES)

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes Yes


4.17.2 -- Performance menu

The performance view allows the user to activate and monitor the PM process on the selected object.

This domain view consists of the following areas:-- Resource Tree Area: displays the threshold for measurement and the object monitoring sorted by

channel number.

-- Resource List Area: displays the PM management for the selected resource in the tree area.

Figure 178 - Performance View

The performance reports can be of 2 different types:-- 15 minutes

-- 24 hours

The following description explains the functions to provide the PM process with a granularity period of 15 min.The same functions are provided for 24h PM process.

The PM are only of HOP type. The current report can be seen (and configured) and the history PM log can beseen.

To see and configure the current report:-- Click on the channel (0 or 1) (in 1+0 configuration channel 1 only)

-- Click on HOP

-- Click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h)


-- Click on CD (Current Data).

To see a history log:-- Click on the channel (0 or 1) (in 1+0 configuration channel 1 only)

-- Click on HOP

-- Click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h)

-- Click on the desired HD (History Data).

Each PM is associatedwith a threshold table. To seewhich threshold table is used click onHOP in theResourceTree Area. The following screen will appear:

Figure 179 - PM Alarm Profile Assignment Screen

To associate an Alarm Profile click on the selection box and select one of the Alarm Profiles available.


4.17.3 -- CD (Current Data)The following window lets you start and read the 15min PM report and 24h PM report:

Figure 180 - Current Data View

4.17.3.1 -- CD parameters

The fields displayed in the upper part of the Current Data View let the operator check and manage theparameters of the current data collection.

-- “Suspect interval” shows whether the current data are suspect or not.-- “Elapsed Time” field (read--only) displays the elapsed time in the current interval of monitoring.

-- “End Period”: displays time of the PM in the graphical description and in the tabular description in theupper part of the screen. By pressing the Refresh button this time changes.

-- “Max Interval supp.”: max. number of intervals (reports) which can be suppressed in the Historybecause they don’t have errors.

-- “Num. Interval supp.”: number of intervals (reports) suppressed in the History because they don’thave errors.

4.17.3.2 -- CD Counters

The fields and buttons displayed in the lower part of the Current Data View screen (Counters Area) allowmanagement of performance events.


In the left part of Counters Area, there is a graphical description of the event counter value: BBE (Erroredblock),ES (Errored second), SES (Severely Errored Second), UAS (Unavailable second).

These values refer to the last refresh performed by pressing the Refresh button.

In the right part of screen, there are button choices to perform actions on the current data collection:-- “Reset” button resets the data collection and related counters.

-- “Start” button starts the counters for the data collection, when the CD has been stopped.

-- “Refresh” button makes a refresh of the counters.

-- “Stop” button stops the counters for the data collection, when the CD has been started.

4.17.4 -- HD (History Data)

The PM process monitors the parameters during a specified interval (i.e. 15min) and stores their values inhistory data. A History Data collection is created automatically at the end of each time interval of Current Dataand deleted when the relative CD is deleted.

4.17.4.1 -- HD Parameters

The table displayed on the following window collects the history data for a related PM report:

Figure 181 - History Data

The table columns hold the value of following parameters:-- End Period: End period of the relevant report

-- Elapsed time: elapsed time in the related interval

-- Suspect interval: this field describes whether the History Data is suspect or not.

-- Counters: the last columns hold the counters value (BBE, ES, SES, UAS).


4.17.5 -- Threshold Data

This section describes how to see or change the threshold values assigned to PM counters.

To view the available threshold for PM process, the operator must select the “Thresholds Tables” node treein the Resource Tree Area of the Performance View.

By clicking on the threshold table on the view area the parameters of the 2 tables will appear:

Figure 182 - Thresholds Tables

By clickingon threshold 1 or 2 in theResourseList Area the Thresholds Table Configuration screenwill appear.

In the upper part of the screen, the “Name” field displays the name assigned to the threshold table.

In the lower part of the screen, the low and high threshold for each counter is shown. To change them, theoperator must enter the new values in the table fields and click on the “Apply” button.


Figure 183 - Threshold table configuration


4.18 -- Software Download4.18.1 -- Server Access Configuration

An FTP server can be used to speed up the software download to the NE .

This menu allows to configure an FTP server on which the previously loaded software will be downloaded.

Copy the ECT directory present in the software CD on the FTP server.

Figure 184 - Server access configuration screen

User Id and Password are the login information to access the FTP server.

In the Address field write the IP address of the FTP server.

In the Port field write the port to be used and in the Root Directory field write the FTP server directory namefrom which the software can be downloaded.

By clicking on the Use System Default button, the server access values will be filled in automatically with thedefault configuration.

The CT is the default FTP server with the following parameters:-- User Id: ftp

-- Password: ftp

-- Address: IP address of the F interface or IP address of the Ethernet interface, if present.

-- Port: 15000

The System Default can be changed by writing different values in the fields and then by clicking on button OK.

4.18.2 -- Init SW Download

Using this menu, software is downloaded to the NE in order to upgrade the NE software version.

To start a download, select the desired software version and click on the Init download button.

This screen displays (it may take some time) the software packages previously stored through the menuSupervision --> Files Administration --> Software Administration available in the NES menu.T

The Forced check box can be used to force download (i.e. the complete description file is downloaded to theNE).

If theForceddownload is not selected, the systemwill compare the software to be downloadedwith the softwarepresent in the NE, and will proceed with the download operation only if the versions are different.


Figure 185 - Init Software Download screen

After selecting the software package to be downloaded and clicking on the Init download button, the followingconfirmation dialog box is displayed:

Figure 186 - Init SW Download confirmation dialog

Clicking Yes starts the actual download operation.

When the SWdownload starts, a screen showing the in progress operation of the download appears. Downloadis aborted when the Abort button is pressed.

Figure 187 - SW Download progress window


4.18.3 -- SW Status

This menu allows to display the information of the software installed in the NE.

The following information is displayed:-- Name: software name

-- Version: software version

-- Operational state: enabled or disabled

-- Current status: committed or standby

By clicking on the Software Units Status button the SW Status screen, giving additional information on thesoftware package.

Figure 188 - SW Status screen


The following information is displayed on the screen:-- EC: software on the Equipment Controller

Figure 189 - SW Unit Status screen

The Flash card, which stores the NE software, contains 2 banks.

The 2 banks can store 2 different software versions. One bank will be committed (active) and the other bankwill be standby.

The second bank will appear when a new software package has been downloaded the first time.

During download, the download file is automatically stored in the standby bank.

To activate the new version, first check the operational status of the standby bank. If the status is enabled (thismeans that download took place without errors) select Activation or Forced Activation in the SoftwareManagement Action field and click on the Apply Action button.

By selecting Forced Activation, the bank to be activated is forced to restart.

By selecting Activation, the bank to be activated restarts only if the content of the two banks differ.


5 -- Commissioning

STOPA very precise knowledge of the link configuration is absolutely vital before youbegin commissioning. For this, complete the sheets for stations AandBaccord-ing to the model supplied in Appendix 2.

5.1 -- Order of commissioning for a linkThe commissioning operations described below are for a link comprising a station A and a station B.

Figure 190 - Relative positions of stations A and B

STATION A STATION B

Network Network

The stages are:-- prepare the PC (see § 4.1),

-- install station A and roughly point the antenna towards station B,

-- commission station A,

-- install station B and roughly point the antenna towards station A,

-- commission station B and point the antenna, connect the tributaries and the service channels,

-- return to station A to:

S fine tune the pointing of the antenna,

S carry out all the commissioning checks (switching to local supervision mode),

S check out the link,

S cancel the local supervision function,

S connect the tributaries and engineering service channels.

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

The following equipment is required for commissioning:-- Multimeter.-- Portable PC running the supervisory software (see § 4.1).-- PC-NE link cable and F interface adapter cable, supplied with the system CD--ROMs.-- A “service kit” (for measuring AGC and the telephone link between the IDU and the ODU).-- A 2 Mbit/s or 34 Mbit/s BERanalyzer, with an impedanceof 75or120 Ω, dependingon theconfiguration

of the link to be installed.-- A compass and a pair of binoculars.-- Tools as defined in § 3.3.3.


5.2 -- Installing and commissioning station A (phase 1)

5.2.1 -- Preliminary operations

Figure 191 - Installing and Commissioning: IDU Controls and connectors

Main IDU (classic IDU)

Extension IDU (classic IDU)

Light IDU

-- Install station A according to the instructions in section 3, and in particular those in § 3.5.3.4 or 3.5.4.4describing how to roughly point the antenna of station A towards station B.

-- Check that the correct power supply voltage is present (24 or 48 V), with the correct polarity, on thepower supply outlet.

-- Make a visual inspection for subrack installation and cabling:

-- the subrack allocation (or wall/table installation) according to the station layout.

-- the IDU rack and subrack ground connections.

-- the ODU ground connections.

-- there are no cables connected to any NMS port. Any that are connectedmust be disconnected.

-- in the case of a non--integrated antenna, the antenna and the ODU must be grounded.

-- the IDU/ODU interconnection cable is disconnected from IDU.

NOTE: Make sure that the IDU--ODU cable connection is removed in order to verify via the CT theSystem Tx Power and Frequency settings before powering up the ODU.

-- In the case of a configuration with classic IDU, check that a software features key enabling theconfiguration is connected to theSKU/MTNconnector (refer to§ 3.2, Commentson the informationmarked on the software key label).


5.2.2 -- Powering up the IDU

NOTE: Since the IDU--ODU cable connection hasNOT been established powering up the IDU, theODUwill not be operating. Therefore, the IDU will display the relative alarms.

-- Power up the IDU(s) (via switch on the connector panel):

S The green LED should come on.

-- Connect the PC to the equipment using the interface cable and F adapter cable supplied (serial port-- connector marked “F” on the IDU ).

-- Wait for the ATT, URG andNURG LEDs to start flashing out of sync on themain IDU. The LED flashingoccurs if IDU and ODU have never been configured together (otherwise, refer to § 4). Download theIDU configuration, by pushing switch to the IDU setting (IDU configuration taken as a reference).After two minutes at most (for the configuration to be registered), the LEDs should stop flashingsimultaneously.

5.2.3 -- Configuring the IDU

-- Run LUX50 1320 CT software on the PC. Once connected to the IDU, the IDU configuration can bedone by running the ”Quick Configuration” procedure (refer to section 4.8.5 on page 172).

5.2.4 -- Checking out operation

Thecheckingout operation entails setting up local and remote loopback configurations as defined in section 2.5.

5.2.4.1 -- Checking operation in a 1+0 configuration

1 Connect the 2 or 34 Mbit/s BER analyzer (according to the configuration) to an active tributary.

2 From the CT, select the ”Loopback” tab, and click on the ”IDU Cable” in the tree on the left. Select”Active” and click on ”Apply” to activate the IDU baseband loop.

3 Check the bit error ratio. If zero, continue checking; otherwise, check the wiring, that the LAU andLIU boards of the unit match (and their impedances) and the configuration of the equipment. If ev-erything is OK, change the IDU.

4 Cancel the IDU baseband loop. Select ”Not Active” and click on ”Apply” button.

5 Set up the ODU cable loop.

6 Check the bit error ratio. If zero, continue checking; otherwise, check the state of the IDU/ODU linkcoaxial cable.

7 Cancel the ODU cable loop.

8 Set up the RF loop (if this option is available in the equipment).

9 Check the bit error ratio. If zero, continue checking via operation 10; otherwise, check the radioconfigurations and correct the configuration errors.

10 Cancel the RF loop.

11 Check that there are no remote controls still active (the ”AC” indicator on the right should be green).

12 From the CT, select the ”Radio” tab. The light in front of the Radio node in the Radio tree shouldappear in green.

13 If an alarm is detected or an incorrect value is found, refer to section 6 and correct as required.

14 Disconnect the BER analyzer.


5.2.4.2 -- Checking out operation in a 1+1 configuration

1 Connect the 2 or 34 Mbit/s BER analyzer (according to the configuration) to an active tributary.

2

From the CT, click on the Protection Schemes” tab. For each protection (depending on theconfiguration, protections can be: ”Radio Protection”, HSB Tx Protection”, ”Mux/Demux“Protection”), select the ”Spare#0” node in the tree, and then select ”Lockout” + ”Apply” in order toforce operations on channel 1.

3 On channel 1, carry out operations 2 to 11 in section 5.2.4.1.

4 On channel 0, carry out operations in 5 to 11 in section 5.2.4.1 for a basic 1+1 HSB configuration,operations 2 to 11 in section 5.2.4.1 for a 1+1 HSB configuration with multiplexer protection.

5 Cancel forcing on channel 0 via the remote controls ”Command: None” + ”Apply” on ”Main#1” foreach protection.

6 Check that there are no remote controls still active (the ”AC” indicator on the right should be green).

7 From the CT, select the ”Radio” tab. The light in front of the Radio node in the Radio tree shouldappear in green.

8 If an alarm is detected or an incorrect value found, refer to section 6 and correct as required.

9 Disconnect the BER analyzer.


5.3 -- Installing and commissioning station B5.3.1 -- Preliminary operations

-- Commission station B by carrying out the same operations as those described for station A in§ 5.2.1 to 5.2.4, apart from the RF loop operations.

5.3.2 -- Pointing the antenna with pole mounting 1+1 (9400UXI101)

Ground connection

Rough “elevation” lockingscrew 6

“Elevation” locking screw

Rough “Azimuthal”locking screw

7

“Azimuthal” lockingscrew (x4)

“Azimuthal” turn-buckle

“Elevation”turnbuckle

Figure 192 - Pole mounting 1+1 adjustments (9400UXI101)

Window of the pole mounting

-- Attach the hook of the service kit (ref. 9400UXT102) in the window of the “Pole mounting”.

-- Connect connector P01 (see Appendix 4) to the “MAINT” port on the front panel of the ODU.

-- Check the tightness of the two “rough” pointing screws and , tighten with a 5 mm Allen key.

-- Connect the voltmeter, set to “DC” range, to P02/P03 of the service kit 9400UXT102 or to P02/P03 ofthe service kit 3EJ04113AAAA113. With the two turnbuckles, fine tune the azimuthal and elevationsettings (Figure 192) to obtain amaximum voltage on the voltmeter (AGCDC voltage of between 0and5 V).

-- Retighten the two azimuthal locking screws using the “box” wrench.

-- Tighten the four front elevation screws using the 5 mm Allen key (tighten in criss--cross fashion).

-- Finish the operation by tightening the azimuthal and elevation turnbuckle lock nuts with the 16 mm flatwrench.

CAUTION: For the tightening torques of the screws, refer to chapter 3.3.4.


5.3.3 -- Pointing the antenna with pole mounting 1+0 (9400UXI102)

Azimuthal turnbuckle

Elevation turnbuckle

Grounding connection

3 screws elevation tightening

4 screws azimuthal tightening

1

2

Figure 193 - Pole mounting 1+0 (9400UXI102)-- Connect connector P01 of the service kit (see Appendix 4) to the “MAINT” port on the front panel of

the ODU.

-- Connect the voltmeter, set to “DC Volts”, to P02/P03 of the service kit 9400UXT102 or to P02/P03 ofthe service kit 3EG04113.

-- Be sure that the three screws and the four screws are a bit slackened, just enough to allowmovement of the different parts of the pole mounting. These screws must not be too much slackened,otherwise, the fine--tuning of alignment will be imperfect. Use the 8 mm Allen key.

-- With the two turnbuckles and the 16mm flat wrench, fine tune the elevation and azimuthal settings untilyou obtain the maximum voltage reading in the voltmeter.

-- Tighten the three screws and the four screws with torque 3 mdaN.

Note: Fine pointing of the antenna is described in § 5.3.2.

5.3.4 -- Checking out operation

-- Using the local loop configurations (apart from theRF loop), repeat theoperations carried out on stationA (see § 5.2).

-- From the CT, run the ”Power Measures” application (”Radio” tab, then the ”Power Meas” tab).

-- Check that the received power level is greater than --90 dBm. This check must be carried out on thenormal channel and, if appropriate, the standby channel.

If the received power is less than this value, the reason is probably an antenna coarse pointing problemor a transmission problem in station A.

-- Connect the tributary, supervision and ESC cables previously disconnected.

-- If an operator is available in another station of the network and there is a telephone in station B, testthe telephone ESC (general call using number 00).

-- Test the ESC 3, ESC 4 and ESC 5 connections, if applicable, and if the corresponding equipment isinstalled in the station.


5.4 -- Commissioning the link from station A (phase 2)

5.4.1 -- Pointing the antenna-- Adjust the orientation of the antenna in the same way as for station B (see § 5.3.2).

5.4.2 -- Checking the radio transmission parameters

-- Connect the CT to station A and check that there is no remaining equipment alarm (”EQP” alarmsynthesis indicator should be green).

-- Check that there is no remaining transmission alarm (”TRS” alarmsynthesis indicator should begreen).If some transmission alarms remain, use the ”Radio” and ”Line Interface” tabs to investigate the causeof the alarms and, if necessary, correct it.

-- Select ”Radio” tab and then ”PowerMeas” tab in order to retrieve the received power level value. Writedown this value. This operation has to be performed on both radio channels (”Channel#1” or”Channel#0” in the ”Radio Channels” tree).

-- Connect the CT to station B and repeat the same operations.

The receivedpower levels shouldmatch thenominal receivedpower indicatedon the station configuration sheetto within±6 dB. If the difference is greater:

S Check that there are no abnormal propagation conditions (storm or heavy rainfall, for example).

S In the case of a 1+1 HSB configuration with integrated coupler, use the “Protection Schemes” tabon each station to check that the standby channel is not being used for reception and/ortransmission.

S Check the pointing of the antennas (if necessary, pointing to a secondary lobe).

If the problem persists, contact the network administrator or “Alcatel customer service”.

If some transmission alarms remain (”TRS” alarm synthesis indicator), proceed as follows for the stations withan alarm condition:

-- Connect the CT to the station.

-- Follow corrective maintenance operations as described in § 6.2.3.

-- In case of configuration errors (tributaries incorrectly set to ”Unframed” or ”Disabled”, for example), usethe ”Line Interface” and ”Radio” tabs to make the necessary changes.

Be careful not to disconnect the link by setting the parameters incorrectly!

5.4.3 -- Remote tributary loop

A remote loop on an active tributary is needed for the checks described in § 5.4.4 and 5.4.5.-- Select the ”Loopback” tab from CT connected to station B.

-- Set up the remote loop configuration as follows:

S Select the ”E1/E3 port#xx” (xx : the number of the tributary on which the loop is set up).

S Select ”Active” in the ”Activation” panel and click ”Apply”.

-- In station A, connect the BER analyzer to the port of tributary x and check that there are no errors.


5.4.4 -- Checking the transmit/receive switching function

These checks need to be carried out only in 1+1 FD and 1+1 HSB configurations.-- Set up the remote loop on an active tributary.-- Select the ”Protection Schemes” tab from the CT for both station A and station B.-- In both stations, initiate a switchover to the standby channel as described below.

5.4.4.1 -- 1+1 configuration

PROTECTION CHANNEL 1+1 FD CONFIGURATIONS 1+1 HSB CONFIGURATIONS

HSB TxProtection

Main#1 Command ”Forced” + ”Apply”

Radio Protection Main#1 Command ”Forced” + ”Apply” Command ”Forced” + ”Apply”

-- Check that the switchover is completed (see the graphic representation for stations A and B using the“Diagnosis/Summary Block Diagram View” menu.

NOTE: Receive mode switchovers must be executed without errors.S In 1+1 FD configurations, there is no transmit switching.S In 1+1 HSB configurations, transmit switching causes transient dropouts on the link and a loss of

received data indicated by a burst of errors.-- In both stations, initiate a switchover to the normal channel as described below:


HSB TxProtection

Spare#0 Command ”Lockout” + ”Apply”

Radio Protection Spare#0 Command ”Lockout” + ”Apply” Command ”Lockout” + ”Apply”

-- Check that the switchover is completed (see the graphic representation for stations A and B using theDiagnosis/Summary Block Diagram View” menu. The above note still applies.

-- Reinstate automatic switching mode by cancelling the remote controls previously activated asdescribed below:


HSB TxProtection

Spare#0 Command ”None” + ”Apply”

Radio Protection Spare#0 Command ”None” + ”Apply” Command ”None” + ”Apply”

5.4.4.2 -- 1+1 configurations with multiplexer protection-- In both stations, force operation to the normal multiplexer/demultiplexer as described below:

PROTECTION CHANNEL 1+1 MP CONFIGURATIONS

MUX/DEMUXP t ti

Spare#0 Command ”Lockout” + ”Apply”

-- Check that the switchover is completed (see the graphic representation for stations A and B using theDiagnosis/Summary Block Diagram View” menu).

-- MUX switchovers cause a microinterruption of the link which results in the appearance of error bursts.-- Check that there are no errors (after traffic has stabilized on the normal MUX).-- In both stations, initiate a switchover to the standby multiplexer as described below:


MUX/DEMUXP t ti

Spare#0 Command ”None” + ”Apply”Protection

Main#1 Command ”Forced” + ”Apply”


-- Check that the switchover is completed (see the graphic representation for stations A and B using theDiagnosis/Summary Block Diagram View” menu).

-- Check that there are no errors.

-- Reinstate the automatic switching mode by sending the remote control:


MUX/DEMUXProtection

Main#1 Command ”None” + ”Apply”

5.4.5 -- Checking quality

-- Select the “Performance tab on the CT(see § 4.17.2). This application keeps a counter (erroredseconds, severely errored seconds, background block errors and unavailable seconds) on the hop(results given for each hop and link).

Duration and results:

Application running time: 2 hours.Tolerance: the readings must be less than or equal to those given in the table below:

AGGREGATE BIT RATE

EVENT 4 Mbit/s 8 Mbit/s 16 Mbit/s 34 Mbit/s

ES 2 3 4 4

SES 0 0 0 0

UAS 0 0 0 0

BBE 0 0 0 0

NOTE:

If fading is observed over a period of less than 15 minutes, the fading period is not taken into account.If fading is observed over a period of longer than 15 minutes, the test will be extended as required.

5.4.6 -- End of commissioning

To terminate the commissioning process:-- Cancel the remote loop as follows:

S Select the ”Loopback” tab from CT connected to station B.

S In the tree, select the ”E1/E3 Port#x” entry corresponding to the tributary which is looped back.

S Select ”Not Active” in the ”Activation panel and click ”Apply”.

S Set different link identity codes for the transmit and receive directions

-- Reconnect the tributary, monitoring and ESC cables previously disconnected.

-- Check that there are no remote controls still active (AC indicator on the CT should be green).


6 -- Operation, servicing and maintenance

6.1 -- Preventive maintenanceThis kind of maintenance is performed when carrying out a corrective maintenance procedure, or on a routinevisit to all the equipment of the station. It involves inspecting the units and their interconnections (connectors,cables, sockets, etc), as well as all the equipment involved in the operation of the station (power supply,batteries, solar panels, earthing, etc) and, in case of doubt, checking the suspect parts, taking all the necessaryprecautions to avoid disrupting data transmission over the link (using the 1+1 switching capability if available,etc). Preventive maintenance is recommended for the following units:

-- MCU board battery:S every 7 to 10 years (see § 7.15.1).

-- Fan unit:S every 2 to 3 years or in case of alarm.

The system uses 2 fans. An alarm occurs when one fan fails. Both fans should be changed at thesame time (see § 7.15.2).

If a main IDU and an extension IDU are used in accordance with chapter 3.4.2.2 recommendations (1Useparation) this preventive maintenance could be forgotten.

6.2 -- Corrective maintenance6.2.1 -- Methodology

-- Check the condition of the cables, connectors and connections, and of all the components that areinvolved in the operation at the station (power supply, battery, earthing, etc),

-- Analyze the IDU alarm indicators,

-- If alarms are indicated, locate them using the Craft Terminal alarm indicators and analyze them andcarry out the necessary corrective procedures (change of unit, module, cable, etc).

6.2.2 -- Analyzing IDU alarm indicatorsThe alarm indicators on the IDUs provide an indication of the network elements that are affected by alarms:Besides the information given below (classic IDU and Light IDU indications), the URG, NURG and ATT LEDscan flash in a particular way to indicate equipment status information, as explained below:

-- URG, NURG and ATT LEDs flashing in sequence: change of configuration or software startup phase(lasts about two minutes),

-- URG, NURG and ATT LEDs flashing simultaneously: the configurations of the IDU and ODU do notmatch. The equipment is waiting for the operator to operate the IDU/ODU-ACO switch.

Meaning of indications on the main IDU (classic):

Red LED ⇒ URG ON : Service Affecting alarm indicatedRed LED ⇒ NURG ON : Non-Service Affecting alarm indicatedYellow LED⇒ BZ ON : Busy (telephone ESC busy)Green LED⇒ IDU ON : No alarm on main IDUGreen LED⇒ ODU ON : No alarm on main outdoor unit

Meaning of indications on the Light IDU:

Red LED ⇒ URG ON : Service Affecting alarm indicatedRed LED ⇒ NURG ON : Non--Service Affecting alarm indicatedYellow LED⇒ MAN ON : Active remote control signal presentGreen LED⇒ IDU ON : No alarm on IDU equipmentGreen LED⇒ ODU ON : No alarm on ODU equipment


Meaning of indications on the extension IDU (if installed):

Yellow LED⇒ MAN ON : Remote control from the supervision functionGreen LED⇒ T-IDU ON : Traffic on extension multiplexer/demultiplexerGreen LED⇒ T-IDU OFF : Traffic on main multiplexer/demultiplexerGreen LED⇒ TX-ODU ON : Transmit traffic on standby ODUGreen LED⇒ TX-ODU OFF : Transmit traffic on main ODUGreen LED⇒ RX-ODU ON : Receive traffic on standby ODUGreen LED⇒ RX-ODU OFF : Receive traffic on main ODUGreen LED⇒ IDU ON : No alarm on extension IDUGreen LED⇒ ODU ON : No alarm on standby ODU

Note: One green LED⇒ IDU / ODU OFF indicates an alarm on the equipment.

6.2.3 -- Corrective Servicing

In a 1+1 configuration with a Mux/Demux protection, it is the spare Mux/Demux that ischosen by default at the start even if an alarm is present on this equipment. Then, youmust force the main Mux/Demux with the remote control, change the spare unit and goback to automatic mode with the remote control.

With the analog cable interface, the G.826 counters are not correctly evaluated.

6.3 -- Changing IDU

The IDU box can be of two different types. Both kinds are defined in paragraph 7.2.2.2.Please refer to this paragraph to identify your box.

6.3.1 -- Replacing like for like a Light or classic IDU (1+0 or basic 1+1)

-- Power down the Light IDU / main IDU. Disconnect it from the power source.

-- Disconnect all the cables connected to the unit you are changing (remember to remove the softwarekey).

-- Change the Light IDU / main IDU after checking that the characteristics match (number of inputs,impedance, etc). The impedances of the IDU can be reconfigured in any case (see § 7.2.2) andconfiguration is not neededwith IDUwhich reference endswith theC letter (3CC......C) provided cablesreferenced by Alcatel are used.

-- Reconnect all the cables to the unit and the software key.

-- Power up the IDU.

-- Wait for the URG, NURG and ATT LEDs to start flashing simultaneously.

-- Configure the IDU from theODUby setting the IDU/ODUswitch to the “ACO/ODU” position.Wait abouttwominutes for the terminal to be reconfigured. Thealarm LEDs should gooff and the equipment LEDsshould turn green.

-- Check that there are no alarms in the LUX50 1320CT software application.

-- Update the station’s installation form (see model in Appendix 2).

In the event of an error, particularly if the pushbutton is set to the wrong side, re-enter all of the stationconfiguration (see section 5, Commissioning).


Note: In the case of a basic 1+1 configuration, power down the extension IDU.

6.3.2 -- Replacing a Light IDU with a classic IDU (1+0 only) and vice versa

The procedure for changing the equipment is the same as for like for like replacement, but, in some cases, theODU configuration may not be taken into account. Connect the 1320CT to the IDU. Run the”Configuration/Quick Config” procedure in order to change the NE configuration from ”1 + 0” to ”1 + 0L” or viceversa.


6.3.3 -- Replacing like for like a main IDU with MUX protection-- Force operation using the protection command ”Forced” on Channel #1 for ”Mux/Demux protection”,

and switchover to the multiplexer/demultiplexer on the extension IDU’s SCU board.

-- Force transmission and reception to the standby ODU.

-- Power down the main IDU. Disconnect from the power source.

-- Disconnect all the cables connected to the unit you are changing (remember to remove the softwarekey from themain IDU). For IDU configuredwith aMUX protectionwithout Access IDU, only disconnectthe part of the cables connected directly to the IDU.

-- Change themain IDUafter checking that the specifications are the same (numberof inputs, impedance,etc).

-- Reconnect all the cables to the unit starting with the lower MAIN/EXT cable (68--pin connector) takingcare not to damage the contacts and also the software key from the removed unit.

-- Power up the main IDU.


-- Send the ODUs configuration to the IDU by pushing immediately on the IDU/ODU switch to the“ACO/ODU” position (the lower green LED must be lighted).

Warning: An error of handling at this moment, will result in a connection break with aloss of traffic.The flashing of the leds is limited to 1 minute. The switch has to be activated as soon as theled starts flashing otherwise the IDU sends its configuration to the ODUs and breaks theconnection.

-- The alarm leds should turn off and the 2 green leds should light on the main IDU (this stage can takearound one minute according to the ODU type).

-- Check that there are no alarms in the LUX50 1320CT software, otherwise cut off forcing on the receiverof the spare ODU.


In the event of an error, particularly if the pushbutton is set to the wrong side, re-enter all of the stationconfiguration (see section 5, Commissioning).

6.3.4 -- Replacing like for like an extension IDU-- Check that the transmit and receive multiplexers are switched to the main channel.

-- Power down the extension IDU and disconnect it from the power source.

-- Disconnect all the cables connected to the unit you are changing.

-- Change the unit after checking that the specifications are all the same (number of inputs, impedance,etc).


-- Reconnect all the cables to the unit.

-- Power up the unit.

-- Check that the alarm LEDs are off.

-- Check that there are no alarms in the LUX50 1320CT software.


6.3.5 -- Note on IDU compatibility

It is possible for the two IDUs to have different but compatible configurations for use in the station. In such cases,you must alter the station’s configuration parameters through the LUX50 CT software.


6.4 -- Changing ODU

Only in the case of a 1+0 configuration.

If you are replacing a ODU UX 23 MHz/1008 MHz with a A9400 UX Flat ODU, make surethat the new ODU is compatible with the operating frequency.

-- Switch--off the IDU connected to the ODU to be changed.

-- Disconnect the IDU--ODU cable.

-- Change the ODU after checking that the characteristics of the two ODUs are the same.

-- Reconnect the IDU--ODU cable.

-- Switch--on the IDU.

-- In the case of a standby ODU, wait two minutes. The reconfiguration takes place automatically.

-- For a main ODU, wait for the URG, NURG and ATT LEDs to start flashing simultaneously. Configurethe ODU from the IDU by pushing the IDU/ODU switch to the “IDU” position. Wait about two minutesfor the terminal to be reconfigured. The alarm LED should go off and the equipment LEDs should turngreen.



In the event of an error, particularly if the pushbutton is set to the wrong side, re-enter all the stationconfigurations (see section 5, Commissioning).

-- If you are replacing an 16 QAMUXODU or an 13 or 15 GHz ODUwith RTPC by a A9400UX flat ODU,you must systematically upgrade the software feature key.


7 -- Changing configurationsChanges to the transmission network may entail upgrading the equipment configurations to satisfy newrequirements. The 9400 UX system is designed to support these changes simply by modifying the softwareconfiguration, or by physically modifying the equipment and its configuration.

Before any change of configuration, disable all remote controls.For any work on the boards (dismantling/reassembly, change of configuration), theoperator must wear a grounded wrist strap (for example, the 3M “Disposable WristStrap”, reference 2209).THESE OPERATIONS MUST BE CARRIED OUT ONLY BYTECHNICIANS, AUTHORIZED BY ALCATEL.Update the reference documents and the labels in accordance with the newconfiguration.

Some of these operationsmay entail opening the IDU to change the hardware configuration (§ 7.6 ). Thesechanges may lead to:

-- changing the IDU (§ 6.3):

S replacing like for like a light or classic IDU (1+0 or basic 1+1) (§ 6.3.1),

S replacing a Light IDU with a classic IDU (1+0 only) or vice versa (§ 6.3.2),

S replacing like for like a main IDU with multiplexer protection (§ 6.7.3),

S replacing like for like an extension IDU (§ 6.3.4),

-- changing the ODU (§ 6.4),

-- changing from a 4QAM to a 16QAM:

S replace the 4QAM ODU with the 16QAM ODU (§ 6.4),

-- changing the channel frequency (§ 7.1) :

S changing frequency within the same sub--band (§ 7.1.1),

S changing frequency within another sub--band or a different band (§ 7.1.2),

-- changing the tributaries (§ 7.2) :

S enabling inactive tributaries (§ 7.2.1),

S changing the impedance of a tributary (classic IDU) § 7.2.2,

S changing the impedance of a tributary (Light IDU) § 7.2.3,

S changing the bit rate by software (§ 7.2.4),

S changing the bit rate by changing the LAU and LIU tributary boards (§ 7.2.5),

-- changing the feature key (§ 7.3),

-- supervision

S changing the physical address of the NE (§ 7.4),

S upgrading the software (§ 7.5),

-- telephone service channel ESC2 (if any) § 7.7

S inserting, deleting or changing the telephone number in a station (§ 7.7.1),

S hardware configuring service channel 2 (§ 7.7.2),


-- service channels ESC 3, 4 and 5 (§ 7.8)

S configuring service channels 3, 4 and 5 in the main IDU without ESC extension (§ 7.8.1),

S configuring service channels 3, 4 and 5 in the ESC extension unit (§ 7.8.2),

S adding an ESC extension IDU (§ 7.8.3)

S configuring the service channel and network ports of a Light IDU (§ 7.9),

-- configuring remote indication loops (§ 7.10),

S main classic IDU (§ 7.10.1),

S light IDU (§ 7.10.2),

-- changing redundancy configuration (§ 7.11)

S upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 without ESC extension or MUX protection (§ 7.11.1),

S upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 without MUX protection (§ 7.11.2),

S upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 with multiplexer protection (§ 7.11.3),

S adding multiplexer protection to a 1+1 configuration (§ 7.11.4),

-- changing transmitted power level (§ 7.12),

-- changing the HSB coupler polarization (§ 7.13).

-- changing SIMM memories board (§ 7.14),

-- replacing the following (§ 7.15),

S MCU board battery (§ 7.15.1),

S IDU fan (§ 7.15.2),

S IDU fuses (§ 7.15.3).

The presence of the symbol at the start of a procedure indicates that it will involve temporarilydisconnecting the link.


7.1 -- Changing frequency7.1.1 -- Changing frequency within the same sub-band

A change of frequency within the same sub-band does not entail moving to each station of the link. The changeof frequency on remote station (B) can be applied from local station (A) using the local supervision function, orfrom the general supervision terminal.

The frequency of the remote station must always be modified before that of the localstation.

-- Update the information sheet needed to install the station (Appendix 2).

-- Open the CT on station B.

-- Select the ”Radio” tab, then the ”Frequency” tab.

-- For each channel, modify the transmit and receive frequencies (if authorized) and click on ”Apply”

-- Check that the duplex separation between the transmit and receive frequencies is correct.

-- Open the CT on station A

-- Select the ”Radio” tab, then the ”Frequency” tab.

-- For each channel, modify the transmit and receive frequencies (if authorized) and click on ”Apply”.

-- Check that the duplex separation between the transmit and receive frequencies is correct.

-- Download the new configuration.

-- Close the application.


7.1.2 -- Changing frequency within another sub-band or a different band

Changing frequency in a different sub-band entails changing the ODU (one or two units according to theconfiguration).

Changing frequency in another frequency band also entails changing the antennas and, if necessary, the HSBcoupler.

This means that, in both cases, changing the frequency entails going to each station. The configuration ischanged locally in each station by software.

The following procedures must be carried out on each station:-- Update the information sheet needed to install the station (Appendix 2).

-- Power down the IDUs.

-- Adjust the outdoor part according to the new configuration (exchanging ODUs and, if necessary,antennas and the HSB coupler), referring to section 3, “Installation”.

-- Repeat the commissioning procedures as described in section 5, in particular:

S If there is a change of frequency band, make sure the correct ODU and duplexer are selected.

S In all cases, adjust the Tx and Rx frequencies according to the new frequency band.

-- In a 1+1 HSB configuration, check that the transmit and receive frequencies of the two channels arethe same.

-- Check that there are no alarms.


7.2 -- Changing tributaries7.2.1 -- Enabling inactive tributaries


-- From the CT, select the ”Line Interface” tab.

-- Activate the required tributaries by changing their signal mode from ”Disabled” to ”Unframed”.

-- Check that there are no alarms on the newly activated tributaries.

7.2.2 -- Changing the tributary impedance (classic IDU)

7.2.2.1 -- Impedances according to the configuration

The tributaries ports are compatible with the G.703 ITU--T standard.

For the n x 2 Mbits tributaries type, the impedance can vary from 75 to 120 Ω and reciprocally only byconfiguration.

These different configurations can be carried out by:-- configuration modification of the L.A.U. boards alone

-- connection of the cable 75 Ω referenced 3CC07885ADAA for the 4 x 2 Mbits with 1.6 / 5.6 connectorsor referenced 3CC07885AEAA for the 8 x 2 Mbits with 1.6 / 5.6 connectors or 3CC07759ADAA for the4 x 2 Mbits with BNC connectors or 3CC07759AEAA for the 8 x 2 Mbits with BNC connectors whereasthe IDU is forced in 120 Ω.

-- configuration of the L.A.U. boards and the IDU port

-- automatic configuration when connecting the cables in 1+0 or in 1+1 provided that the codified Alcatelcables are used or that the cabling is respected as defined in Appendix 6.1.1.1.

These configuration possibilities are listed in the table in the chapter 7.2.2.2.

7.2.2.2 -- Configuration of the impedances according to the configuration

During the lifetime of a product, various versions of the material manufacturing are made and to ease theexplanation of configuration modifications of these various versions, we use the following acronyms (IDU ,IDU ,CABLE , CABLE ).


DEFINITION

IDU

L.A.U boards References of the main IDU References of theextension IDU

LAU 8x2 Mbits/s: 3CC06059AAxx

16X2 NUM 120Ω: 3CC08971AAAx*16X2 NUM 75Ω: 3CC08971ABAx*

16X2 H.I 1+1 Full:3CC08971ACAx*

8X2 NUM: 3CC08972AAAx*

EXT FULL 16X2:3CC08974AAxx*

EXT 8X2: 3CC08975AAAx*

LAU 4x2 Mbits/s: 3CC06058AAxx 4X2 NUM: 3CC08973AAAx* EXT 4X2: 3CC08976AAAx*

* x = A or B

IDU (’Z AUTO’ appears on the connector panel. See Appendix 6.)

L.A.U boards References of the main IDU References of theextension IDU

LAU 8x2 Mbits/s: 3CC06059ACxx16X2 NUM: 3CC08971AAAC8X2 NUM: 3CC08972AAAC

16X2 NUM: 3CC08974AAAC8X2: 3CC08975AAAC

LAU 4x2 Mbits/s: 3CC06058AAxx 4X2 NUM: 3CC08973AAAC EXT 4X2: 3CC08976AAAC

CABLE (see details § 3.6.5)

Impedance Reference Connector Mbits/s

3CC07885AAxx 1.6/5.6 4X2

75Ω3CC07885ABxx 1.6/5.6 8X2

75Ω3CC07759AAxx BNC 4X2

3CC07759ABxx BNC 8X2

120Ω 3CC07658AAxx distribution bar 8X2

CABLE

Reference Connector Mbits/s

3CC07885ADxx 1.6/5.6 4X2

3CC07885AExx 1.6/5.6 8X2

3CC07759ADxx BNC 4X2

3CC07759AExx BNC 8X2


GENERAL PRINCIPLE

In 1+0 or 1+1 configuration, the impedance modifications from 120 75 Ω are made on the L.A.U. boards.

In 1+1 configuration with the multiplexer protection, the main IDU and the extension IDU are positioned in highimpedance and it is the IDU port that is configured in 75 or 120 Ω.

In 34 Mbits (with only the IDU ), the impedance modifications are made on the 3CC06061AAxx board asindicated in chapter 7.2.2.4.

In n X 2Mbits/s with IDU , tomodify the impedance from 120 75Ω or to get high impedance (HZ) the strapshave to be positioned on the 3CC06059AAxx or 3CC06058AAxx as indicated in chapter 7.2.2.4.

In n X 2 Mbits/s with IDU , the impedance modifications are made automatically when connecting the cablesin 1+0 or in 1+1 provided that the codified Alcatel cables are used or that the cabling is respected as definedin Appendix 6.1.1.1. It is only when using the 3CC06059ACxx or 3CC06058ABxx board has to be configuredas indicated in chapter 7.2.2.4.

If the IDU is used, it is strongly recommended to change or to remain in automaticposition and it is only when using the cable that it is mandatory to change inmanual configuration.

7.2.2.3 -- Method


-- Power down the main IDU and, if necessary, the extension IDU. Disconnect them from the powersource.

-- Disconnect the tributary ports and engineering service channels between IDUs.

-- Open the IDUs concerned (§ 7.6).

-- Set the strap on the LAU board or boards to the 75 ohms, 120 ohms or protection setting as required.

-- Close the units.

-- Reconnect the connectors of the tributaries and service channels to the IDUs.

-- Connect the IDUs to the power source. Power them up again.



7.2.2.4 -- LAU boards for main and extension IDUs

CONFIGURING THE 34 MBIT/S LAU BOARD

Port impedance levels:-- 34 Mbit/s tributaries must be set to the 75 ohms or protection setting, as indicated in figure 194,

S Tributary positions

Positions of impedance straps and ports on the 34 Mbit/s LAU board, 3CC06061AAxx

34 Mbit/s tributary

34 Mbit/s OUTIN

34 Mbit/s port on connector panel

2 Mbit/s auxiliary

S Impedance strap positions

34 Mbit/s in 75 ohms 34 Mbit/s in protection mode

Figure 194 -Position of the straps in 34 Mbits/s

Figure 195 - Position of the straps in N x 2 Mbits/s

2 Mbit/s in 75 ohms symmetrical 2 Mbit/s in 120 ohms 2 Mbit/s in protection mode


CONFIGURING THE TRIBUTARIES OF THE N X 2 MBIT/S LAU BOARDS-- 3CC06059AAxx or 3CC06058AAxx

The tributary port impedancesmust be set to the 75 ohms, 120 ohms or protection settings, as indicated below:S Tributary positions

Figure 196 - Position of the tributaries on the boards

3

Tributary N_ 1/9

Tributary N_ 7/15Tributary N_ 6/14

Tributary N_ 4/12

Tributary N_ 8/16Tributary N_ 5/13

Tributary N_ 3/11

Tributary N_ 2/10

3CC06058AAxx3CC06059AAxx

120 12075

75

75

120

120

75

111

111

111

111

TB452

TB451

TB450

TB402

TB401TB400

TB352

TB351TB350

TB302

TB301 TB300

TB252TB251TB250

TB202

TB201TB200

TB152

TB151TB150

TB102

TB101

TB100

T451

T450

T401

T400

T351

T350

T301

T300

T251

T250

T201

T200

T151

T150

T101

T100

P101

3719

201

J101

21

C500

C450

C400C350C300

C250C200C150

C100

3

Tributary N_ 1

Tributary N_ 2Tributary N_ 3

Tributary N_ 4

120 12075

75

75

120

120

75

111

111

111

111

TB452

TB451

TB450

TB402

TB401TB400

TB252

TB251TB250

TB201

TB102

TB101

TB100

T451

T450

T401

T400

T251

T250

T101T100

P101

3719

201

J101

21

C500

C450

C400

C250

C100

S Strap positions

Figure 197 - Position of the straps in N x 2 Mbit/s

75 ohms 120 ohms Protection with port

The 75 ohm and 120 ohm settings are marked on the PCB


-- 3CC06059ACxx or 3CC06058ABxx

Figure 198 - Position of the tributaries on the board

C101

CR101 CR102

1 2

J101

MX101

MX102

MX103

MX104

MX105

MX106

MX107

MX108

MX109

120

1937

P101

10 1

ON

S101

T101 T102

T103 T104 T105

T106 T107 T108

T109 T110 T111

T112

T113 T114 T115

T116

3CC06059ACxx

C101

CR101 CR102

1 2

J101

MX101

MX104

MX107

MX108

MX109

120

1937

P101

10 1

ON

S101

T101 T102

T105

T108

T111

T112

T115

T116

3CC06058ABxx

Figure 199 - Position of the switches

10 1

ON

S101

Z

110 10 1

ON

S101

110

Automatic position (recom-mended), standard factory

configuration with IDU

10 1

ON

S101

110

Std

Hard

Auto/120

Auto/Z

HZ

Spe

Soft

75

Std

Hard

Auto/120

Auto/Z

HZ

Spe

Soft

75

Std

Hard

Auto/120

Auto/Z

HZ

Spe

Soft

75

Std

Hard

Auto/120

Auto/Z

HZ

Spe

Soft

75

Manual forcing 120 ohms,

use of cable

Manual forcing 75 ohms, (forinformation)

Manual forcing in protectionmode with port (for informa-

tion)

10 1

ON

S101

ON ON ON ON

The white part of the above drawing indicates the switches position.

The automatic mode position covers all the cases of use of cable (or those respecting the cabling given inappendix 6.1.1.1) and the 1+1 protected.


7.2.2.5 -- LAU combination boards in access IDUs

CONFIGURING THE 34 MBIT/S LAU COMBINATION BOARD IN ACCESS IDUS-- Set the straps for the auxiliary 2Mbit/s portion of the 34Mbit/s bit rate on board 3CC07443AAxx

S auxiliary 2 Mbit/s tributary port impedence must be set to 75 ohms or 120 ohms.

Note: The impedance of the 34 Mbit/s tributary port must not be modified, it is set to 75 ohms.

Figure 200 - Position of 2 Mbit/s impedance strap and “tributary” ports on board 3CC07443AAxx

34 Mbit/s OUTIN

34 Mbit/s port on connector panel

J103

J102T101

R133R132

R131

R130

R129

R128

R127

R126R125

R124

R123

R122

R121

R120

R119

R118

R117

R116

R115

R114R113

R112

R111 R110

R109

R108

R107

R106

R105

R104R103

R102

R101

P1023719 20 1

P101

2019 137

3711920

L101

J103J102

J10121

DH101MCL

C103

C102

C101

75120


CONFIGURING THE TRIBUTARIES ON THE N X 2 MBIT/S LAUCOMBINATION BOARD IN ACCESS IDUS-- positions of N x 2 Mbit/s tributaries on board 3CC06765AAxx

Figure 201 - Position of the tributaries on the board

Tributary N_ 10

Tributary N_ 12

Tributary N_ 14

Tributary N_ 16

Tributary N_ 2

Tributary N_ 4

Tributary N_ 6

Tributary N_ 8

Tributary N_ 9

Tributary N_ 11

Tributary N_ 13

Tributary N_ 15

Tributary N_ 1

Tributary N_ 3

Tributary N_ 5

Tributary N_ 7

C101

C102

C103

C104

C105

C106

C107

C108

C109

C110

C111

C112

C113

C114

C115

C116

C117

C118

C119

C120

C121

C122

C123

C124

C125

C126

C127

C128

C129

C130

C131

C132

C133

C134

C135

C136

C137

C138

C139

C140

C141

C142

C143

C144

C145

C146

C147

C148

L101

L102

L103

L104

L105

L106

L107

L108

L109

L110

L111

L112

L113

L114

L115

L116

20

191

3737

119

20

P101

20

191

3737

119

20

P102

19 37

P103

R101R102

R103R104

R105R106

R107R108

R109R110

R111R112

R113R114

R115R116

R117R118

R119R120

R121R122

R123R124

R125R126

R127R128

R129R130

R131R132

R133

R134

R135

R136

R137

R138

R139

R140

R141

R142

R143

R144

R145

R146

R147

R148

R149

R150

R151

R152

R153

R154

R155

R156

R157

R158

R159

R160

R161

R162

R163

R164

R165

R166

R167

R168

R169

R170

R171

R172

R173

R174

R175

R176

R177

R178

R179

R180

R181

R182

R183

R184

R185

R186

R187

R188

R189R190

R191

R192

R193

R194

R195

R196

R197

R198

R199

R200

R201

R202

R203

R204

R205

R206

R207

R208

R209R210

R211

R212

R213R214

R215

R216

R217

R218

R219

R220

R221

R222

R223

R224

R225

R226

R227

R228

T101

T102

T103

T104

T105

T106

T107

T108

T109

T110

T111

T112

T113

T114

T115

T116

TB101

TB102

TB103

TB104

TB105

TB106

TB107

TB108

TB109

TB110

TB111

TB112

TB113

TB114

TB115

TB116

TB117

TB118

TB119

TB120

TB121

TB122

TB123

TB124

TB125

TB126

TB127

TB128

TB129

TB130

TB131

TB132

TB133

TB134

TB135

TB136

TB137

TB138

TB139

TB140

TB141

TB142

TB143

TB144

TB145

TB146

TB147

TB148

-- Positions of straps for N x 2 Mbit/s on board 3CC06765AAxx

75 ohms 120 ohms

The 75 ohms and 120 ohms settings are marked on the PCB

Figure 202 - Positions of straps for N x 2 Mbit/s onboard 3CC06765AAxx

On board 3CC06765AAxx, the impedances of the tributary ports must be set to 75 ohms or 120 ohms.


7.2.2.6 -- Upgrading IDU tributaries from ”fixed impedance” to ”auto impedance”.

-- Update the information sheet need to install the station (Appendix 2).

-- Power down the IDUs, disconnect them from the power source and disconnect the tributary, servicechannel and inter--unit cables.

-- Open the IDUs (§ 7.6).

-- Disconnect the plug linking the power supply to the front panel.

-- On the front panel, using a 5 mm flat wrench, remove the spacers securing the LAU boards to bereplaced.

-- Raise and remove the LIU board (held on the lower circuit by two plugs).

-- Remove the LAU board and the corresponding LIU board (linked by ribbon cable).

-- Install the new LAU and LIU boards after checking the impedance configurations.

-- Close the IDUs again.

-- Reconnect the tributary, put a label to identify the new impedance type on the front panel,

-- Reconnect the service channel, inter unit and power supply cables.


-- Repeat the commissioning operations described in section 5, in particular, make sure the followingparameters are updated:

S IDU Main Type

S Capacity

S Tributary status (Unframed” or ”Disabled”)


Figure 203 - Indoor unit, positions of LAU and LIU boards and port wiring


7.2.3 -- Changing the tributary impedance (Light IDU versions only)

7.2.3.1 -- Methodology


-- Power down the Light IDU.

Disconnect it from the power source.

Note: For the Plug--in IDU, extract it from the BTS.

-- Disconnect the tributary ports and engineering service channel from the IDU.

-- Open the IDU.

-- Set the switches to the 75 ohms or 120 ohms position as required.

-- Close the unit.

-- Reconnect the connectors of the tributaries and service channel to the IDU.

-- Connect the IDU to the power source.

Power up again.

Note: For the Plug--in IDU, simply insert it in the BTS, it will power on automatically.


7.2.3.2 -- Configuring the n x 2 Mbit/s tributaries

The port impedance values of tributaries 1 to 4 can be set to 75 ohms or 120 ohms using switch modules:-- S105 for channel 1

-- S104 for channel 2,



Figure 204 - Positions of switches on the MCU board

A101 A102

C124 C125 C126 C127

C128

C129

C130C131 C

132

C133

C134

C135 C136

C137

C138

C139

C140

C141

C142

C143

C144

C145

C146C147 C148

C149

C150

C151

C152

C153

CR111 CR112

CR115CR116 CR117

CR118

CR119

CR120

CR121

CR122

CR123

CR124

CR125

CR126

CR127

DS102

FL105

FL106

FL107

J107

J108

K101

K102 K103 K104 K105

L105L106

L107

L108

L109

L110

L111

L112

MX156 MX157

MX159

MX160

MX161

MX162

MX163

MX164

MX165 MX166

MX167

MX168

MX169 MX170 MX171

20

19 1

37

37

119

20

P1016

5 19

9156

P102

15

69

P103

R117

R118R119

R120

R121

R122

R123

10 1

ON

S101

10 1

ON

S10210 1

ON

S10310 1

ON

S10410 1

ON

S10510 1

ON

S10610 1

ON

S107

S108S109

T101 T102 T103 T104

T105 T106 T107 T108

Y107

Y108


Each switch module has ten switches, as shown below.

Figure 205 - Locating and using the switches on the switch module

-- Switches 5 to 10 are for choosing the 75 or 120 ohms impedance for thechannel concerned.

-- Switches 2, 3, 4 are for choosing the type of ground in 75 ohmsconfiguration.

-- Thecombination of settingsof switches1onS104andS105 canbeusedto identify the type of engineering practice containing the SCU board: switch1 of S102 and S103 is not used.

Figure 206 - Configuring the impedance of a tributary

120 ohms

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

75 ohms with electrical ground

ON

TRANSFO

2

3

4

OFF

ground isolated viacapacitor

board electrical ground

ground isolated from board

HDB3_IN_P

HDB3_IN_M

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

75 ohms with ground isolated viacapacitor

OFF

ON

75 ohms with ground isolated from theboard

The position of switch 1 should not be altered (reserved for factory use)

7.2.3.3 -- Identifying the type of engineering practice

The combination of switches 1 on S104 and S105 can be used to identify the type of engineering practicecontaining the MCU board. This setting is reserved for Alcatel’s use.

7.2.4 -- Changing bit rate by software

In the classic IDU version, choose, from the list of available bit rates, another bit rate offered by the softwarefeature key--LAU and LIU board combination (for example, change from a 4x2 Mbit/s configuration to an 8x2Mbit/s configuration).

In the Light IDU versions, you can change from a 2x2 Mbit/s configuration to a 4x2 Mbit/s configuration (or viceversa).


This operation canbeperformedonly if thenumberof tributariesused is less than thenumberof tributariesavailable on the equipment. If this condition is satisfied, you must also have a software feature key thatis compatible with the new bit rate. If not, you must first change the key as described previously in § 7.3.

The bit rate of the remote station must always be modified before that of the local sta-tion.


-- Connect the CT to the station and select menu ”Configuration/System Settings.

-- Select the new value for ”Capacity”, then click on ”Apply”.

-- Close the ”System/Settings window.

-- Activate the new tributaries, if necessary, as described in § 7.2.

7.2.5 -- Changing bit rate by changing an LAU and LIU tributary boards

These operations concern only classic IDUs.

7.2.5.1 -- Procedure

The case in which a change of bit rate does not involve changing the LAU and LIU boards is described in § 7.2.

The table below summarizes the procedures according to the various changes of configuration.

UPGRADE

1+0 or 1+1CONFIGURATIONS

1+1 CONFIGURATIONS WITHMULTIPLEXER PROTECTIONUPGRADE

MAIN IDU MAIN/ EXT. IDU ACCESS IDU (if present)

4 inputs#

8 inputs

Change boards:LAU:

3CC06058xxx!3CC06059xxxLIU:

3CC05818AAxx! 3CC06026AAxxand configuration of main IDU:2 Mbit/s tributaries: 75/120 ohms

Change boards:LAU:

3CC06058xxx!3CC06059xxxLIU:

3CC05818AAxx! 3CC06026AAxxwith configuration of main and

extension IDUs:2 Mbit/s tributaries: protection

Check the configuration of the newport impedances (75 or 120 ohms)

8 inputs#

16 inputs

Add boards:LAU:

3CC06059AxxxLIU:

3CC06119AAxxand main IDU configuration:

2 Mbit/s tributaries: 75/120 ohms

Add boards:LAU:

3CC06059AxxxLIU:

3CC06119AAxxwith configuration of main and


Check the configuration of the newport impedances (75 or 120 ohms)

Add link cables for tributaries 1to 16 between the access IDU andthe main and extension IDUs

n x 2 Mbit/s#

34 Mbit/s

Change boards:LAU:! 3CC06061AxxxLIU:! 3CC06118AAxx

and main IDU configuration:34 Mbit/s: 75 ohms

2 Mbit/s tributaries: 75/120 ohms

Change boards:LAU:! 3CC06061AxxxLIU:! 3CC06118AAxx

and configuration of main andextension IDUs:

34 Mbit/s: protection2 Mbit/s tributaries: 75/120 ohms

Change the LAU combinationboard:

! 3CC07443Axxxand configuration of access IDU:

34 Mbit/s: 75 ohms2 Mbit/s tributaries: 75/120 ohms

34 Mbit/s#

n x 2 Mbit/s(n 4)

Change boards:LAU:

3CC06061Axxx! 3CC06058AxxxLIU:


Change boards:LAU:


3CC06118AAxx! 3CC05818AAxxand configuration of main and


Change the LAU combinationboard:

3CC07443AAxx! 3CC06765AAxxand configuration of access IDU:2 Mbit/s tributaries: 75/120 ohms


UPGRADE

1+0 or 1+1CONFIGURATIONS

1+1 CONFIGURATIONS WITHMULTIPLEXER PROTECTION

UPGRADEMAIN IDU MAIN/ EXT. IDU ACCESS IDU

34 Mbit/s#

n x 2 Mbit/s(4 < n 8)

Change boards:LAU:



Change boards:LAU:


3CC06118AAxx! 3CC06026AAxxand configuration of main and

extension IDUs:2 Mbit/s tributaries: protection Change the LAU combination

b d

34 Mbit/s#

n x 2 Mbit/s(n > 8)

Change boards:LAU:

3CC06061Axxx! 2 x 3CC06059Axxx

LIU:3CC06118AAxx

! 3CC06026AAxx + 3CC06119AAxxand configuration of main IDU.

Change boards:LAU:

3CC06061Axxx! 2 x 3CC06059Axxx

LIU:3CC06118AAxx

! 3CC06026AAxx + 3CC06119AAxxand configuration of main and

extension IDUs.

board:3CC07443AAxx! 3CC06765AAxxand configuration of access IDU


7.2.5.2 -- Method


-- If the new configuration requires a change of key, change it first (see § 7.3).

-- Power down the IDUs, disconnect them from the power source and disconnect the tributary, servicechannel and inter-unit cables.

-- Open the IDUs (§ 7.6).

-- Disconnect the plug linking the power supply to the front panel.

-- On the front panel, using a 5 mm flat wrench, remove the spacers securing the LAU boards to bereplaced.

-- Raise and remove the LIU board (held on the lower circuit by two plugs).

-- Remove the LAU board (and for the 34 Mbit/s tributary, disconnect the two subclick plugs).

-- Remove the LAU board and the corresponding LIU board (linked by ribbon cable).

-- For changing from 16 x 2 Mbit/s to 34 Mbit/s, similarly remove the second LAU/LIU board level.

-- Install the new LAU and LIU boards after checking the impedance configurations.

For the 34 Mbit/s version, fit the small daughter board supporting the 1.6/5.6 connectors(3CC07830AAxx), in placeof the top I/O connector (9/16) or ACCESSconnector (9/16), fit the daughterboard at the back of the connector panel and secure it by screwing the spacers to the outside of theconnector panel.

-- For the 34 Mbit/s version, remember to connect the two subclick plugs to the LAU board.

-- Close the IDUs again.

-- Reconnect the tributary, service channel, inter unit and power supply cables.


-- Repeat the commissioning operations described in section 5, in particular, make sure the followingparameters are updated:

S IDU Main Type

S Capacity

S Tributary status (Unframed” or ”Disabled”)


Figure 207 - Indoor unit, positions of LAU and LIU boards and port wiring

LAU/LIU linkcable

LAU board position(two boards stacked in16 x 2 Mbit/s config)

PSU boardposition

LIU board position(two boards stacked in16 x 2 Mbit/s config)

Power supplyconnection board

34 Mbit/s

OUTIN

C103

C105

12

J102

12J103

J104

J105

120

1937

P101

R103

R104R105

R106

R107

R108

R109

R110

R111

R112

R113

R114

R115R116

R117

R118R119

R120

R121R122

R123

R124

R125

R126

R127

R128

R129

R130

R131

R132

R133R134R135

T102 T103 T104


7.3 -- Changing software feature keyNot applicable in the Light IDU versions.

When changing configuration (1+0, 1+1, etc) and bit rate, you may need to change the feature key if it does notoffer the requisite functionality. The procedure for changing the key is as follows:


-- Connect the CT to the IDU and make sure that the ”Equipment” tab is selected (this is the default).

-- Remove the software feature key from the main IDU and check that the alarm ”Replaceable UnitMissing” appears on IDU/MAIN/SKU.

-- Fit the new key.

-- Wait for the software feature key alarm to disappear. The alarm will not disappear if the characteristicsof the key are incompatible with the configuration.

7.4 -- Changing a NE’s IP Address and/or OSPF Area

7.4.1 -- From the station configured as a network element-- Update the information sheet needed to install the station (Appendix 2).

-- With the CT connected to the NE, select the ”Configuration/Quick Configuration menu.

-- Navigate through the quick configuration steps and update the IP address and OSPF parameters.Proceed through the end the Quick Configuration and click ”Finish”.

-- Close the CT.

-- Wait (about two minutes) for the NE to reset its management processor in order to apply the new IPaddress to the NE.


-- Notify the network supervisor of the change of the NE’s IP address.


7.5 -- Upgrading software (from 946LUXn to 946LUXn+1)

On any change of onboard software in the equipment, consider updating theinstallation form in Appendix 2 and, if necessary, notify “Alcatel customer service”.

7.5.1 -- Installing 946LUX50 1320CT-- If not already done, install the 1320CT Craft Terminal software on the PC to be used as LUX50 Craft

Terminal, as described in section § 4.1.

7.5.2 -- Upgrading from 946LUX12 to 946LUX50

946LUX50 software requires the main IDU’s MCU board to be fitted with an 8 Mbytes flash memory and 4Mbytes of RAM (see § 7.14).

If the LUX12 IDU to be upgraded to LUX50 does not comply with these requirements, IDU upgrade proceduredescribed in either § 7.5.2.1 or § 7.5.2.2 must be executed. Otherwise, procedure described in § 7.5.2.3 canbe used instead.

For any of the above cases, procedure described in § 7.5.2.4 needs to be executed afterwards in order to havethe NE networking parameters configured.

7.5.2.1 -- Replacing main IDU

-- Replace the LUX12 main IDU with a LUX50 main IDU, following the procedure described in § 6.2. Atthe end of the operation, the LUX12 configuration coming from ODU is automatically converted toLUX50 format, and applied to both IDU and ODU.

-- Connect the LUX50 1320CT to the IDU’s F interface using F interface adapter cable.

-- Configure the IDU network parameters as described in § 7.5.2.4.

7.5.2.2 -- Replacing main IDU memories

-- Open the cover of the main IDU as instructed in § 7.6.

-- Install the new memories (including LUX50 flash memory) as shown in figure 204, § 7.14.

-- Close the main IDU cover, reversing the order of operations on opening.

-- Reconnect all the cables to the unit and the software key.



-- Configure the IDU from the IDU by setting the IDU/ODU switch to the ”IDU” position. Wait about twominutes for the terminal to be reconfigured. The alarm LEDs should go off and the equipment LEDsshould turn green. At the end of the operation, the LUX12 configuration coming from IDU isautomatically converted to LUX50 format, and applied to both IDU and ODU.





7.5.2.3 -- Downloading 946LUX50 software

Reminder: this procedure can only be used if the LUX12 IDU to be upgraded to LUX50is already set up with an 8 Mbytes flash memory and 4 Mbytes of RAM.

Do not use this procedure on IDUs manufactured prior to November 2000. Check theIDU date.

-- Connect the LUX12 Craft Terminal to the LUX12 IDU to be upgraded to LUX50.

-- Using ”Software downloading application” (refer to § 4.6 in LUX12/LUX40 User Manual), upgrade theIDU 360 software to LUX50. The LUX50 IDU 360 software file compatible with LUX12 softwaredownload application is available at the following location on LUX50 CD--ROM Ref 3CC14311AxAA:

<CD--ROM Drive>:\V_N50\3CC07767.bin

-- At the end of the operation, the LUX12 configuration is automatically converted to LUX50 format, andapplied to both IDU and ODU.



7.5.2.4 -- Configuring IP address, OSPF and NMS

Due to the fact that LUX12 network management relies onRQ2, while LUX50 uses SNMP, network parametersneed to be configured on a LUX50 IDU following a migration from LUX12.

-- Open 1320CT application and log on the NE as described in § 4.3.3.

-- Configure the NE IP address (see § 4.8.2.2).

-- Configure OSPF area (see § 4.8.2.4).

-- Configure point--to--point interfaces (see § 4.8.2.5).

7.5.3 -- Upgrading from 946LUX40 to 946LUX50

Do not use this procedure on IDUs manufactured prior to November 2000. Check theIDU date.

-- Connect the LUX40 Craft Terminal to the LUX40 IDU to be upgraded to LUX50.

-- Using ”Software downloading application” (refer to § 4.6 in LUX12/LUX40 User Manual), upgrade theIDU 360 software to LUX50. The LUX50 IDU 360 software file compatible with LUX40 softwaredownload application is available at the following location on LUX50 CD--ROM Ref 3CC14311AxAA:

<CD--ROM Drive>:\V_N50\3CC07767.bin

-- At the end of the operation, the LUX40 configuration is automatically converted to LUX50 format, andapplied to both IDU and ODU.


-- Open 1320CT application and log on the NE as described in § 4.3.3.

7.5.4 -- Upgrading from 946LUX50 to 946LUX50-- Follow indications provided in § 4.4: Software download toward NE.


7.6 -- Opening an IDUA classic IDU is opened as described in the photos in Figure 208 and the procedure below.

The procedure for opening a Light IDU is the same, except the step shown in photo , since this unit does nothave a “Display” panel.

-- Isolate the power supply and disconnect all the cables to the IDU.

-- Undo the side screws on the unit (screws securing the “fixing brackets” (Photo ) and the metal platesconcealing the fixing brackets mounting position on the “operation” panel).

-- Using a 5 mm flat wrench, undo the connector fixing nuts on the “operation” panel of the IDU(Photo ).

Figure 208 - Opening an IDU

Using a fixing bracket to release the cover Opening the cover

Dismantling one of the fixing brackets Dismantling the connector securing screws on the Operation panel(This phase does not concern the Light IDU version)

-- Slide the cover away from the connector panel towards the operation panel using the “fixing brackets”as a lever to disengage the cover from the connector panel (Photos and ).

-- To reassemble, proceed in the reverse order.


7.6.1 -- “Indoor” unit configuration

UNIT CONFIGURATION ITEM BOARDS

Light IDU 1+ 01 or 1’

2

PSU

Light MCU

(Classic)

Main IDUAll configurations

1

3

4

5

6

7

PSU

MCU

LIU 4x2 Mbit/sLIU 8x2 Mbit/sLIU 34 Mbit/s16x2 Mbit/s extension LIU

LAU 4x2 Mbit/sLAU 8x2 Mbit/sLAU 34 Mbit/s16x2 Mbit/s extension LAU

1+0 ESC extension1

8

9

PSU

ESC extension SCU

ESC daughter boards

basic 1+1

1

8

9

PSU

ESC extension 1+1 SCU

ESC daughter boards

Extension IDU

1+1 with multiplexer protection

1

8

9

4

5

6

7

PSU

1+1 protection MUX SCU

ESC daughter boards:

4x2 Mbit/s LIU8x2 Mbit/s LIU34 Mbit/s LIU16x2 Mbit/s extension LIU

4x2 Mbit/s LAU8x2 Mbit/s LAU34 Mbit/s LAU16x2 Mbit/s extension LAU

Access IDU 1+1 with MUX protection 10 16x2 Mbit/s LAU combination34 Mbit/s LAU combination


1

3

4

5

6

7

Main (Classic) IDU

1

8

4

5

6

7

Extension IDU

9

9

10

Access IDU

Fans

Fans

Connector panel

Connector panel

Connector panel

12

Light IDU

Connector panel

Fans omitted if high efficiencypower supply option chosen

Flash memoryDRAM memory

Flash memory

1’

Figure 209 - Layout of boards in the “indoor” units


7.7 -- Telephone service channel7.7.1 -- Deleting, inserting or changing telephone numbers

Not applicable in the Light IDU versions.-- Update the information sheet needed to install the station (Appendix 2).

-- Open the CT and select the menu ”Configuration/System Settings” and click on the ”Overhead” tab.

S To cancel use of the telephone on the IDU, check the ”Disabled” option and click ”Apply”.

S To enable use of the telephone on the IDU, make sure that the ”Enabled” button is checked. If not,click it to activate it.

S Enter the telephone number and then click ”Apply”.

-- Close the ”System Settings” window.


7.7.2 -- Configuring the ESC 2

ESC2 can be configured on the main IDU, by switches (see figures 210 and 211) on the digital MCU--NUMboard (3CC06088AAxx, for an IDU/ODU digital link), or on the analogue MCU board (3CC05714AAxx for ananalogue IDU/ODU link), in accordance with the table below:

The MCU--NUM has two main variants:--The variant 3CC06088AAAN--The other variants 3CC06088AAAx where x is a letter of the alphabet between A and M.The variant reference is indicated on a label near the power supply under the LIU daughter board. Accordingto the variant the switches S504 to S515 are different:On the variant 3CC06088AAAN, the angle between the 2 positions of the switch is about 300°.Οn the variant 3CC06088AAAx (with x different from N), this angle is only 45°.

SETTING3CC06088AAAX

SETTING3CC06088AAAN

SWITCH CHARACTERISTIC

S504 (S104*),S505 (S105*) ESC 2 level audio input -13 dBm 0 dBm --13 dBm 0 dBm

S506 (S106*),S507 (S107*) ESC 2 level audio output 0 dBm +4 dBm 0 dBm +4 dBm

* for an IDU/ODU analogue link

ESC2 is available on the AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2 connectors.

NOTE: If you want a TTL interface with E&M (TRON/RON) type signalling, close swap SW517 (SW115*).


7.8 -- Hardware configuration of service channels 3, 4 and 5 (classic andextension IDU)

The 9400 UX can have up to five ESCs (except in a 2 x 2 Mbit/s configuration in which only three are possible);for more details, refer to § 2.3. Only ESC1 (NMS 1 and NMS 2 connectors) cannot be configured manually.

7.8.1 -- Configuring ESC 3, 4 and 5 in the main IDU without ESC extension-- Update the information form needed to install the station (Appendix 2).

ESC3, ESC4 and ESC5 can be configured on the main IDU, by switches (see Figures 210 and 211) locatedon the digital MCU--NUM board (3CC06088AAxx, for a digital IDU/ODU link), or on the analogue MCU board(3CC05714AAxx for an analogue IDU/ODU link), in accordance with the following table:


SETTING3CC06088AAAX

SETTING3CC06088AAAN


S510 (S110*) ESC 3 port Clock inversion No inversion Inversion No inversion Inversion

S511 to S515(S111* to S115*) ESC 3 port Format V11 V28 V11 V28



* for an analogue IDU/ODU linkS service channels ESC 3, ESC 4 and ESC 5, are available on the ESC EXT connector.

7.8.1.1 -- V.11 V.28 conversion on ESC N_ 3


-- Power down the main IDU and disconnect it from the power source.

-- Open the unit.

-- Set switches S511 (S111*) to S515 (S115*) on the MCU board to the required position (see § 7.7.2).

-- Set switch S510 (S110*) according to the required clock polarity (see § 7.7.2).

-- Close the unit.

-- Reconnect the main IDU to the power source and power up again.


* for an analogue IDU/ODU link


POSITIONS OF SWITCHES ON THE MCU--NUM BOARD (DIGITAL): 3CC06088AAxx

Figure 210 - Locations of switches on the MCU board with digital IDU/ODU link

S514

S513

S512

S511

S510

S509

S515

I/O connector on connector panel

S507S506S505S504

S508

SW517

C101

C102

C103

C107

C108

C109

C110

C113

C114

C115

C116

C117

C118

C119

C120

C121

C122

C123

C124

C125

C126

C127

C128

C129

C130

C131

C132C133

C134C139

C140

C141

C143

C151

C154

C155

C157

C159

C160

C167

C168

C169

C170

C171

C172

C175

C176

C177

C178

C179

C180

C181

C182

C185

C186

C188

C191

CR101 CR

102

CR103

CR104

CR105

CR106

CR107

CR108

CR110

CR111

CR112CR113

CR114

CR115

CR116

CR120

CR122

CR123

CR124

CR125

CR130

CR133

CR136

CR142

CR143CR

144

FL109

FL110

A1

B1

J101

J106

J108

12J113

J115

K102

L101

L102

LS101

MX101

MX102

MX103

MX104

MX105

MX108

MX109

MX110

MX112

MX114

MX115

MX116

MX117

MX118

MX119

MX120

MX121

MX122

MX123

MX126

MX127

MX128M

X129

MX130

MX134

MX135

MX136

MX142

MX144

MX148

MX149

MX150

MX154

MX158

MX160

MX161

MX164

MX167

MX168

MX172

MX173

MX174

MX175

MX176

MX177

P101

611 6

65

19 9

15

6

P103

5021 1

132514

P104

P108

Q101

Q102

Q105

Q106

R101

R102R103R

104R105R

106R107R

108

R109R110

R111

R112R113

R114R

115

R121

R122

R123

R124

R125

R126

R129

R130

R131

R132

R133

R134

R135

R136

R137

R138

R139

R140

R142

R143

R146R147

R148

S103

1 S104

1 S105

1 S106

1 S107

1 S108

1S109

1

S110

1

S111

1S112

1S113

1S114

1S115

SW101 S

W102

123

SW103

SW104

SW105

SW108

SW109

SW110

SW111

SW112

SW113SW114

SW115

SW118

SW119SW

120

SW121SW122SW123

SW124

SW132

SW133

SW134

1T101

T102

1

T103

T104

T105

1T106

T1071

T108

Y103

Y105

Y106Y

107

POSITIONS OF SWITCHES ON THE MCU BOARD (ANALOGUE): 3CC05714AAxx

Figure 211 - Locations of switches on the MCU board with analogue IDU/ODU link

S107S106S105S104

S108

S114

S113S112

S111

S110

S109

S115

I/Oconnector

onconnectorpanel

SW115

C101

C102

C103

C107

C108

C109

C110

C113

C114

C115

C116

C117

C118

C119

C120

C121

C122

C123

C124

C125

C126

C127

C128

C129

C130

C131

C132

C133

C134C139

C140

C141

C143

C151

C154

C155

C157

C159

C160

C167

C168

C169

C170

C171

C172

C175

C176

C177

C178

C179

C180

C181

C182

C185

C186

C188

C191

CR101 CR

102

CR103

CR104

CR105

CR106

CR107

CR108

CR110

CR111

CR112CR113

CR114

CR115

CR116

CR120

CR122

CR123

CR124

CR125

CR130

CR133

CR136

CR142

CR143CR

144

FL109

FL110

A1

B1

J101

J106

J108

12J113

J115

K102

L101

L102

LS101

MX101

MX102

MX103

MX104

MX105

MX108

MX109

MX110

MX112

MX114

MX115

MX116

MX117

MX118

MX119

MX120

MX121

MX122

MX123

MX126

MX127

MX128M

X129

MX130

MX134

MX135

MX136

MX142

MX144

MX148

MX149

MX150

MX154

MX158

MX160

MX161

MX164

MX167

MX168

MX172

MX173

MX174

MX175

MX176

MX177

P101

611 6

65

19 9

15

6

P103

5021 1

132514

P104

P108

Q101

Q102

Q105

Q106

R101

R102R103R

104R105R

106R107R

108

R109R110

R111

R112R113

R114R

115

R121

R122

R123

R124

R125

R126

R129

R130

R131

R132

R133

R134

R135

R136

R137

R138

R139

R140

R142

R143

R146R147

R148

S103

1 S104

1 S105

1 S106

1 S107

1 S108

1

S109

1

S110

1

S111

1S112

1S113

1S114

1S115

SW101 S

W102

123

SW103

SW104

SW105

SW108

SW109

SW110

SW111

SW112

SW113SW114

SW115

SW118

SW119SW

120

SW121SW122SW123

SW124

SW132

SW133

SW134

1T101

T102

1

T103

T104

T105

1T106

T1071

T108

Y103

Y105

Y106Y

107


7.8.2 -- Configuring ESC 3, 4 and 5 in the ESC extension unit-- service channels 3, 4 and 5 can be configured in the extension IDU, on the SCU board and the

daughter boards that it supports.

7.8.2.1 -- Configuring service channels 3 and 4

Figure 212 - Positions of service channels 3 and 4 in the ESC extension unit

ESC3 position

ESC4 position

ESC 3 and ESC 4 can be customized via daughter boards ESC 1 to ESC 5 described below. These boardsare installed on the SCU board in the extension unit.


ESC 1 board: 3CC05710AAAA & 3CC05710AAAB (64 kbit/s G703 point-to-point)

This ESC board is an add-on board which will support a 64 kbit/s ESC with codirectional interface.

The ESC board has two variants:--The variant 3CC05710AAAA--The variant 3CC05710AAAB.

Switch positions (customizing ESCs 3 and 4):

Figure 213 - Switch Positions onboard 3CC05710AAxx (Botttom view)


SETTING3CC05710AAAA

SETTING3CC05710AAAB


S201Synchronization(not active on this

equipment)

Channel 2 bit(special)

Channel 2 byte(Normal)



S202 Synchronization Channel 1 bit(special)





ESC 2 board: 3CC05711AAxx (analogue ESC, point-to-multipoint or point-to-point)

The ESC board 3CC05711AAxx supports a point-to-point or point-to-multipoint type analogue ESC.

The ESC board has two variants (refer to the label):--The variant 3CC05711AAAA--The variant 3CC05711AAAB .

Figure 214 - Switch Positions onboard 3CC05711AAxx (botttom view)

The underside of the board with the settings can be accessed only when removed.


SETTING3CC05711AAAA

SETTING3CC05711AAAB


S501 Output level +4 dBm 0 dBm +4 dBm 0 dBm

S502TTL interface with E&M

type configurationdisabled Enabled disabled Enabled

S503 Input level 0 dBm -13 dBm 0 dBm -13 dBm

S504ESC type Point-to-

multipointPoint-to-point

Point--to--multipoint

Point--to--point


ESC 3 board: 3CC05712AAxx(64 kbit/s V11 or V28 point-to-point)

The ESC board 3CC05712AAxx supports a V11 or V28 compliant ESC operating at 64 kbit/s.

This ESC board has two variants (refer to the label):--The variant 3CC05712AAAA--The variant 3CC05712AAAB.

Figure 215 - Switch Positions onboard 3CC05712AAxx (botttom view)

SETTING3CC05712AAAA

SETTING3CC05712AAAB


S201, S203, S205,S208, S210, S212,S214, S215, S216,

S220, S222

Operator interface type V11 V28 V11 V28

S206 Transmitted clockinversion

Noinversion

(*)

Inversion(*)

Noinversion

(*)

Inversion(*)

S207 Received clock inversionNo

inversion(*)

Inversion(*)

Noinversion

(*)

Inversion(*)


bit n

bit n+1bit n

bit n+1

D

2D

(*)

Data

Clock

Datainversion:

no inversion:

D

2D

Clock

Figure 216 - Clock and Data signals onboard 3CC05712AAxx

CAUTION:The recommended position is the clock inversion for V11 and no inversion for V28:S inversion of S206 in V11, 64 Kbits and no inversion of S207.S inversion of S207 in V28, 64 Kbits and no inversion of S206.


ESC 4 board: 3CC05713AAxx

The 3CC05713AAxx ESC board is an optional daughter board that can be installed on the extension IDU SCUboard for configurations with engineering service channels 3 and 4.


It supports a V11 compliant digital asynchronous engineering service channel:-- a ESC (9.6 kbit/s maximum), point-to-point (PP1) or point-to-multipoint (PM1 and PM2), or

-- two engineering service channels (4.8 kbit/s maximum), the first point-to-point (PP1A) orpoint-to-multipoint (PM1A, PM1B), the second point-to-point (PP2A).

Figure 217 - Switch positions onboard 3CC05713AAxx


Switch positions


SETTING3CC05713AAAA

SETTING3CC05713AAAB


S101 Link typePoint-to-multipoint

Point-to-pointPoint-to-multipoint

Point-to-point

S102 V11 bit rate1 x

(9600 bit/smax.)

2 x(4800 bit/smax.)

1 x(9600 bit/smax.)

2 x(4800 bit/s

max.


ESC 5 board: 3CC06482AAxx

The engineering service channel board 3CC06482AAxx is an optional daughter board that is installed on theextension IDU’s SCU ESC mother board for configurations with engineering service channels 3 and 4.


It supports V28 compliant digital asynchronous engineering service channels,-- a ESC (9.6 kbit/s maximum), point-to-point (PP1) or point-to-multipoint (PM1, PM2), or

-- two ESC (4.8 kbit/s maximum), the first point-to-point (PP1A) or point-to-multipoint (PM1A, PM1B), thesecond point-to-point (PP2A).

Figure 218 - Switch positions onboard 3CC06482AAxx

Switch positions


SETTING3CC06482AAAA

SETTING3CC06482AAAB


S101 Link typePoint-to-multipoint

Point-to-point

Point-to-multipoint

Point-to-point

S102 V28 bit rate1 x

(9600 bit/smax.)

2 x(4800 bit/smax.)

1 x(9600 bit/smax.)

2 x(4800 bit/s

max.


7.8.2.2 -- Configuring ESC 5

The two possible configurations of ESC 5 (V11 or V28) are obtained by setting switches on the SCU board, ofwhich there are several versions (see page 303).

For the SCU board with digital IDU/ODU link, there are two main variants. The label on the board gives thevariant of the board.

According to the variant the switches S502 to S511 are different:On the variant 3CC07794AAAN or 3CC07797AAAN, the angle between the 2 positions of the switch is about300°.Οn the other ones (3CC07794AAAx or 3CC07797AAAx with x different from N), this angle is only 45°.


SETTING3CC07794AAAx or

3CC07797AAAx (x≠H)

SETTING3CC07794AAAH or3CC07797AAAH


S502 to S505(S102* to S105*)and S507 to

S510(S107* to S110*)

ESC 5 format V11 V28 V11 V28

S511 (S111*) Transmit and receive clockinversion on ESC 5 port Inversion No

inversion Inversion Noinversion

* on SCU with analogue ODU/IDU link

S502

S503

S504

S505

S507

S508

S509

S511

S510

Figure 219 - Switch positions on the SCU board wiith digital IDU/ODU link


S102

S103

S104

S105

S107

S108

S109

S111

S110

Figure 220 - Switch positions on the SCU board wiith analog IDU/ODU link

7.8.2.3 -- Method-- Update the information sheet needed to install the station (Appendix 2).

-- Power down the extension IDU and disconnect it from the power source.

-- Open the unit.

-- If the change entails changing the ESC 3 and/or ESC 4 daughter board, change as necessary.

-- Configure ESC 3 and/or ESC 4:

Configure the replaced board or modify the configuration of the existing board (see § 7.8.2).-- Configure ESC 5:

Set switches S502 (S102*) to S505 (S105*) and S507 (S107*) to S510 (S110*) of the SCUboard to theV11 or V28 setting according to the required configuration. Set switch S511 (S111*) according to therequired clock polarity (see § 7.8.2).

-- Close the unit.

-- Reconnect the extension IDU to the power source and power up again.

-- If a change has been made to the ESC 3 and/or ESC 4 daughter boards, connect the CT and run the”Configuration/Quick Config” procedure. (see § 4.8.5).

-- In ”Quick Config” Step 1, make sure that the appropriate values are selected for ESC3 and ESC4.

-- Run ”Quick Config” until the end in order to apply these new values to the NE.


* for an analogue IDU/ODU link

7.8.3 -- Adding an ESC extension IDU

If adding an ESC unit, the positions of ESC 3 and 4 may be fitted with daughter boards.If the station has back-to-back terminals, transmission of the ESCs from one terminalto the other is performed in baseband and the extension units of each of the terminalsmust be fitted with daughter boards.


-- Do not connect the extension IDU to the power source.

-- Open the extension IDU to be added and check the configuration of the engineering service channels(ESCs 3 and 4 daughter boards, SCU boards for ESC 5). If the configuration needs to be changed:


ESC 3 and/or ESC 4 configuration:Configure the replaced board or modify the configuration of the existing board (see § 7.8.2).

ESC 5 configuration:Set switches S502 (S102*) to S505 (S105*) and S507 (S107*) to S510 (S110*) on the SCUboard to theV11 or V28 setting according to the required configuration. Set switch S511 (S111*) according to therequired clock polarity (see § 7.8.2).

-- Close the unit.

-- Install the unit and connect it to the main IDU (see § 3.6).

-- Connect the extension IDU to the power source and power up again.

-- Connect the CT and run the ”Configuration/Quick Config” procedure. (see § 4.8.5).

-- If the previousNEconfigurationwas ”1+ 0, change it to ”1+ 0EXT. In all other cases leave it unchanged.

-- Change the ESC3 and ESC4 values to the appropriate value.

-- Run ”Quick Config” until the end in order to apply these new values to the NE.



7.9 -- Configuring ESC3 and the NMS ports (Light IDU versions)

7.9.1 -- Switch positions

The light 9400 UX has:-- one engineering service channel, ESC3,

-- two network management ports, NMS1 and NMS2.

For more details, refer to § 2.3.

These ports can be set to V.11 format (factory configuration) or V.28 format using the switch modules on theMCU board installed in the IDU (see Figure 204) :

-- S101 configures ESC3,

-- S106 configures the NMS1 port,

-- S107 configures the NMS2 port.

Figure 221 - Selecting the V.11 or V.28 configuration and clock direction

V.11 configuration (factory set)

OFF OFF

ON

V.28 configuration

ON

Switch 9 reverses the clock

Clock state Switch state

Forward

Reversed

OFF

ON

7.9.2 -- Methodology

V.11 V.28 conversion of ESC3, NMS1 and NMS2


-- Power down the IDU and disconnect it from the power source.

-- Open the unit (see § 7.6).

-- Set switch modules S101, S106 and S107 on the MCU board, with switches 1 to 8 set as describedin § 7.9.1.

-- To alter the polarity of the clock, adjust switch 10 on the same switch modules (see § 7.9.1)

-- Close the unit.

-- Reconnect the IDU to the power source and power up again.



7.10 -- Configuring remote indication loops7.10.1 -- Classic (main) IDU remote indication


The equipment has eight remote indication loops configured as normally open (see § 2.4). These loops canbe configured as normally closed by altering the swap configuration on the MCUboard according to the drawingbelow.

TS8 : SW124

TS7 : SW125

TS6 : SW126TS5 : SW127

TS1 : SW128TS2 : SW129TS4 : SW130TS3 : SW131

A101

A102

C103

C104C105

C106

C109

C110

C111

C112

C130

C135

C136

C137

C138

C142

C144

C148

C151

C152

C153

C156

C158

C161

C162C163

C164

C165

C166

C173

C174

C179

C183C184

C189

C190

C192

C193

C752

C753

CR106

CR108

CR109

CR111CR112CR113

CR114

CR115C

R116

CR117

CR118

CR119

CR121

CR122

CR123C

R124

CR125

CR126

CR127

CR128

CR129

CR131

CR132

CR134

CR135

CR137

CR138CR139

CR140

DS101

DS102

DS103

FL101FL102

FL103FL104

FL105

FL106

FL107

FL108

FL111

J102

172

J103

172

J104

J105

J107

J108

J109

J110

J112

J115

J116

J117

J118K101

K102

K103

K104

K105

L101

L102

L103

L104

L105

L106

L107

L108 L109

L110

L111

L112

L113

L114

MH101

MX103

MX104

MX105

MX106

MX107

MX111

MX112

MX113

MX114

MX119

MX123

MX124

MX125

MX129 M

X130

MX131M

X132

MX133

MX136

MX137

MX138

MX139

MX143

MX145

MX146

MX147

MX151

MX153

MX154 M

X155M

X156

MX157

MX159

MX161

MX162MX163

MX164

MX165

MX166

MX170

MX171

MX176

MX177

P101

65

199

15

6

P102

2 1 114

P104

65

19 9

15

6

P105

65

19 9

15

6

P106

Q103

Q104

R116

R117R118

R119R120

R127R128

R141

R144R145

S101

S102

S103

SW101 SW

102

123

SW103

SW106

SW107

SW108

SW109

SW110

SW111

SW112

SW116

SW117

SW118

SW119SW120S

W124SW

125SW126

SW127SW128SW129

SW130SW131

SW132

TB101TB102

Y101

Y102

Y104

SCU board with analogIDU/SCU link

SCU board with digitalIDU/ODU link

TS8 : SW528

TS7 : SW529

TS6 : SW530TS5 : SW531

TS1 : SW532TS2 : SW533TS4 : SW534TS3 : SW535

Figure 222 - Positions of swaps on the MCU board

To obtain normally closed remote indication loops, you must alter the positions of the soldered links on swapsSW 124 to SW 131 or SW 528 to SW 535 as described below.

Loop type Unactivated Alarm condition Swap position

Normally openRS input RS input

Prewired swap

Normally closedRS input RS input

12Change swap position :

1) cut strap2) insert new strap


7.10.1.2 -- Method

Changing the configuration of remote indication loops 1 to 8 entails moving soldered links on the MCU board.



-- Disconnect all tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables.

-- Open the main IDU (see § 7.6).

-- Alter the swap positions on the MCU board.

-- Close the unit.

-- Connect the new remote indications.

-- Reconnect the main IDU to power source and power up again.

-- Declare the names of the new RIs with the CT by selecting the ”External Points” tab. For each inputport, a dedicated alarm profile can be used.

-- Check the operation of the remote indication loops by verifying that their color changes from green toyellow, blue, brown, or red (depending on the alarm profile) when the corresponding loop is active.


7.10.2 -- Light IDU versions remote indication


The equipment has eight remote indication loops set as normally open loops (see § 2.4).

These loops can be set to normally closed operation by adding 0 ohm resistors to the MCU board as shownin the diagram below.

A101A102

C101

C102C103

C104C105C106

C107

C108

C109

C110

C111C112C113

C114C115

C116

C117 C118

C119

C120C121

C122

C123 C124 C125 C126 C127

C128

C129

C130C131 C132 C133

C134

C135C136C137

C138C139

C140C141

C142C143

C144

C145

C146C147 C148

C149

C150C151

C152

C153

CR101 CR102

CR103CR104

CR105CR106

CR107

CR108CR109CR110

CR111 CR112CR113 CR114

CR115 CR116 CR117

CR118

CR119

CR120

CR121

CR122

CR123

CR124

CR125

CR126

CR127

DS101

DS102

FL101

FL102FL103

FL104

FL105

FL106

FL107

A1B1

J101

J102

172J1

03

172J1

04

J105J106

J107

J108

K101

K102 K103 K104 K105

L101L102

L103

L104

L105L106

L107

L108

L109L110

L111

L112

MX101MX102MX103MX104MX105 MX106MX107

MX108MX109MX110MX111MX112 MX113

MX114

MX115

MX116 MX117MX118 MX119

MX120

MX121

MX122 MX123

MX124

MX125

MX126MX127 MX128 MX129

MX130 MX131

MX132

MX133

MX134

MX135

MX136

MX137MX138

MX139

MX140MX141

MX142

MX143

MX144MX145

MX146

MX147

MX148

MX149

MX150

MX151

MX152

MX153

MX154

MX155

MX156 MX157

MX158

MX159

MX160

MX161

MX162

MX163

MX164

MX165MX166

MX167MX168 M

X169

MX170 MX171

2019 13737

11920

P101 65 199 15 6

P102

15 69

P103

R101R102R103R104R105

R106R107R108R109R110R111

R112R113R114R115 R116

R117R118

R119

R120

R121

R122

R123

10 1

ON

S10110 1

ON

S10210 1

ON

S10310 1

ON

S10410 1

ON

S10510 1

ON

S10610 1

ON

S107

S108 S109

SW101 SW102SW103

T101 T102 T103 T104

T105 T106 T107 T108

Y101

Y102

Y103Y104

Y105Y106

Y107Y108

RI2 : R102RI1 : R115

R102 R104 R105

R106

R108 R110

R112 R115

RI3 : R110

RI4 : R105RI5 : R108RI6 : R112

RI7 : R104RI8 : R106

Figure 223 - Locations of housekeeping loop resistors on the MCU board

Loop type Unactivated Alarm condition

Normally openRS input RS input

Normally closedRS input RS input


7.10.2.2 -- Method

To change the configuration of the remote indication loops 1 to 8 to normally closed loops you must fit 0 ohmSMC resistors to the MCU board.



-- Disconnect all tributary, service channel and inter--unit cables (See § 3.7.1).

-- Open the IDU (see § 7.6).

-- Solder zero value SMC resistors to the MCU board, in the positions shown in Figure 223.

-- Close the unit.

-- Connect the new remote indication loops directly to the ESC3 / ALARM I/O connector or via a crossconnect panel.

-- Reconnect the IDU to the power source and power up again.

-- Declare the names of the new remote indication loops with the CT by selecting the ”External Points”tab. For each input port, a dedicated alarm profile can be used.

-- Check the operation of the remote indication loops by verifying that their color changes from green toyellow, blue, brown, or red (depending on the alarm profile) when the corresponding loop is active.

7.11 -- Changing redundancy configurations

7.11.1 -- Changing from 1+0 to 1+1 without ESC extension or MUX protection

Not applicable in the Light IDU versions.


-- Install the extension IDU.

-- Connect the tributary, engineering service channel and inter-IDU cables (See § 3.7.1).

-- Connect the extension IDU to the power source.

-- If necessary, change the software key on the main IDU (1+1 max).

-- Install the new ODU configuration, referring to section 3: ODU, HSB coupler, antenna, extension IDUlink cable.

-- Recommission the station and, if necessary, the link (section 5).


7.11.2 -- Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 without multiplexer protection



-- Power down the main IDU.


-- Install the extension IDU (check the ESC configuration, see § 7.8.2).

-- Connect the tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables (see § 3.7.1).

-- Connect the extension IDU to the power source.

-- Install the new ODU configuration referring to section 3: ODU, HSB coupler, antenna, link cable withextension IDU.

-- Recommission the station and, if necessary, the link (section 5).

7.11.3 -- Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 with multiplexer protection and access IDU


The IDU box can be of two different types. Both kinds are defined in § 7.2.2.2 . Please referto this paragraph to identify your boxes;The use of the access IDU requests to have specific LAU and LIU selection straps. Thesestraps depend on the kind of IDU available. (see § 7.2.2.4 for more details)



-- Power down the main IDU. Disconnect it from the power source.

-- Disconnect the tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables.

-- Open the main IDU, and the access IDU.

-- If there is one, open the extension IDU, remove the customizing boards and install them in the newextension IDU.

-- Check that the number of physical ports on the main and extension IDUs are the same.

-- On the LAU boards of the extension IDU, set the tributary impedance selection straps to “Protectionwith port” for type IDU or are set to “Manual forcing in protection mode with port” for type IDU.

-- On the LAU boards of the main IDU, set the tributary impedance selection straps to “Protection withport” for type IDU or are set to “Manual forcing in protection mode with port” for type IDU.

-- On the LAU combination board of the access IDU, check the positions of the impedance selectionstraps.

-- Close the units.

-- Reconnect the main and extension IDUs to the power source.


-- Reconnect the tributary, service channel and inter--unit cables (see § 3.7.2).

-- Recommission (section 5).


7.11.4 -- Adding MUX protection with access IDU to a 1+1 configuration


This changeof configuration entails replacing the extension IDUwith a version supportingmultiplexer protectionand the addition of an access IDU.


-- Power down the main and extension IDUs. Disconnect them from the power source.


-- Open the main IDU and the new extension IDU.

-- On the LAU boards of the extension IDU, set the tributary impedance selection straps to “Protectionwith port” for type IDU or are set to “Manual forcing in protection mode with port” for type IDU.

-- On the LAU boards of the main IDU, set the tributary impedance selection straps to “Protection withport” for type IDU or are set to “Manual forcing in protection mode with port” for type IDU.

-- Close the units again.


-- Open the access IDU.

-- Check, on the LAU combination board of the access IDU, the positions of the impedance selectionstraps.

-- Close the unit again.

-- Install the new units (extension and access IDU).

-- Reconnect all tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables (see § 3.7.2).





7.11.5 -- Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 with multiplexer protection without access IDU

This procedure is only available if the IDU type is (see § 7.2.2.2).If not type , please use another IDU of the correct type or upgrade it to type .



-- Power down the main IDU. Disconnect it from the power source.

-- Disconnect the tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables

-- Check that the IDU type is (see § 7.2.2.2).

-- Open the main IDU.

-- If there is one, open the ESC extension IDU, remove the customizing boards and install them in thenew extension IDU.


-- On the LAU boards of the extension IDU, set the straps according to § 7.2.2.2.

-- On the LAU boards of the main IDU, set the straps according to § 7.2.2.2.

-- Close the units.

-- Connect the cable(s) 3CC13659AAxx (see § 3.7.2).



-- Reconnect the tributary, service channel and inter--unit cables (see § 3.7.2).



7.11.6 -- Adding MUX protection without access IDU to a 1+1 configuration

This procedure is only available if the IDU type is (see § 7.2.2.2).If not type , please use another IDU of the correct type or upgrade it to type .

This change of configuration entails replacing the extension IDU with a version supporting multiplexerprotection.


-- Power down the main and extension IDUs. Disconnect them from the power source.


-- Check that the IDU type is (see § 7.2.2.2).


-- Open the main IDU and the new extension IDU.

-- On the LAU boards of the extension IDU, set the straps according to § 7.2.2.2.

-- On the LAU boards of the main IDU, set the straps according to § 7.2.2.2.

-- Close the units.

-- Install the new extension IDU.

-- Connect the cable(s) 3CC13659AAxx (see § 3.7.2).

-- Reconnect all tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables (see § 3.7.2).





7.12 -- Changing power level7.12.1 -- All frequency bands except 9418UXR201 and A9418UXR202

This operation is a software option.In the classic IDU version, the main unit must in addition be fitted with a keyproviding access to this functionality (”TPC:Y” labelling on the key).


-- Modify the output power from the CT using the ”Radio” tab and then the ”RTPC” tab.


7.12.2 -- Frequency bands without RTPC

You may need to open the ODU to insert an attenuator to adjust the output power using integrated attenuatorkits, the references of which are:

Value 3 dB 6 dB 10 dB

13 GHz to 18 GHz 3CC08543AAxx 3CC08543ABxx 3CC08543ACxx

THIS OPERATION MUST BE CARRIED OUT IN A DRY, DUST FREE LOCATION

PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING ATTENUATORS :-- Undo the four M4 screws at the corners of the ODU (3 mm Allen key)

S The four nuts are unsecured and can easily be lost!

-- Remove the cover.

-- Depending on version, “carefully” disconnect the top board.

13 GHz with semi--rigid coaxial cable:

-- To dismantle: undo the two ends of coaxial link W06 between the filter and the RF amplifier (use an8 mm torque wrench).

-- To reassemble: screw the attenuator onto the RF amplifier plug and the coaxial coupling onto thefilter plug.

Replace the coaxial link between the filter and the RF amplifier.

Tighten the attenuator, coaxial coupling and the two ends of the coaxial link using the 8 mm torquewrench.

13 GHz with flexible semi--rigid coaxial cable:

-- Procedure as above, without the use of the coaxial coupling.


15 and 18 GHz with semi--rigid coaxial cable:

-- To dismantle, undo the plug at the filter end of link W06 between the filter and the RF amplifier (TXoutput) using an 8 mm torque wrench.

-- To reassemble, screw the attenuator onto the filter plug. Tighten with an 8 mm torque wrench.

-- Replace coaxial link W06 between the filter and the RF amplifier (tighten with an 8 mm torquewrench).

-- Replace the top board if applicable (depending on version).

S Press alongside the connectors to lock it in position.

-- With a small screwdriver, remove the unit’s ring seal from its groove.

S Do not scratch the casting!

-- Fit a new seal (caution: handle with care because it is fragile!)

S Imperative: Position the seal’s vulcanized coupling in a corner.

-- Dependingon version, if there is a top boardpresent, check for presenceof theCHO--TERM foampadson the bottom of the cover.

-- Replace the cover and check the positioning of the front panel polarizer.

-- Tighten the four M4 screws with their nuts using the torque wrench with a socket cap tip to a torqueof 1Nm + 0.2/0.

-- Affix to the unit (on the handle side), the label suppliedwith the kit, markingon it the internal attenuator’svalue.

POSITIONING THE ATTENUATOR IN THE ODU

RF

Filt.

13 GHz

Position of coaxial coupling.To be fitted in 13 GHz ODU with

semi--rigid coaxial cable.Depending on frequency band, cable W06

may be connected to the other filter plug.

15 and 18 GHz

Attenuator

W06

Attenuator

W06

Filter

RFamplifier


7.13 -- Changing 1+1 HSB coupler polarization

7.13.1 -- Polarization changing for former 1+1 couplerThis operation must be carried out before installing the coupler on the pole mounting. This applies only toconfigurations with integrated antenna.

THIS OPERATION MUST BE CARRIED OUT IN A DRY AND DUST-FREE LOCATION.IMPORTANT NOTE: NEVER REMOVE THE ROUND YELLOW PADS THAT ARE USEDTO SEAL THE SYSTEM.


Dismantling-- 1) Place the coupler on the table, with the microwave “nose” (which mates with that of the antenna)

uppermost, and undo the four M6 screws using an M5 Allen key, then remove the nose; you can nowsee the waveguide to be replaced.

-- 2) On the side nose corresponding to the standby ODU and marked “COUPLED ACCESS” on thecasting, insert the 2.5 mm Allen key (M3 screw) and undo the four screws securing the flexiblewaveguide.

-- 3) Using a 5 mm Allen key (M6 screw), undo the four screws securing the side-mounted “COUPLEDACCESS” nose and remove the nose.

-- 4) Using a 16/17 mm “box” wrench and an 8 mmAllen key, dismantle: the four M10 socket cap screws+ four nuts + eight flat washers + four crinkle washers, holding the two shells of the HSB couplertogether.

-- 5) Open the HSB casing and, with a 2.5 mm Allen key, remove the straight waveguide on the antennaside to replace it with the twisted waveguide. Pay particular attention to fitting the waveguide gasketon the coupler.

Four M10 socket cap screws(16/17 mm “box” wrench + 8 mm Allen key)

Standby ODU portAntenna port

Four M6 socket cap screws(5 mm Allen key)

1

2

Four M6 socket cap screws(5 mm Allen key)

Four M3 socket cap screws(2.5 mm Allen key)

3

4

Reassembly

-- Insert the four M10 socket cap screws 4 in their positions,

-- Fit the side-mounted nose and the four M3 screws 2 in their positions,

-- Fit the four M6 screws 3 in their positions on the side-mounted nose,-- Tighten the M3 screws and then the M6 screws,

-- Fit the front-mounted nose and the four M6 screws 1 , and tighten,-- Tighten the four M10 screws 4 ,-- Replace theHSBcoupler, then theODUsas described in the section onassemblinga 1+1configuration

ODU with HSB coupler and integrated antenna.-- On the unit’s label, indicate the antenna waveguide’s direction of polarization: H (horizontal) with the

twisted guide, V (vertical) for the straight guide.

13 GHz : 3CC07725AAxx 15 GHz : 3CC07998AAxxTwisted waveguide reference

(flextwist) 18 GHz : 3CC11263AAxx 38 GHz : 3CC08024AAxx(flextwist)23/25 GHz : 3CC11264AAxx


7.13.2 -- Polarization changing for new 1+1 coupler

This procedure applies to 3CC13472ABXX, 3CC13473ABXX and 3CC13474ABXX items.

Before mounting the coupler on the pole mounting, check that the polarization is the appropriate one for yourapplication (the coupler is delivered in the vertical polarization). For doing so, place the coupler in front of youwith the ”MAIN ACCESS ” identification on the top and on the left part of the coupler:

VerticalPolarization

HorizontalPolarization

Figure 224 - Information about polarization configuration

7.13.2.1 -- Changing the polarization from vertical to horizontal :

The modification of the polarization is done on the coupler by rotating rings at antenna port and on the antennaby rotating the nose (the ODU are always in the same position).

Place the coupler in front of you as described before and follow the procedure :

1) Remove the 3 M2.5 screws at front side using a wrench of 2 :

Figure 225 - View of the first toprotative piece with screws

Figure 226 - Coupler in V polarization


2) Remove the first rotative piece to access the second rotative piece :

First rotative piece on top with “H” and “V” marks

This one is screwed

Second rotative piece below the first one

With marks : “H” and “V”

Figure 227 - View of the two rotative pieces

3) Turn the second rotative piece as shown on thepicture using the holes (be careful not to damagethe yellow watertightness window). The waveguide must be in the vertical position and the 3holes of the rotative piece must fit with the 3 holesof the coupler. Put the H mark in front of the markdone on the coupleur as shown on the image:

4) Then put back the first rotative piece as shownbelow, also with the H mark in front of the one onthe fixed part. The waveguide must be in thevertical position and the 3 holes must fit with theholes of the second rotative piece.

5) Put back and secure the 3 screws.

6) Stick the label « H » delivered with the coupler to identify the polarization

The coupler is now configured in Horizontal polarization.


7.14 -- Changing SIMM memory boards

Note:

This procedure enables to evolve from the LUX12/LUX 50 version.-- Power down the main IDU and disconnect it from the power source.

-- Open the unit (§ 7.6).

-- Open the locking and extract the SIMM board (if any) (Photo ).

Note: Not applicable for the light IDU. The IDU Light LUX 12 has no SIMM board.-- Insert the two LUX 50 SIMM boards one after the other (Photo ).

-- Push the boards backward to lock them.

-- Close the unit.

-- Connect the unit to the power source.

-- Power up the unit again.


Classic IDU with SIMM memory LUX 1x SIMM memories

Insertion of the SIMM boards IDU with SIMM memories LUX 50

SIMM memory for LUX 1x

SIMM memories for LUX 50

Locking

Figure 228 - Changing SIMM memories


7.15 -- Replacing consumable items

7.15.1 -- MCU board battery

The MCU board of the main IDU (classic or light) has a battery to safeguard the memory which storessupervision passwords, the last 300 events detected (remote inventory), and so on.

This battery must be replaced every 7 to 10 years if, after powering down, the remote inventory information islost when you power up again.

CAUTIONThere is a risk of explosion if the incorrect battery is used.

Only replace with a battery of the same type:M4T28--BR12SH1, Supplier: STMicroelectronics

Observe all applicable national standards regarding the disposal of used batteries.Do not burn and do not recharge.



-- Change the battery (see Figure 229 or 230 depending on the type of IDU). The battery simply plugsinto the printed circuit board.

-- Close the unit.


-- Power up the unit.

-- Wait for the ATT, URG and NURG LEDs to start flashing simultaneously on the main IDU and reloadthe configuration from the ODU by pushing the “IDU--ACO/ODU” switch on the IDU connector panelto the “ACO/ODU” setting. After two minutes at most, the LEDs should stop flashing simultaneously.

-- Check out operation of the equipment.


Figure 229 - Position of the battery on the MCU board (classic IDU)

Connector panel

Display panel

MAIN IDU

C504

C505

C506

C507

C509

C510

C511

C512

C531

CR509

CR514

DS501

J502

1

72J503

1

72

MX504MX507 MX508

MX511MX513

MX514

6519

91 56

P502

S501 S502

2 1 2

SW502 1 2

SW503

SW5061

1 2

SW508

SW511

Y502

BATTERY

RAM memory

Flash memory

Figure 230 - Position of the battery on the light MCU board (Light IDU)

Connector panel

IDU

C101

CR101 CR102

CR103

CR104

J102

1

72J103

1

72J104

MX106 MX107

MX117

MX118MX119

MX126MX127 MX128 MX129

SW103

Y101

BATTERY

RAM memory

Flash memory


7.15.2 -- Changing fans

Note: Both fans must be changed at the same time.

Note the voltage indicated by the used fans (5 or 12 V)

For the 12 Volt fans, use the fan replacement kit 9400UXZ200 (3CC11761AAxx).

For the 5 Volt fans, use the fan replacement kit 9400UXZ201 (3CC12847AAxx).-- Power down the main IDU and disconnect it from the power source.


-- Identify the orientation of the fan and extract the fan off its recess (Photo ).

-- Note the polarities and then disconnect the two fan power supply wires (Photo ).

-- Connect the power supply wires of the replacement fan (the redwire must be connected to the positiveterminal, marked on the PCB (Photo )).

-- Insert the new fan in its recess, the sameway round as the one removed previously, andwith the powersupply wires run along the same path.

-- Close the unit.



-- Check that the fans extract air (otherwise, reverse their orientation).



Position of the fans Extraction of the fan

Disconnection of the power supply wires Fan polarity

Fans

+-red

black

Figure 231 - Changing fans


7.15.3 -- Changing a fuse of an IDU

The power supply units of the main, extension and Light IDUs versions are protected by two fuses which snapinto their clip mountings. The procedure below describes how to change these fuses.


-- Open the unit, for IDU, see § 7.6.

-- Remove the suspect fuse and check it with an ohmmeter (if out of service: infinite impedance).

-- Insert a good fuse.

-- Close the unit.




Always replace fuses with fuses of the same type:S For the classic IDU (31 x 6 cartridge):F10H 250 V (10 A fast blow fuse, high breaking capacity).S For the Light IDU (20 x 5 mm cartridge):With Alcatel power supply: T3,15H250V (3.15 A slow blow fuse, high breaking capacity),With ARTESYN power supply: F3,15H250V (3.15 A fast blow fuse, high breaking capacity).

If the fuses blow again on power up:-- in an installation phase, check the polarity of the external voltage and/or that there is no short circuit

in the power connector,

-- if the fault occurs in operation, change the IDU.


Appendix 1 -- Human exposure to electromagneticfields

A.1.1 -- IntroductionThis document explains the precautions that are taken to make sure the electromagnetic waves transmitted byAlcatel 9400 family of equipment for Low and Medium Capacity Fixed Radio links are harmless for the public.

It provides an evaluation of a safety parameter based on calculations derived from the ICNIRP Guidelines andthe means (i.e. installation rules) by which this safety parameter has to be implemented, where necessary.

It applies to the protection of the public from electromagnetic field radiated by the transmit antenna of theequipment. It does not apply to the protection of the workers.

The calculations, based on far--field telecommunications equations, provide, in case this hypothesis is notvalidated by the result, an over--estimated value for the safety limit in the boresight direction of the antenna.

In this latter case, more realistic evaluations could be derived from near--field calculations, provided that anadequate model of the antenna is used.

Where several radio equipment are installed on the same site, the contributions from each of them have to betaken into account for the definition of the global safety parameter. Each radio site is then a particular case andthe safety parameter is no more depending on the characteristics of a single equipment only.

A.1.2 -- Standards and regulations

A.1.2.1 -- ICNIRP guidelines

The International Commission on Non--Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) is formally recognized by theWorld HealthOrganization (WHO) to draft health based exposure guidelines. This commission has updated theguidelines on the thresholds of exposure to electromagnetic fields for frequencies from 0 to 300 GHz[“Guidelines for Limiting Exposure to Time Varying Electric, Magnetic and Electromagnetic Fields (up300 GHz)”, Health Physics, Vol. 74, n°4, pp. 499–522, April 98]. This document defines the basic restrictionson the population’s level of exposure to electromagnetic fields and from that it derives reference levels for morestraightforward application in the lowest frequency ranges.

A.1.2.2 -- European regulation

The R&TTE Directive [Directive1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 onradio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity]is effective since April 2000. The objective of this Directive is to define the rules for allowing CEmarking of theseequipment so that they canbeplacedon themarket. These rules rely onharmonised standards. Thearticle3.1.aof the Directive states that the following essential requirements are applicable to all apparatus: “The protectionof the health and safety of the user and any other person, including the objectives with respect to safetyrequirements contained in Directive 73/23/EEC, but with no voltage limits”. The Directive 73/23/EEC ofFebruary 1973defines theharmonisation of the laws ofMemberStates relating to electrical equipment designedfor use within certain voltage limits (from 100 V to 100 kV).

The European Commission has also published the Council recommendation 1999/519/EC of July 12 on thelimitation of the exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields (0 to 300 GHz). The limits defined inthis recommendation are based on the ICNIRP guidelines of April 1998 for the general public


A.1.3 -- Evaluation of safety perimetersAs far as ALCATEL 9400 infrastructure is concerned, the level of human exposure to electromagnetic wavesis characterized by the power density, which represents the basic restriction at those frequencies.

The following formula gives the power density assuming far field propagation of RF fields in free space. Then,the power density at a distance D in the main lobe of an antenna of gain G with an input power Pf is:

24 DGPf

DPπ

=(1)

Far field propagation assumption is valid at a distance equal to or higher than Dff from the antenna such thatDff>2D2/λ, where D is the largest dimension of the antenna and λ the wave length.

Considering antennas with high gain, the safety parameter is first evaluated in the direction of the main lobe.The distance DL where exposure level may reach the exposure limit DPL is provided by formula (2).

( ) ( )( )2/4 mW

Wm

DPLPfG

DL π=

(2)Formula (2) overestimates the safety distance if it is lower than the far field distance Dff.


A.1.4 -- Safety perimeters

Based on the maximum power of the equipment, the following table gives the safety distances for the generalpublic. Theses distances are valid for 1+0 and 1+1 configurations.

If the transmitted power changes (see § 7.12), the safety distance can be calculated using the formula givenin Appendix 1.3 above.

Equipment Frequency range(GHz)

Antennagain(dBi)

Maximumpower(dBm)

Safety Distance infront of the antenna

(meters)

35,3 25 2,9

9413 UX 12 75 13 2538,3 25 4,1

9413 UX 12,75–13,2541,5 25 6

45,1 25 9

35,3 21 1,8

9413 UX 16 QAM 12 75 13 2538,3 21 2,6

9413 UX 16 QAM 12,75–13,2541,5 21 3,8

45,1 21 5,7

31,1 21 1,1

36,5 21 2,1

9415 UX 14,4–15,35 40 21 3,2, ,42,5 21 4,2

46 21 6,3

31,1 24 1,6

36,5 24 3

9415 UX RTPC 14,4–15,35 40 24 4,5, ,42,5 24 6

46 24 8,9

33,3 16,5 0,9

38,6 16,5 1,6

9418 UX 17,7–19,7 42,1 16,5 2,4, ,44,6 16,5 3,2

47,8 16,5 4,6

33,3 24,5 2,2

38,6 24,5 4

9418 UX 17,7–19,7 42,1 24,5 6, ,44,6 24,5 8

47,8 24,5 11,6


Equipment Frequency range(GHz)

Antennagain(dBi)

Maximumpower(dBm)

Safety Distance infront of the antenna

(meters)

34,9 19 1,4

40,1 19 2,5

9423 UX 4QAM 21,2–23,6 43,6 19 3,8Q , ,46,1 19 5,1

49,4 19 7,4

34,9 17 1,1

40,1 17 2

9423 UX 16QAM 21,2–23,6 43,6 17 3Q , ,46,1 17 4

49,4 17 5,9

9425 UX 4QAM 24 5 26 536 18 1,4

9425 UX 4QAM 24,5–26,541,1 18 2,5

9425 UX 16QAM 24 5 26 536 16 1,1

9425 UX 16QAM 24,5–26,541,1 16 2

9438 UX 4QAM 37 39 539,6 16 1,7

9438 UX 4QAM 37–39,544,5 16 3

9438 UX 16QAM 37 39 539,6 14 1,4

9438 UX 16QAM 37–39,544,5 14 2,4


A.1.5 -- Implementation of protection rulesIn order to comply with the previously mentioned distance constraints, a safety parameter must bematerializedalong with the proper regulatory signaling and warning,

unless the following mounting rules could be implemented for the antennas or outdoor equipment withembedded antennas; they must be placed:

-- At the edge of the roof in a position such as nobody can sit or stand in front of the antenna within theapplicable distance mentioned above.

OR

-- Against an outside wall or under a roof, with no obstacle within 2 meters in the direction of the signaltransmission, taking into account the antenna aperture.If the antenna is placed on a balcony, it shouldbe placed in a position such as nobody can pass in front of it. This means that: either the equipmentis fixed on the outside wall, not on the wall between the balcony and the building, and pointed towardthe outside with no obstacle within 2 meters; or the access to the balcony must be closed and propermarking used.

OR

If none of these mountings is possible, then a safety parameter must be materialized along with the properregulatory signaling and warning.

These rules apply to the general public and therefore do not apply in case the equipment is installed inprofessional premises of an Operator with no access to the public, provided that the access to the so definedarea around the equipment be restricted to workers having received an adequate information on EMF risks.

These constraints are based on a theoretical general worst case study.

A.1.6 -- ConclusionAlcatel 9400 transmit non--ionizing electromagnetic waves at a very low power, not exceeding 1 Watt at lowerfrequencies.

Our installation rulesmakesure that it is impossible for anybody to sit or stand in front of theantennawithin thesedistances either by the physical position of the antenna or with a safety parameter.

These installation rules are followed by our installation teams and any of our sub--contractors and are they partof the instructions delivered along the equipment for installation by our customers or by third parties.


Appendix 2 -- Installation information

Station

Station name Name of terminal in station *

Main Extension Access Name of remote terminal *

IDU N_ Remote terminal site

ODU N_ Remote terminal azimuth

Software version Power supply 24 V 48 V

* CAUTION ! No more than eight characters allowed by MS-DOS

Hardware configuration

1+0without ESC ext

1+0with ESC ext

1+1 HSB1 antenna

1+1 HSB2 antennas

1+1Frequency div.Hardware configuration

Soft are keMax config. Max capacity TPC Modulation

Software key

Tributaries

Terminal bit rate (Limited by the interface boards and the 2 x 2 Mbit/s 4 x 2 Mbit/s 8 x 2 Mbit/s 16 x 2 Mbit/s 1 x 34 Mbit/sTerminal bit rate (Limited by the interface boards and thesoftware key installed)

Tributary board type

4 inputs2 Mbit/s

8 inputs2 Mbit/s

16 inputs2 Mbit/s

34 Mbit/s+ 2 Mbit/sTributary board type

Tributary Name Impedance BNC-1.6/5.6-Terminal block Tributary Name Impedance BNC-1.6/5.6-Terminal block

N_ 1 N_ 2

N_ 3 N_ 4

N_ 5 N_ 6

N_ 7 N_ 8

N_ 9 N_ 10

N_ 11 N_ 12

N_ 13 N_ 14

N_ 15 N_ 16

2 Mbit/s aux.

Impedance: 75 or 120 Ohms for 2 Mbit/s channels only.

Tributary cross connect If no particular matrix is supplied by the network administrator, use the standard configuration.


Radio configuration

Polarisation (H/V) Normal channelStandbychannel

Transmit frequency (FTx) Values supplied by network administrator|F F | D l ti

Receive frequency (FRx)|FTx -- FRx| = Duplex separation

Duplex separation MHz

Link identification code

Transmit Receive Value between zero (default) and 31, in-serted in transmission and awaited in re-

Link identification codeserted in transmission and awaited in reception, supplied by the network adminis-trator

Amplifier Standard power High powerAmplifier(15 and 18 GHz bands only)

Output attenuator 0 dB 3 dB 6 dB 10 dBOutput attenuator(13, 15 and 18 GHz bands only)

Output power control Normal Standby Values supplied by network administratorOutput power control(13, 23, 25 and 38 GHz bands only) dBm dBm

Local loop Absent Present Absent PresentLocal loop(Option)

Engineering service channels (ESC)

Supervision

Superv. bitrate

NE physical address Bit rate: 9600 bit/s for an 9400XX networkAddress: 01 by default ab

le*

Supervision Address: 01 by defaultValues supplied by network administrator

ter- nalcab

SCC/NMS switching matrixApply standard configuration unless a specific matrix is supplied by the network admin-istrator

Inte

termina

Station telephoneNºInput levelOutput level

dBmdBm

Caution! No more than one zero in the num-ber. Value supplied by network administrator.

ESC extension IDUAbsent Present Optional in 1+0 configurations

ESC extension IDUOptional in 1+0 configurationsStandard in 1+1 configurations

Definition of ESCs

S ESC N_ 3 V11 V28 ESC-1, 2, 3, 4 or 5

S ESC N_ 4 (Bit rate > 2 x 2 Mbit/s) 64 kbit/s V11 ESC-1, 2, 3, 4 or 5

S ESC N_ 5 (Bit rate > 2 x 2 Mbit/s) 64 kbit/s V11 64 kbit/s V11 or V28

* Check the boxes for which the inter--terminal link cables need to be installed.

Performance thresholds (triggering alarms)

Early switching request 2 x 2 Mbit/s 4 x 2 Mbit/s 8 x 2 Mbit/s 16 x 2 Mbit/s 1 x 34 Mbit/s

S 4 QAM minimum values16 QAM minimum values

--93 dBm--

--90 dBm--86 dBm

--87 dBm--83 dBm

--84 dBm--79.5 dBm

--84 dBm--79.5 dBm

S Terminal values

Bit error ratioEarly

switching requestPerformance

switching requestPriority

switching request

S Average values 1E--08 1E--06 1E--03

S Terminal values


Telesignalling (TS) and remote controls (TC)

Install the loops required and name them in the software (NO: Normally open/NC: Normally closed).

Loop Name NO/NC Loop Name NO/NC

TS N_ 1 TS N_ 2

TS N_ 3 TS N_ 4

TS N_ 5 TS N_ 6

TS N_ 7 TS N_ 8

TC N_ 1

Specify the default alarm, equipment and environment alarms (UG, NURG, Disabled, Status).

G784 thresholds

Threshold BBE ES SES UAS

Value


Appendix 3 -- Set of consumablesThis set is defined for a link, its reference is: 9400UXT002

ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

1AC000570017 Black heat--shrinkable, ∅ 4.8 to 2.4 sheath 1m

1AC000570010 Black heat--shrinkable, ∅ 9.5 to 4.8 sheath 1m

1AC001250004 Black heat--shrinkable, ∅ 19 to 9.5 sheath 1m

1AD012980002 Black Colson cable tie, length: 350x9 100

1AD012980003 Black Colson cable tie, length: 173x6 50

77081203 Autoamalgama. Adhesive tape, 19mm wide, 10 mlength

1

77091318 « ty--rap » cable tie, 4.6X385 50

77094664 Green plio Heat ∅ 0.6 1m


Appendix 4 -- Service kit

A.4.1 -- Service kit 9400UXT102 for ODU 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203

The service kit is used when pointing the antennas of each station. It comprises:-- a cable for connecting to the “MAINT” connector on the ODU, ref. : 9400UXT102, 3CC07972AAxx

-- a headset/microphone assembly for links with the indoor unit and the remote station for using thetelephone service channel ESC 2, not available for use with the Light IDU versions, ref.:1AF00375ABAA.

Cable fixing

P05

P04

P02

P03

P01

AUDIO PINOUT P051 -- Micro P

2 -- Micro N

3 -- Speaker P

4 -- Speaker N (ground)

Cable ref.: 9400UXT102

Figure 232 - Cable 9400UXT102

-- Connector P01 : ODU link, “Maintenance” socket.

-- Connector P02 / P03 : Multimeter for measuring AGC voltage.

-- Connector P04 : Connector for portable PC, reserved for Alcatel use.

-- Connector P05 : Connector for headset (cannot be used with Light IDU versions).

Right earphone

Left earphone

Male connector -- External view

Audio equipment ref: 1AF00375ABAA

Figure 233 - Audio equipment 1AF00375ABAA


A.4.2 -- Short service kit 3EJ04113AAAA for A9400UX flat ODU

The short service kit 3EJ04113AAAA is used when pointing the antennas of each station. It comprises a cablefor connecting to the “MAINT” connector on the ODU, ref.: 3CC13477AAxx.

Figure 234 - Cable 3CC13477AAxx

P01

P02

P03

P04

P05

-- Connector P01: ODU link, “Maintenance” socket.

-- Connector P02: For future use.

-- Connector P03 / P04:multimeter for measuring AGC voltage.

-- Connector P05: connector for portable PC. To be used for maintenance purpose or necessity toupgrade the ODU embedded software.


Appendix 5 -- Assembling “N” type coaxial connectors

A.5.1 -- Type 1 fitting on cable 1AC001100022

Connector BECLERBK / 224

Square, 18 mm

across flats

Hex, 20 mm

across flats

Hex, 20 mm

across flats

1) Strip 15 mm of outer insulation from the cableand comb out the braid.

re

2) Fit onto the cable: the nut, washer, flat gasketand braid clamp, then fold back the braid over thebraid clamp and cut away the excess.Strip the core of the cable to the dimensionsopposite.

3) Fit the centre contact fully home on the core ofthe cable. Crimp with DANIELS M22520/5--01 toolfitted with jaws Y215P (hex: .128 across flats).If not possible, solder.

CAUTION: DO NOT MELT THE CABLEINSULATION.

4) Abut the gasket and washer against the braidclamp then offer up the end of the cable into thebody of the connector making sure that thecontacts mate correctly with each other.Screw the nut into the body of the connector(torque: 500 N/cm).

The connector is now ready for use.

document,useandcommunicationofits

contents

notpermitted

withoutw

rittenauthorizationfromALC

ATEL

Allrightsreserved.P

assing

onandcopyingofthis


A.5.2 -- Type 2 mounting on cable 1AC001100022

Dénuder la gaine sur 10mm,mettre l’écrou sur la gaine.Strip cable (10 mm), put the clamping nut on the cable.

Rabattre les 10 mm de tresse sur la gaine.Fold back the 10 mm of braid over the outer insulation.Couper le diélectrique et le ruban sur 6 mm.Cut dielectric & foil over 6 mm.Souder ou sertir le contact central.Solder or crimp the contact on the inner conductor.

Monter la partie accouplement entre le ruban etla tresse du câble.Fit the coupling part between the foil and thebraid of the cable.

Rabattre la tresse vers l’avant du connecteur etcouper le surplus.Fold the braid towards the front of the connectorand cut away any surplus flush with the connector.

Assembler la partie presse étoupe etaccouplement, serrer avec une clé plate 20 mm(couple maxi 35 N/m).Mount the gland and coupling part,tighten with a 20 mm open ended wrench(Max torque 35 N/m).

Fiche/Connector DELTA OHM08 250 173

Pince à sertir: DELTA OHM 22395208

Crimping Tool : DELTA OHM 22395208


contents

notpermitted

withoutw


ATEL

Allrightsreserved.P

assing

onandcopyingofthis


Appendix 6 -- Pin out of user ports

Figure 235 - IDU connector panels

Main IDU

Access IDU

Extension IDU

Light IDU

AUTO

Z

AUTO

Z


contents

notpermitted

withoutw


ATEL

Allrightsreserved.P

assing

onandcopyingofthis


A.6.1 -- TributariesA.6.1.1 -- 2 Mbit/s tributariesA.6.1.1.1 -- 19”IDU connectors (Main, light, access)

Connector“I/O 1 -- 4” Light IDU“I/O (1/8)” main IDU“I/O (1/8)” access IDU

“I/O (9/16)” main IDU“I/O (9/16)” access IDU

2 Mbit/s tributary Nº 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

In+ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

In- 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

Pin Out+ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Out- 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

Light IDU MCU board Light IDU MCU board

4 x 2 Mbit/s boardsLAU: 3CC06058AxxxLIU: 3CC05818Axxx

8 x 2 Mbit/s boards LAU: 3CC06059Axxx LIU: 3CC06026Axxx

16 x 2 Mbit/s boards LAU: 3CC06059Axxx LIU: 3CC06026Axxx LAU: 3CC06059AAxx LIU: 3CC06119Axxx

Access board LAU: 3CC06765AAxx (requires the same configurations in main and extension IDUs)

Ground pins: 10,29 on I/O (1/8) and I/O (9/16) of the main IDU and access IDU,6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 34, 35, 36, 37 on I/O 1 - 4 of the Light IDU

In 75 ohms version, “In+”, “Out+” are the live input and output pins and “In-”, “Out-” are the ground pins for the same signals.Depending on the boards installed, some connector pins may not be available (areas shaded in the table).

For the main and access IDU:-- The pins 1 &11 must be not connected.

-- For the automatic configuration of impedance, the pin 20 must be grounded in75 ohms and not connected in 120 ohms, otherwise the switching has to beforced (see chapter 7.2.2.4)

A.6.1.2 -- 34 Mbit/s tributaries

The 34 Mbit/s port is via 1.6/5.6 connectors:-- “I/O (9/16)” on the main IDU in a configuration without MUX protection,

-- “I/O (9/16)” on the access IDU in a configuration with MUX protection.

If the connector system required for the 34 Mbit/s system is BNC, use a BNC/ 1.6/5.6 adapter kitref: 3CC08249AAxx (option).

34 Mbit/s port

E R

1.6/ 5.6 connector1.6/ 5.6 connector

I / O ( 9 / 16 )

Figure 236 - 34 Mbit/s tributary connectors

Auxiliary 2 Mbit/sport


contents

notpermitted

withoutw


ATEL

Allrightsreserved.P

assing

onandcopyingofthis


The auxiliary 2 Mbit/s port uses female 37-way Sub-D connectors:-- “I/O (1/8)” on the main IDU,

-- “I/O (1/8)” on the access IDU.

PIN LAU: 3CC06061AAxxSIGNAL

In+ In-- Out+ Out--

LAU: 3CC06061AAxxLIU: 3CC06118AAxx

Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream 9 28 19 37 X

Pin 10: ground; in 75 ohms configurations, “In+” and “Out+” are the live input and output pins and “In-” and “Out-”are the ground pins for the same signals.


contents

notpermitted

withoutw


ATEL

Allrightsreserved.P

assing

onandcopyingofthis


A.6.2 -- Engineering service channels

A.6.2.1 -- Supervision bus interface

Concerns the “NMS1” and “NMS2” female 9-way Sub-D connectors on the main or Light IDU.

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 RS 485 data in (--) 6 RS 485 data in (+)

2 RS 485 clock in (--) 7 RS 485 clock in (+)

3 Ground

4 RS 485 data out (+) 8 RS 485 data out (--)

5 RS 485 clock out (+) 9 RS 485 clock out (--)

A.6.2.2 -- Telephone ESC with selective callingConcerns the “AUDIO 1” and “AUDIO 2” female 9-way Sub-D connectors on the main IDU.

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 Audio signal from user (+) 6 Audio signal from user (-)

2 7 M--wire signal

3 0 V

4 Audio signal to user (-) 8 Audio signal to user (+)

5 E--wire signal 9 +5 V protected

A.6.2.3 -- Engineering service channels ESC 3, ESC 4 and ESC 5

A.6.2.3.1 -- Service channel ESC3 on the Light IDU versions: “ESC3 / ALARM I/O” connector

Female 37-way connector Out+ pin Out-- or 0 V pin Pin

64 kbit/s transmitted data input 4 23 Unprotected +5 V 11

64 kHz transmit clock input 5 24 Ground 12 -- 30

64 kbit/s received data output 1 20 Reserved for ALCATEL use 3 -- 6 -- 22 -- 25

64 kHz receive clock output 2 21


contents

notpermitted

withoutw


ATEL

Allrightsreserved.P

assing

onandcopyingofthis


A.6.2.3.2 -- Without extension unit: “ESC EXT” connector on the main IDU

ESC3 ESC4 ESC5

Out+pin

Out-- or 0 Vpin

Out+pin

Out-- or 0 Vpin

Out+pin

Out-- or 0 Vpin

64 kbit/s transmitted data input 1 20 7 26 13 32

64 kHz transmit clock input 2 21 8 27 14 33

8 kHz transmit byte sync input 3 22 9 28

64 kbit/s received data output 4 23 10 29 15 34

64 kHz receive clock output 5 24 11 30 16 35

8 kHz receive byte sync output 6 25 12 31

ESC processing signal (Reserved for Alcatel use) 17 36

0 volt (ground) 18

Squelch signal for ESCs (Reserved for Alcatel use) 19

(Reserved for Alcatel use) 37

A.6.2.3.3 -- “ESC MAIN” connector on extension IDU

ESC3 ESC4 ESC5

Out+pin

Out-- or 0 Vpin

Out+pin

Out-- or 0 Vpin

Out+pin

Out-- or 0 Vpin

64 kbit/s transmitted data input 4 23 10 29 15 34

64 kHz transmit clock input 5 24 11 30 16 35

8 kHz transmit byte sync input 6 25 12 31

64 kbit/s received data output 1 20 7 26 13 32

64 kHz receive clock output 2 21 8 27 14 33

8 kHz receive byte sync output 3 22 9 28

ESC processing signal (Reserved for Alcatel use) 17 36

0 volt (ground) 18

Squelch signal for ESCs (Reserved for Alcatel use) 19

DO NOT CONNECT (Reserved for Alcatel use) 37


contents

notpermitted

withoutw


ATEL

Allrightsreserved.P

assing

onandcopyingofthis


A.6.2.3.4 -- With extension unit

The table below concerns the following connectors:

Female 9-way Sub-D, “ESC. 3-1”, “ESC. 3-2”, “ESC. 4-1”, “ESC. 4-2” on the extension IDU.

ESC. 3-1 and ESC. 4-1 connectors ESC. 3-2 and ESC. 4-2 connectors

Pin G703 64 kbit/ssignal

Analogue ESCsignal Pin G703 64 kbit/s

signalAnalogue ESC

signal

8 Output (+) Audio 1 (+) OUT 8 N.C. Audio 2 (+) OUT

4 Out put (--) Audio 1 (--) OUT 4 N.C. Audio 2 (--) OUT

1 Input (+) Audio 1 (+) IN 1 N.C. Audio 2 (+) IN

6 Input (--) Audio 1 (-) IN 6 N.C. Audio 2 (-) IN

9 N.C. N.C. 9 N.C. N.C.

5 N.C. E signal 1 5 N.C. E signal 2

2 N.C. N.C. 2 N.C. N.C.

7 N.C. M signal 1 7 N.C. M signal 2

3 Ground Ground 3 Ground Ground

N.C. = Not connected.

ESC. 3-1 and ESC. 4-1 connectors

V11 or V28 * signal

Pin64 kbit/s 9600 bit/s max.

P to MP9600 bit/s max.

P to P2x4800 bit/s maxP to MP + P to P

2x4800 bit/s max.P to P

8 Data Out (+) Output PM1 signal (+) Output PP1 signal (+) Output. PM1A signal (+) Output PP1A signal (+)

4 Data Out (--) Output PM1 signal (--) Output PP1 signal (--) Output PM1A signal (--) Output PP1A signal (--)

1 Data In (+) Input PM1 signal (+) Input PP1 signal (+) Input PM1A signal (+) Input PP1A signal (+)

6 Data In (--) Input PM1 signal (--) Input PP1 signal (--) Input PM1A signal (--) Input PP1A signal (--)

9 Clk Out (+) NC NC Output PP1A signal (+) Output PP2A signal (+)

5 Clk Out (--) NC NC Output PP1A signal (--) Output PP2A signal (--)

2 Clk In (+) NC NC Input PP1A signal (+) Input PP2A signal (+)

7 Clk In (--) NC NC Input PP1A signal (--) Input PP2A signal (--)

3 Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground

N.C. = Not Connected ; PM = Point-to-Multipoint ; PP = Point-to-point ; * In V28 mode, all the (--) signals aregrounded.


contents

notpermitted

withoutw


ATEL

Allrightsreserved.P

assing

onandcopyingofthis


ESC. 3-2 and ESC. 4-2 connectors

V11 or V28 * signal

Pin64 kbit/s 9600 bit/s max

P to MP9600 bit/s max

P to P2x4800 bit/s max

P to MP2x4800 bit/s max.

P to P

8 NC Output PM2 signal (+) NC Output PM1B signal (+) NC

4 NC Output PM2 signal (--) NC Output PM1B signal (--) NC

1 NC Input PM2 signal (+) NC Input PM1B signal (+) NC

6 NC Input PM2 signal (--) NC Input PM1B signal (--) NC

9 NC NC NC NC NC

5 NC NC NC NC NC

2 NC NC NC NC NC

7 NC NC NC NC NC

3 Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground

* In V28 mode, all the (--) signals are grounded.

The table below concerns the “ESC. 5” female 25-way Sub-D connector on the extension IDU.

SignalESC 5 connector pin

Signal PinSignalIn+ In-- Out+ Out--

Signal Pin

DO NOT CONNECTReserved for Alcatel use

3 2 Reserved for Alcatel use1, 4, 8, 14,15, 20

ESC 5: Clock10 22 12 24 0 volt

6, 7, 9, 16,17, 18, 19,

21

ESC 5: Data 11 23 13 25 Not connected 2, 3, 5

“In+” and “Out+” are the live input (received signal) and output (transmitted signal) pins and “In--” and “Out--”are the ground pins for the same signals.


contents

notpermitted

withoutw


ATEL

Allrightsreserved.P

assing

onandcopyingofthis


A.6.3 -- Alarms and TS/TCThe alarm and remote control relays are de--energized in the absence of an alarm.

The remote indication loops (TS)betweenelectrical groundandTS input, canbe configuredas normally openor normally closed (in the absence of an alarm), depending on the positioning of the soldered links (“swaps”)on the MCU board, as indicated in section 7.10.

A.6.3.1 -- “ESC3 / ALARM I/O” connector on the Light IDU versions

Female 37--way connector

SignalN/C contact N/O contact Common contact

TS signalsSignalPin Pin Pin

TS signals

Urgent alarm (SA) 14 15 32 TS1 input 7

Non urgent alarm (NSA) 33 34 16 TS2 input 26

Alarm “Attended” state 17 18 35 TS3 input 8

“Housekeeping” remote control 36 37 19 TS4 input 27

Unprotected +5 V 11 TS5 input 9

Ground 12 -- 30 TS6 input 28

R d f ALCATEL 3 6 22 25TS7 input 10

Reserved for ALCATEL 3 -- 6 -- 22 -- 25TS8 input 29

A.6.3.2 -- “ALARMS I/O” connector on the main IDU

Concerns a female 25--pin Sub-D connector.

SignalN/C

contactN/O

contactCommoncontact

TS signalsSignal

Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin

Urgent alarm (SA) 1 2 14 TS1 input 7 TS5 input 9

Non urgent alarm (NSA) 15 16 3 TS2 input 20 TS6 input 22

Alarm “Attended” state 4 5 17 TS3 input 8 TS7 input 10

“Housekeeping” remote control 18 19 6 TS4 input 21 TS8 input 23

0 V 25 Reserved for ALCATEL 11 -- 12 -- 13 -- 24


contents

notpermitted

withoutw


ATEL

Allrightsreserved.P

assing

onandcopyingofthis


A.6.4 -- IDU “F” connector

Use of the “F” connnector requires the “F” connector adapter cable between the PC cable and the IDU female9--pin sub--D port.

A.6.4.1 -- 9--Pin sub--D connector wiring

The table below concerns the female 9-pin sub--D connector used for supervisory PC connection.

Pin ASSIGNMENT Pin ASSIGNMENT

1 Data Carrier Detect 6 Data Set Ready

2 Receive data - level V28 7 Request to send

3 Transmit data - level V28

4 Data Terminal Ready 8 Clear to send

5 GND 9 Not connected

A.6.4.2 -- F Interface adapter cable wiring

PIN ASSIGNMENT

Male plug Female plug

P1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2

3

7

5

8

4

1

P2


Appendix 7 -- Alarm synthesis indicatorThe following troubleshooting table pertains to the alarm and status synthesis given in all the screens.

Alarm Synthesis indication

Mnemonic Alarm / Status Description Maintenance

CRI Critical alarmSynthesis of alarms that needs immediatetroubleshooting (typical: NE isolation).

MAJ Major (Urgent) alarm Synthesis of alarms that needs immediateMAJ Major (Urgent) alarm Synthesis of alarms that needs immediatetroublshooting.

MIN Minor (Not urgent) alarmSynthesis of alarms for which a deferred intervent canbe decided.

WNG Warning alarmSynthesis of alarms due to failure of other NE in thenetwork.

IND Indeterminate alarmSynthesis of alarms not associated with the previousseverities. Not operative.

EXTExternal Point(Housekeeping alarm)

Check the relevant station alarm associated with theinput housekeeping indication.

EQP Equipment alarm Synthesis of alarms of the Equipment domain.

TRS Transmission alarm Synthesis of alarms of the Transmission domain.

Local Access state

GREEN LED: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has theOS permission to manage the NE (granted).CYAN LED: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has notthe OS permission to manage the NE (denied).

COM NE reachable/unreachable

GREEN LED: Identifies the “ Enable “ operational stateof the connectionbetweenNEandCraft Terminal ( SDHservice link up ).RED LED: Identified the “ Disable ” operational state ofthe connection betweenNEandCraft Terminal ( servicelink down ).

SUP Supervision stateGREEN LED: NE is under supervision.BROWN LED: NE is not under supervision.Used in the OS.

ALI AlignmentAlignment status of the SH MIB respect to theequipment MIB.

OS OS ManagementGREEN LED: No OS is currently managing the NE.CYAN LED: Indicates that the NE is currently undersupervision by an OS.

AC Abnormal ConditionGREEN LED: Normal operating condition.CYAN LED: Detection of an ABNORMAL operativecondition. Type: switch forcing.

NTP NTP server stateGREEN LED: Normal operating condition.CYANLED: Indicates that theNTPserver providedwiththe craft terminal is not working properly.


The following table summarizes the information obtained in the alarm view starting from the left column.

Alarm information, general description

TITLE DESCRIPTION

Severity severity associated with the alarm and assigned in the Alarm Profile

Event time time the alarm was generated

Entity entity involved in the alarm

Probable Cause probable cause of the alarm

Managed Object Class class of the alarm

The information supplied helps the operator during the troubleshooting operations.

Table on page supplies general information on the alarmmeanings and on the respective maintenance actionsto be taken based on the information given in the applications.

The maintenance action must take into account the board where the alarm is detected.

The Housekeeping alarms are referred to the input external point relevant to the Housekeeping signals. Theyare available to the customer by connecting them to a dedicated subrack connector.


Appendix 8 -- Alarm Details

General issues of the alarm meanings and their respective maintenance actions

ALARM MEANING MAINTENANCE ACTION

AISAIS detection on the tributary in Txside or Rx side

Check the 2 Mbit connectedequipment

Cable LOS Problem on the cable or on theODUReplace the ODU; if the alarm is stillactive replace the cable.

Dem failDemodulator failure affecting thedemodulated signal

Replace the ODU

Dem LOSLoss of the incoming signal at thedemodulator input

Check the link (propagationproblem)

Early Warning Early Warning at Rx sideCheck the link (propagationproblem)

High BER Excessive BERExcessive errors. Check the link(propagation problem)

Incompatible FrequencyFrequency setting incompatible withthe ODU P/N

Change the frequency or change theODU

Incompatible PTX Output power out of the limits Replace the ODU

Link Identifier Mismatch Mismatch on the link identifier

Check the correct connection of thecable between the IDU and therelevant ODU. If the connection iscorrect, check the link (propagationproblem)

Loss Of Signal LOS at the Tx tributary input Check the line

Low BER Low BER at the Rx sideCheck the link (propagationproblem)

Mod failInternal modulator failure affectingthe modulated signal

Replace the ODU

Mod LOS No signal at the modulator inputInvestigate by using the loopbackfacilities with the CT.

PPP Fail PPP link failure

Check that the NMS is configuredwith the correct mode and that thepeer is correctly configured and inservice. In case of V.11 NMS, checkthat the cable is connected andworking properly.

Provisioning MismatchProvisioning data is refused byequipment

Information is compliant withequipment characteristics


ALARM MEANING MAINTENANCE ACTION

Remote Inventory FailureRemote Inventory can not berecovered from a board or unit

Minor alarm. Check the concernedboard/unit

Replaceable Unit Problem Problem on a replaceable unit Replace the unit

Replaceable Unit TypeMismatch

Mismatch between the installed unitand the sw configured unit

Change the unit configuration orchange the unit

Replaceable Unit Missing No unit in a configured slot Install the unit

Rx Fail (Radio alarm) No RF received signalCheck the link (propagationproblem)

Threshold CrossPerformance threshold has beencrossed

Errors on the link

Unavailable TimePerformance alarm: Too manyunavailable seconds

Errors on the link

Tx Fail (Radio alarm) Transmitter failure Replace the ODU

Unconfigured EquipmentPresent

Unit present in an unconfigured slot Configure the unit

Housekeeping Active input housekeeping Check the housekeeping


Appendix 9 -- List of models and commercial items

A.9.1 -- Hardware

Outdoor equipment 94xxUX flatODU

4QAM/16QAM RTPCMnemonic

Model number& Remote Inventory

numbers

Outdoor unit 9413 fs=266MHz 1--1’ 3CC13688AAxx

Outdoor unit 9413 fs=266MHz 2--2’3DB05524AAAA

3CC13689AAxx

Outdoor unit 9413 fs=266MHz 1’--13DB05524AAAA

3CC13690AAxx

Outdoor unit 9413 fs=266MHz 2’--2 3CC13691AAxx



3CC13693AAxx


3CC13694AAxx




3CC13697AAxx


3CC13698AAxx




3CC13705AAxx


3CC13706AAxx


Outdoor unit 9415 fs=644MHz 1--1’ 3DB06334AAAA 3CC13709AAxx


Outdoor unit 9415 fs=728MHz 13DB05527AAAA

3CC13712AAxx


3CC13713AAxx



3CC12992AAxx


3CC12993AAxx




3CC13715AAxx


3CC13716AAxx




3CC13469AAxx


3CC13470AAxx



Outdoor equipment 94xxUX flatODU

4QAM/16QAM RTPC

Model number& Remote Inventory

numbersMnemonic

Outdoor unit 9418 fs=1092.5MHz 1--1’ 3CC14472AAxx

Outdoor unit 9418 fs=1092.5MHz 2--2’ 3CC14473AAxx

Outdoor unit 9418 fs=1092.5MHz 1’--1 3CC14474AAxx

Outdoor unit 9418 fs=1092.5MHz 2’--2 3CC14475AAxx


3CC12995AAxx


3CC12996AAxx



3CC13719AAxx


3CC13720AAxx




3CC13727AAxx


3CC13728AAxx




3CC14389AAxx


3CC14390AAxx




3CC13735AAxx


3CC13736AAxx




3CC12988AAxx


3CC12989AAxx


WR62 10dB HSB Coupler (UX flat only) 3EJ04472AAAA 3CC13472AAxx



Outdoor equipment 94xxUX Mnemonic Model numberRemoteInventorynumbers

Outdoor unit 13GHz4QAMwithout RTPC 9413UXR201 3CC08879AAxx 3CC08879xxxx

Outdoor unit 13 GHz 4QAM with RTPC 9413UXR202 3CC12690AAxx 3CC11737xxxx

Outdoor unit 13 GHz 16QAM 9413UXR203 3CC12683AAxx 3CC11736xxxx

Outdoor unit 15 GHz standard power 9415UXR201 3CC08880AAxx 3CC08880xxxx

Outdoor unit 15 GHz high power 9415UXR202 3CC08978AAxx 3CC08978xxxx


Outdoor equipment 94xxUXRemoteInventorynumbers

Model numberMnemonic

Outdoor unit 15 GHz 4QAM with RTPC 9415UXR203 3CC12979AAxx 3CC12978xxxx

Outdoor unit 18 GHz standard power 9418UXR201 3CC08883AAxx 3CC08883xxxx

Outdoor unit 18 GHz high power 9418UXR202 3CC08979AAxx 3CC08979xxxx


Outdoor unit 23 GHz 16QAM 9423UXR202 3CC13031AAxx 3CC12755xxxxor

3CC12756xxxx





HSB Coupler 13 GHz 9413UXR111 3CC07985AAxx 3CC07985AAxx



HSB Coupler 23/25 GHz 942xUXR111 3CC07987AAxx 3CC07987AAxx

HSB Coupler 38 GHz 943xUXR111 3CC08000AAxx 3CC08000AAxx


A.9.2 -- Indoor equipment and software

Indoor equipment Mnemonic Model number Comments

Light Indoor unit -- standalone 19” 120Ohms 3EJ03625AGAA 3CC09426ACxx

Light Indoor unit -- standalone 19” 75Ohms 3EJ03625AHAA 3CC09426ACxx

Main Indoor Unit 4x2 Mbit/s 3EJ03619ADAA 3CC08973Axxx



Main Indoor Unit 34+2 Mbit/s 3EJ03626ADAA 3CC08920Axxx

Extension Indoor Unit 1+0 9400UXB211 3CC08897Axxx

Extension Indoor Unit 1+1 basic 9400UXB221 3CC08898Axxx

Extension Indoor Unit 1+1 mux prot.4x2 Mbit/s

9400UXB231 3CC08976Axxx

Extension Indoor Unit 1+1 mux prot. 8x2Mbit/s

9400UXB232 3CC08975AAxx

Extension Indoor Unit 1+1 mux prot. 16x2Mbit/s

9400UXB233 3CC08974AAxx

Extension Indoor Unit 1+1 mux prot. 34+2Mbit/s

9400UXB234 3CC08908AAxx

Access Indoor Unit 34+2 Mbit/s 9400UXB144 3CC08977AAxx

Software Feature Key Unit 9400XXB007 3CC07619ABxx

Main IDU Connector Kit 3CC08048ABxx

LUX 50 Craft Kit 3EJ03500AAAA3CC14311AAxx Craft Terminal

946LUX50CD--ROM

3CC12903AHAA Multilingual Alcatel9400 LX&UXCD--ROMHandbook

3CC14134AAxx Cable AdapterCT--IDU LUX50

Cable Adapter CT--IDU LUX50 3EJ03500ABAA 3CC14134AAxx

Craft Terminal 946LUX 50 SW CD 3EJ03500ACAA 3CC14311AAxx

LXUX Documentation CD--ROM 9400UXD103 3CC12903AHAA


A.9.3 -- Commercial items

This tablemaps the various items in the installationmanual to the commercial references by which they are sold.The composition of each item is given by way of indication; the definitive list is generated according to theequipment configuration.

OUTDOOR PARTS

Installations Mnemonic Model number Comments

Outdoor adjustable pole mounting 1+0 (integratedantenna)

9400UXI102 3CC10752AAxx

Outdoor adjustable pole mounting 1+1 (integratedantenna)

9400UXI101 3CC06071AAxx

Wind strengthening 9400UXI103 3CC11453AAxx Optional

Outdoor fix pole mounting (non integrated antenna)

13 GHz

9413UXI102 1AB146090003

1AB128510002

Adapter nose

Support

9413UXI103 3CC05751ACxx Flextwist 13 GHz 60 cm


15 GHz

9415UXI102 1AB146090001

1AB128510002

Adapter nose

Support

9415UXI103 3CC05750ACxx Flextwist 15 GHz 60 cm


18 GHz

9418UXI102 1AB146090002

1AB128510002

Adapter nose

Support

9418UXI103 3CC05749ACxx Flextwist 18GHz 60 cm


23 / 25 GHz

942xUXI102 1AB146090004

1AB128510002

Adapter nose (23/25 GHz)

Support/

9423UXI103 3CC05749ACxx Flextwist 23 /25GHz 60 cm

Integrated antenna 13 GHz – 0.6m 9413UXI002 3CC06215AAAB

Integrated antenna 15 GHz – 0.3m 9415UXI001 3CC10952AAxx


Integrated antenna 18 GHz – 0.3m 9418UXI001 3CC10953AAxx








Fix attenuator 13/15/18 GHz 9413UXR120 3CC08543AAxx3CC08543ABxx3CC08543ACxx

3 dB6 dB10 dB

H polarization kit for HSB coupler, 13 GHz 9413UXR112 3CC07725AAxx



H polarization kit for HSB coupler, 23 & 25 GHz 942xUXR112 3CC11264AAxx


Pipe SUPOUTD001 3CC04658AExx

Self supported mast SUPMAST001 3CC05148AAxx


INDOOR PARTS


Fan replacement kit 9400UXZ200 3CC11761AAxx Contains 2 fans (12 V)

Fan replacement kit 9400UXZ201 3CC12847AAxx Contains 2 fans (5 V)

19” supporting rack 9400XXI300 1AD039050001

Indoor wall mounting 3U 9400UXI301 3CC09614AAxx3CC07966AAxx3CC07957AAxx

Includes a set of connectorsand supplies, an alternative tothe 19“ support rack

Indoor wall mounting 9U 9400UXI302 1AD029510001 Alternative to the 19” supportrack

Indoor desktop mounting kit (standalone solution) 9400UXI303 3CC08295AAxx Includes a set of connectorsand supplies, an alternative tothe 19” support rack

19” DC distributor board (6 accesses) 9400XXC511 1AD0530600013CC08211AAxx3CC08165AAxx

48 V

19” DC distributor board (6 accesses) 9400XXC511 1AD0530600013CC08209AAxx3CC08212AAxx

24 V

Wall mounting DC distributor board (6 accesses) 9400XXC512 770962483CC08165AAxx3CC08211AAxx

48 V

Wall mounting DC distributor board (6 accesses) 9400XXC512 770962483CC08209AAxx3CC08212AAxx

24 V

Consumable set 9400UXT002 3CC06503AAxx

Service kit for 9400UX ODU 9400UXT102 3CC07972AAxx1AF00375ABxx

Telephone headset cable

Light service kit for 9400UX ODU 9400UXT112 3CC07972AAxx Cable

Light service kit for 9400UX flat ODU 3EJ04113AAAA 3CC13477AAxx Rx power monitoring cable

Station tool kit 9400UXT103 3CC08409AAxx One for each station

Telephone handset 9400XXB000 3CC07946AAxx

Cable tray – Indoor – Cablofil 6 m INFRA00003 3CC07580AAxx

Cable tray – Indoor – PVC 4 m INFRA00004 3CC06511AAxx

Cable tray – Outdoor – CES 12 m INFRA00005 3CC06512AAxx

Cable tray – Outdoor – CAPRI 12 m INFRA00006 3CC06759AAxx

Battery M4T28--BR12--SH11AB084760003

The following tablemaps the various items in the installationmanual to the commercial references by which theyare sold. The composition of each item is given by way of indication; the definitive list is generated accordingto the equipment configuration.


CABLING


Additional cable for 1+1 configuration 9400UXC130 3CC07157ABxx note : the cable3CC07160ABxx is attached tothe commercial reference ofthe extension IDU

Back to back cables 9400UXC333 3CC08729AAxx Telephone service channel

9400UXC332 3CC07711AAxx Supervision

Indoor/Outdoor cable (length < 300 meters) 9400UXI202 1AC001100022 Per 50 m

Indoor/Outdoor cable connector set (2 pieces) 9400UXI203 1AB095530021

Indoor/Outdoor cable grounding kit 9400UXI204 1AB128500002

Power supply connection kit 9400XXC501 3CC08165AAxx 48 V (per 20m)pp y

3CC08209AAxx 24 V (per 20m)

Grounding connection kit (IDU + ODU) 9400XXC502 3CC08166AAxx Per 20 m

120 Ohms cable 16 pairs 9400XXI504 3CC08809AAxx Per 15 m

One terminal block 10 pairs 9400XXI505 3CC07921AAxx

3CC05527AAxx

75 Ohms connection kit (2 tributaries) 9400XXI506 3CC07917AAxx Per 15 m

Alarm cable 1 pair 9400XXI508 3CC08811AAxx Per 15 m

Alarm cable 15 pairs 9400XXI509 3CC08817AAxx Per 15 m

Distributor panel 4 x 2 Mbit/s 9400XXI404 3CC08061AAxx and3CC07885AAxx or3CC07885ADxx

75 Ω / 1.6/5.6. Use adapters ifBNC ports are requested

9400XXI404+ 1 x 9400XXI405

3CC08061ABxx and3CC07759AAxx or3CC07759ADxx

75 Ω / BNC

Distributor panel 8 x 2 Mbit/s 9400XXI408 3CC08061AAxx and3CC07885ABxx or3CC07885AExx

75 Ω / 1,6/5,6

9400XXI408+ 2 x 9400XXI405

3CC08061ABxx and3CC07759ABxx or3CC07759AExx

75 Ω / BNC

9400XXI408 3CC07810AAxx3CC07658AAxx

120 Ω – EMC

9400XXI408 3CC08062AAxx3CC07658AAxx

120 Ω – non EMC

Distributor panel 16 x 2 Mbit/s 9400XXI416 3CC08061AAxx and2x3CC07885ABxx or2x3CC07885AExx

75 Ω / 1.6/5.6

9400XXI416+ 4 x 9400XXI405

3CC08061ABxx and2x3CC07759ABxx or2x3CC07759AExx

75 Ω / BNC

9400XXI416 3CC07810AAxx2x3CC07658AAxx

120 Ω – EMC

9400XXI416 3CC08062AAxx2x3CC07658AAxx

120 Ω – non EMC

BNC adapter 9400XXI405 3CC08249AAxx To be ordered if the 34 Mbit/stributary is used with BNCconnector

F interface cable adapter 3EJ03500ABAA 3CC14134AAxx Adapter CT--IDU LUX50


Appendix 10 -- Software and documentation list

A.10.1 -- Software

CD--ROM -- Craft Terminal(including IDU 360 Embedded SW)

CD--ROMidentification

MinimumItem ChangeStatus (ICS)

Craft Terminal 946LUX 50 3CC14311AAAA 03

Embedded software -- IDU (360) Softwareidentification


CLASSIC IDU (MCU) 3CC14057AAAA 02

Embedded software -- IDU (302) Softwareidentification


CLASSIC IDU (MCU) 3CC08538AAxx 06

LIGHT IDU (MCU) 3CC08755AAxx 04

EXTENSION IDU (SCU) 3CC08540AAxx 07

Embedded software -- ODU Softwareidentification


ODU 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203 3CC06452AJxx 04

ODU Flat 3CC13007AAxx 01

A.10.2 -- Documentation

Documentation CD--ROM CommercialCode

CD--ROMidentification


Alcatel 9400UX 9400UXD103 3CC12903AHAA 01


Appendix 11 -- LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

MNEMONIC DEFINITION

AC Abnormal condition

ACO Alarm cut-off

ADC Analog/Digital Converter

AGC Automatic Gain Control

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

ATPC Automatic Transmission Power Control

BBE Number of errored blocks that are not part of an SES

BER Bit Error Rate

BTS Base Transceiver Station

CIA_NUM Digital Cable Interface Adapter

CT Craft Terminal

DCE Data Circuit Terminating Equipment

DTE Data Terminal Equipment

DTMF Dual-Tone Multi Frequency

ECT Equipment Craft Terminal

EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility

EPS Equipment Protection Switching

ES Errored seconds

ESC Engineering Service Channel

ESD ElectroStatic Discharge

ESR Early Switching Request

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

FD Frequency Diversity

FEC Forward Error Correction

FTP File Transfer Protocol

HDB3 High Density Binary 3 code (3rd order)

HDLC High-level Data Link Communication

HSB Hot StandBy

IDU InDoor Unit

IF Intermediate Frequency

I2C Inter Integrated Circuit

ITU International Telecommunication Union

JRE Java Runtime Environment

LAU Line Access Unit


LED Light Emitting Diode

LIU Line Interface Unit

LO Local Oscillator

MCU_NUM Multiplexing and Control Unit with digital cable interface

MDU Modulation/Demodulation Unit

NE Network Element

NMC Network Management Center

NMS Network Management System

NSA No Service Affecting

NTP Network Time Protocol

OCT Office Craft Terminal

ODU OutDoor Unit

OS Operation System

OSPF Open Shortest Path First

PCM Pulse Code Modulation

PRBS Pseudo--Random Binary Sequence

PSU Power Supply Unit

RF Radio Frequency

RTPC Remote Transmit Power Control

RX Receiver

SA Service Affecting

SCU_NUM Service Channel Unit with digital cable interface

SD Space Diversity

SES Severely Errored Seconds

SI Unavailable seconds

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol resulting from TCP/IParchitecture used on Ethernet type networks

SWP Software Package

TMN Telecom Management Network

TX Transmitter

UAS Unavailable seconds

UF Manufacturing unit

UX Flat ODU 9400 UX with a Flat outdoor unit

VCXO Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator


INDEX

AAlarm & Remote control, wiring, 107

Alarms, description, 42

Antennacoarse alignement, 82polarization, 77

Assembling, ”N” type coaxial connectors, 340

BBetween a terminal’s units, wiring, 108

Between terminals of a station, wiring, 111

Bit ratechanging by software, 284changing via LAU/LIU boards, 285

CCapacity, configuration, 28

Changing1+1 coupler polarisation, 319bit rate by software, 284bit rate via LAU/LIU boards, 285configuration, 271fans, 325frequency, 273fuse, 327IDU, 266MCU board battery, 323NE physical address, 288ODU, 269power level, 317redundancy configurations, 312SIMM memories, 322software key, 288tributaries, 274tributary impedance, 283

Coarse alignment, antenna, 82

Commissioningend, 263equipment, 255checking, 260, 261, 262, 263

order, 255station A(phase 1), 256(phase 2), 261

station B, 259

Configuration, 22, 231+0, 301+1, 34capacity, 28changing, 271hardware, 28indoor unit, 292multiplexer/demultiplexer protection, 36remote indication loops, 309service channels, 295service channels 3, 308software, 113

Configuration with non--- integrated antenna,installing, 94

Consumables, set, 337

Controls, indications and connectors, IDU, 45Access version, 49Classic version, 45Extension version, 48

DDelivery, equipment, 63

Descriptionalarms, 42equipment, 21IDU/ODU cable, 32loopback, 42service channels, 38telesignalling and remote controls, 42

EHuman exposure, Electromagnetic fields, 329

End, commissioning, 263

Engineering service channel, wiring, 106

Equipmentcommissioning, 255checking, 260, 261, 262, 263

delivery, 63description, 21features, 24, 27grounding, 100installing, 70labels, 64maintenance, 265management, 44operation, 265servicing, 265wiring, 99


FFans, changing, 325

Features, equipment, 24, 27

Frequency, changing, 273

Fuse, changing, 327

GGrounding, equipment, 100

IIDUchanging, 266controls, indications and connectors, 45Access version, 49Classic version, 45Extension version, 48

opening, 291

IDU/ODU, wiring, 102

IDU/ODU cable, description, 32

Indoor unit, configuration, 292

Installationinformation, 334tools, 70

Installingequipment, 70laborack, 72Light IDU 19” version, 71software, 114wall mounting, 72

Item, list, 355

LLabels, equipment, 64

Laborack, installing, 72

Light IDU 19” version, installing, 71

Listitems, 355models, 355

Loopback, description, 42

MMaintenancecorrective, 265, 266

equipment, 265preventive, 265

Management, equipment, 44

Manualstructure, 13using, 13

MCU board battery, changing, 323

Model, list, 355

NNE physical address, changing, 288

OODUchanging, 269installing, 75

ODU 9400UX flat ODU, 87installing, 97

ODU 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202, 94xxUXR203,installing, 97

Installing, 87configuration with non--- integrated antenna, 94ODU, 75ODU 9400UX flat ODU, 97ODU 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202, 94xxUXR203,97

pole mounting9400UXI101, 859400UXI102, 77on the pipe, 82, 88

Opening, IDU, 291

Operation, 30equipment, 265software, 113

Order, commissioning, 255

PPin out, user ports, 342

Pointing the antennapole mounting 1+0, 9400UXI102, 260pole mounting 1+1, 9400UXI101, 259

Polarization, antenna, 77

Pole mounting9400UXI101, installing, 859400UXI102, installing, 77on the pipe, 82, 88

Pole mounting 1+0 (9400UXI101), pointing theantenna, 259


Pole mounting 1+0 (9400UXI102), pointing theantenna, 260

SSafety, instructions, 14

Service channel, telephone, 294

Service channels, description, 38

Service kit, 338

Servicing, equipment, 265

Softwareconfiguration, 113installing, 114operation, 113

Software key, changing, 288

Station A, commissioning(phase 1), 256(phase 2), 261

Station B, commissioning, 259

Symbols, 14, 15

TTechnical characteristics, 51

Telesignalling and remote controls, description, 42

Tools, installation, 70

Tributarieschanging, 274wiring, 104

Tributary impedance, changing, 283

UUpgrading, software, 289

WWall mounting, installing, 72

Wiringalarm & remote control, 107between a terminal’s units, 108between terminals of a station, 111engineering service channel, 106equipment, 99IDU/ODU, 102tributaries, 104


FIN DU DOCUMENT

alcatel 9400 ux manual

Documents